Contents

Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 596
1 of 596

Summary of Content for Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL

VLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).

2

INTRODUCTION This is how you find owner's information 14

Digital owner's manual in the car 15

Navigating in the digital owner's manual 16

Owner's Manual in mobile devices 18

Volvo Cars support site 19

Reading the owner's manual 19

Recording data 22

Important information on accesso- ries, extra equipment and diagnostic socket

23

Volvo ID 23

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 25

IntelliSafe-driver support 28

Sensus - connection and maintenance 29

The owner's manual and the environment 32

Windows, glass and mirrors 32

Overview of the centre display 33

Operating the centre display 36

Navigating in the centre display's views 40

Symbols in the centre display's status bar 45

Change settings for the centre display 45

Function view with buttons for car functions

47

Using the keyboard in the centre display 49

Writing characters/letters by hand on the screen

53

SAFETY Safety 56

Safety during pregnancy 56

Whiplash Protection System 57

Pedestrian Protection System 58

Seatbelt 59

Seatbelt tensioner 59

Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 60

Door and seatbelt reminder 62

Airbags 63

Driver and passenger airbags 64

Activating/deactivating the passen- ger airbag*

66

Side airbag 68

Inflatable curtain 69

Safety mode 69

Starting/moving the car after safety mode

70

Child safety 71

Child seats 71

Upper mounting points for child seats 73

Lower mounting points for child seats 74

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts

75

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 77

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 78

Table for location of i-Size child seats 81

Integrated booster cushion* 82

Folding up the integrated booster cushion*

82

Folding down the integrated booster cushion*

84

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car

86

Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car

87

Driver display 90

Driver display settings 94

Indicator symbols in the driver display 95

Warning symbols in the driver display 97

Outside temperature gauge 98

Clock 99

License agreement for the driver display 99

Application menu in the driver display 105

Using the application menu in the driver display

105

Messages in the driver display and the centre display

106

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display

108

Managing messages saved from the driver display and centre display

110

Head-up display* 112

Voice recognition 115

Using voice recognition 116

Settings for voice recognition 117

Voice recognition control of the phone 118

Voice recognition control of radio and media

118

Voice recognition control of climate control

119

Voice recognition and map navigation 120

Manual front seat 121

Power front seat* 121

Adjusting the power front seat* 122

Using the memory function in the power front seat*

122

Multi-functional front seat* 123

Adjusting functions in the multi-func- tional front seat*

124

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat*

127

Rear seat 128

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat

128

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 130

Steering wheel 131

Adjusting the steering wheel 132

Headlamp control 134

Headlamp levelling 135

Position lamps 136

Daytime running lights 137

Dipped beam 137

Activating/deactivating main beam 138

Active bending lights* 141

Adapting the beam pattern from the headlamps

141

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 142

Rear fog lamp 142

Brake lights 143

Hazard warning flashers 143

Using direction indicators 144

Passenger compartment lighting 145

Home safe light duration 148

Approach light duration 148

Using windscreen wipers 148

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 149

Windscreen and headlamp washers 150

Rear window wiper and washer 151

Power windows 151

Operating power windows 152

Using the sun blind* 153

Adjusting the door mirrors 153

Interior rearview mirror 155

Compass* 156

Calibrating the compass* 157

Panorama roof* 158

Operating the panorama roof* 159

HomeLink* 162

4

Programming HomeLink* 163

Trip computer 165

Show trip data in the driver display 166

Show trip statistics in the centre display 168

Settings view 169

Categories in the settings view 170

Changing system settings in the set- tings view

172

Resetting settings in the settings view 173

Driver profiles 174

Selecting driver profile 174

Editing a driver profile 175

Linking remote control key to driver profile

176

Importing/exporting a driver profile from/to USB

177

Changing settings for apps 178

Resetting user data for change of ownership

179

CLIMATE CONTROL Climate control 182

Climate control - sensors 183

Perceived temperature 183

Air quality 184

Passenger compartment filter 185

Clean Zone Interior Package* 185

Interior Air Quality System* 185

Climate controls 186

Climate controls in the centre display 187

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*

188

Auto-regulating the climate 189

Activating/deactivating air conditioning 190

Regulating the temperature 190

Regulating the fan level 193

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors

194

Activating/deactivating air recirculation 196

Air distribution 197

Changing the air distribution 198

Opening/closing and aiming the air vents 199

Table of air distribution options 201

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*

203

Activating/deactivating ventilation of the seats*

204

Activating/deactivating heating of steering wheel*

205

Parking climate* 206

Starting/stopping preconditioning* 207

Timer for preconditioning* 208

Setting the timer for preconditioning* 208

Activating/deactivating the timer for preconditioning*

210

Starting/switching off climate com- fort retention*

210

Symbols and messages for parking climate control*

212

Heater* 213

Parking heater* 214

Additional heater* 215

5

LOADING AND STORAGE Passenger compartment interior 218

Tunnel console 219

Electrical sockets 220

Using the cigarette lighter* 224

Emptying ashtrays* 224

Using the glovebox 225

Sun visors 226

Cargo area 226

Loading 227

Load retaining eyelets 228

Bag hooks 228

Through-load hatch in the rear seat 229

Cargo cover* 230

Safety net* 232

Safety grille* 233

LOCKS AND ALARM Remote control key 236

Remote control key range 238

Red Key - Restricted remote control key* 239

Antenna locations for the start and lock system

240

Locking/unlocking from the outside 241

Indication on locking/unlocking the car 243

Locking/unlocking from the inside 245

Deadlocks* 246

Locking/unlocking the tailgate 247

Using private locking 249

Detachable key blade 250

Locking/unlocking with the detacha- ble key blade

251

Power operated tailgate* 253

Opening/closing the tailgate with foot movement*

256

Replacing the battery in the remote control key

257

Immobiliser 260

Child safety locks 261

Alarm* 262

Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm* 264

Disarming the alarm* without work- ing remote control key

264

Type approval for the remote control key system

265

6

DRIVER SUPPORT Speed-dependent steering force 272

Roll Stability Control 272

Electronic stability control 273

Sport mode for electronic stability control 274

Symbols and messages for elec- tronic stability control

275

Speed limiter* 277

Activating and starting the speed limiter 278

Managing speed for the speed limiter 278

Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter

279

Switching off the speed limiter 280

Automatic speed limiter* 281

Activating/deactivating the automatic speed limiter

282

Changing the tolerance for the Auto- matic speed limiter

283

Cruise control 284

Activating and starting the Cruise control 284

Managing speed for the Cruise control 285

Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control

286

Deactivating Cruise Control 287

Distance Warning* 288

Activating and setting the time inter- val for Distance warning*

289

Limitations of Distance Warning* 290

Adaptive cruise control* 290

Activating and starting the adaptive cruise control*

294

Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise control*

295

Setting the time interval for the adaptive cruise control*

296

Deactivating/activating the adaptive cruise control*

297

Overtaking assistance with the adap- tive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*

298

Change of target and automatic braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control

299

Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* 300

Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control*

301

Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control*

302

Pilot Assist* 304

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* 307

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* 309

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* 310

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* 311

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist*

313

Limitations of Pilot Assist* 314

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 316

Radar unit 318

Limitations of the radar unit 319

Type approval for radar units 323

Camera unit 326

Limitations of the camera unit 327

City Safety 330

Setting the warning distance for City Safety

332

Detection of obstacles with City Safety 333

City Safety in cross traffic 335

City Safety when evasive manoeu- vres are prevented

336

Limitations of City Safety 337

Messages for City Safety 339

Rear Collision Warning 340

Blind Spot Information* 340

Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information*

342

Limitations of Blind Spot Information* 343

Cross Traffic Alert* 343

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* 344

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 345

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert*

347

7

Road Sign Information* 348

Sign display with Road Sign Information 348

Speed camera information* 350

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information

351

Limitations of Road Sign Information* 352

Driver Alert Control 352

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 353

Limitations of Driver Alert Control 354

Lane Keeping Aid 354

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 356

Symbols and messages for lane assistance

358

Run-off Mitigation 360

Symbols and messages for Run-off Mitigation

362

Park Assist* 363

Activating/deactivating Parking assistance*

365

Limitations of Parking assistance* 365

Messages for Park Assist* 367

Park Assist Camera* 368

Park assist lines and fields for the Park Assist Camera*

370

Starting the Park Assist Camera* 372

Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* 373

Park Assist Pilot* 374

Parking with Active parking assistance* 376

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 379

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 381

STARTING AND DRIVING Alcohol lock* 384

Bypass of the alcohol lock* 384

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock

384

Ignition positions 385

Starting the car 386

Switching off the car 387

Steering lock 388

Using jump starting with another battery 388

Gearbox 389

Gear positions for automatic gearbox 390

Manual gearbox 392

Gear shift indicator* 392

Gear selector inhibitor 394

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*

395

Start/Stop 396

Using the Start/Stop function 396

Conditions for the Start/Stop function 398

Drive modes* 400

Drive mode ECO 403

Level control* and shock absorption 405

All-wheel drive 406

Brake functions 406

Foot brake 406

8

Emergency brake lights 408

Brake assistance 408

Auto braking after a collision 409

Parking brake 409

Using the parking brake 410

In the event of a fault in the parking brake

412

Hill start assist 412

Automatic braking when stationary 413

Low speed control 414

Hill descent control 415

Driving in water 416

Overheating in the engine and drive system

417

Overloading the starter battery 418

Preparations for a long trip 418

Winter driving 419

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refuelling

420

Handling of fuel 421

Petrol 422

Diesel 423

Empty tank and diesel engine 424

Diesel particulate filter 424

Economical driving 425

Towing bracket* 426

Extendable/retractable towing brackets* 426

Towing bracket specifications* 428

Driving with a trailer 429

Driving with a trailer under special conditions

431

Trailer Stability Assist* 432

Towing eye 433

Towing 434

Recovering the car 435

AUDIO AND MEDIA Audio and media 438

Apps 438

Audio settings 439

Radio 440

Changing and searching radio stations 440

RDS radio 443

Digital radio 444

Linking between different radio bands FM and DAB

444

Settings for radio 445

Media player 446

Media playback 447

Gracenote 449

Searching media 450

CD player* 450

Media via Bluetooth 451

Connecting media via Bluetooth 451

Media via AUX/USB input 451

Connecting media via AUX/USB input 452

video 452

Audio settings for media 452

TV* 453

Using the TV* 453

Apple CarPlay* 454

9

Using Apple CarPlay* 455

Settings for Apple CarPlay* 456

Android Auto* 457

Settings for Android Auto* 458

Technical specifications for media 459

Phone 460

Connect phone 461

Connecting/disconnecting the phone 462

Managing phone calls 463

Managing text messages 465

Managing the phone book 466

Settings for phone 466

Settings for text messages 467

Bluetooth settings 467

Online car* 467

Connecting the car 468

Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 469

No or poor connection 470

Remove Wi-Fi network 471

Wi-Fi technologies and security 471

Settings for car modem* 472

Downloading, updating and uninstal- ling apps

472

License agreement for audio and media 474

Terms and conditions for services and Customer Privacy Policy

484

WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres 486

Tyres' rotation direction 487

Tread wear indicators on the tyres 488

Checking the tyre pressures 488

Tyre monitoring* 489

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitoring system*

491

Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre monitoring*

492

Calibrating tyre monitoring* 493

Emergency puncture repair kit 494

Using the emergency puncture repair kit 495

Inflate tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit

498

When changing wheels 499

Removing a wheel 499

Fitting the wheels 501

Wheel bolts 502

Spare wheel* 502

Winter wheels 503

Tool kit 504

Warning triangle 504

Jack* 505

First aid kit 505

Dimension designation for wheel rim 506

10

Dimension designation for tyre 506

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 510

Car status 510

Book service and repair 510

Remote updates 513

System updates 513

Data transmission between car and workshop

514

Raise the car 516

Opening and closing the bonnet 518

Engine compartment overview 519

Engine oil 520

Checking and filling with engine oil 521

Topping up coolant 522

Servicing the climate control system 524

Bulb replacement 524

Replacing the dipped beam bulb 526

Replacing the main beam lamp 527

Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front

528

Replacing the front direction indica- tor bulb

528

Replacing the reversing lamp bulb 529

Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb 530

Bulb specifications 530

Wiper blades in service position 531

Replacing a wiper blade 532

Filling washer fluid 533

Starter battery 534

Symbols on the batteries 537

Support battery 537

Fuses 539

Replacing a fuse 540

Fuses in engine compartment 541

Fuses under glovebox 544

Fuses in cargo area 548

Cleaning the exterior 551

Polishing and waxing 553

Rustproofing 554

Cleaning the interior 554

Cleaning the centre display 555

Paint damage 556

Repairing paint damage 557

11

SPECIFICATIONS Type designations 560

Dimensions 563

Weights 564

Towing capacity and towball load 565

Engine specifications 567

Engine oil specifications 568

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 569

Coolant specifications 570

Transmission fluid specifications 570

Brake fluid specifications 570

Fuel tank - volume 571

Air conditioning specifications 571

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 573

Approved wheel and tyre sizes 575

Load index and speed rating 576

Approved tyre pressures 577

ALPHABETICAL INDEX Alphabetical Index 579

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

14

This is how you find owner's information Owner's information is available in several differ- ent product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered.

The car's centre display1

In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner's manual. Available here are options for visual navi- gation with exterior and interior images of the car. The informa- tion is searchable and is also

divided into categories.

Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation with exterior

and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- gate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable.

Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and

help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- ship. The page is available for most markets.

Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual1 in the glove- box that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information.

There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.

Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car.

A printed owner's manual and associated supple- ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order.

Changing the language in the car's centre display Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information does not correspond to national or local laws and regula- tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult to understand, it may then be difficult to find your way back in the structure on the screen.

1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.

INTRODUCTION

}}

15

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica- ble laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- mendations in the owner's information.

If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the prin- ted information then it is always the printed information that applies.

Related information Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)

Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)

Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)

Digital owner's manual in the car A digital2 version of the owner's manual is availa- ble in the car's centre display.

The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top view.

To open the digital owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual.

NOTE

The digital owner's manual is not available while driving.

There is a range of different options for finding information in the digital owner's manual. The options can be reached from the start page of

the owner's manual. One way is from the top

menu, with a tap on .

Symbols and their meaning in the owner's

manual menu

Leads to the start page of the Owner's Manual.

Articles grouped by cate- gory. The same article may appear in several catego- ries.

Leads to a Quick Guide page with links for a selec- tion of articles that can be particularly useful to read. Provides answers to com- mon questions about the car.

2 Applies for most markets.

||

INTRODUCTION

16

Symbols and their meaning in the owner's

manual menu

Exterior and interior over- view images of the car. Dif- ferent parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about those parts of the car.

All articles that have been favourited are compiled here.

Symbols and their meaning in the owner's

manual menu

Leads to short video tutori- als for different functions in the car.

Indicates what version of the Owner's Manual is available in the car and pro- vides other useful informa- tion.

Related information Navigating in the digital owner's manual

(p. 16)

Navigating in the digital owner's manual The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the centre display in the car. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections.

The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top view.

Open the digital owner's manual To open the digital owner's manual - drag

down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual.

There is a range of different options for finding information in the digital owner's manual. To

access the owner's manual menu press in the upper bar of the owner's manual.

INTRODUCTION

}}

17

Searching using categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcate- gories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories in order to be found more easily.

1. Press and then select Categories.

> The main categories are shown in a list.

2. Tap on a main category ( ).

> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles

( ) is shown.

3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, press the back arrow.

Hotspots for exterior and interior Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hot- spots that lead to articles about those parts of the car.

1. Press and then select Exterior/ Interior.

> Exterior/interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images.

2. Tap on a hotspot.

> The title of the article about the area is shown.

3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go back, press the back arrow.

Learn about the car's most common functions with the Quick Guide

Leads to a page with links for a selection of articles that can be particularly useful to read in order to get to know the most common functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but

are collected here for quick access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.

Favourites Located here are the articles that have been saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.

Saving/deleting articles as favourites

Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:

.

To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article.

Video Leads to short video tutorials for different functions in the car.

Information Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is availa- ble in the car as well as other useful information.

||

INTRODUCTION

18

Start page Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner's manual.

Using the search function 1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's

manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen.

2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".

> Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered.

3. Tap on the article/category to access it.

Related information Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Owner's Manual in mobile devices The owner's manual is available as a mobile app from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.

The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for "Volvo manual" in

the App Store or Google Play.

The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is search- able.

The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play.

Related information Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 19

Volvo Cars support site More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site. There you

can navigate through to My Volvo3, a personal web page for you and your car.

Support on the Internet

Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets.

It contains support for functions such as web- based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and step- by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone.

Downloadable information

Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there is the facility to download maps from the support page.

Owner's manuals as PDF Owner's manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required.

Contact The support site contains contact details to cus- tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer.

My Volvo on the Internet3

From www.volvocars.com it is possible to navigate through to My Volvo Web which is a personal Web page for you and your car.

Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo Web and get an overview of service, agreements and warranties, amongst other things. At My Volvo Web there is also information about acces- sories and software adapted for your car model.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 23)

Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey.

Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situa- tions and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's man- ual.

Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustra- tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip- ment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.

Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob- lems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing.

Volvo Car Corporation

Options/accessories In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

3 Applies to certain markets.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.20

All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk: *.

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.

Footnote The owner's manual contains information in cer- tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot- tom of the page or at the end of a table. This information is an addition to the text that it refers

to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show menu and message texts. In the owner's manual the appearance of these texts differs from the normal text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: Phone, New message.

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of impor- tance for the warning/information.

Warning of personal injury

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indi-

cate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

INTRODUCTION

21

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man- ual:

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is num-

bered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instruc- tions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the relative order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

Related information Related information refers to other articles con- taining closely associated information.

Images The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.

To be continued }} This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the following page.

Continued from previous page || This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previous page.

Related information Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)

Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)

INTRODUCTION

22

Recording data As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.

This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- ter and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:

How the various systems in the car worked

Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned

The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal

The travel speed of the vehicle

This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- ries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal

driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- uation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- tered data.

In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehi- cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa- tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).

Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi- cle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Informa- tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com- puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.

In addition to the above, the registered informa- tion can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of contin- uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties with- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- icing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further informa- tion - contact a Volvo dealer.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 23

Important information on accessories, extra equipment and diagnostic socket Incorrect connection and installation of accesso- ries, extra equipment or software/diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car's electronic system.

Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends always making contact with an authorised Volvo work- shop before the installation of accessories or extra equipment that are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket

WARNING

Volvo Cars accepts no responsibility for the consequences of cases where non-authorised equipment is connected to the car's data link connector (On-Board-Diagnostics (OBD-II)).

The diagnostic socket is located under the instrument panel and on the same side as the steering wheel.

Volvo ID Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-

sonalized Volvo services4 online.

It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car, My Volvo5 or the Volvo On Call app6. Certain func- tions and services require that the car is regis- tered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo services available directly from the car.

Examples of services:

My Volvo - A personal web page for you and your car.

Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log- ging in to the Volvo On Call app.

Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an address from an Internet map service directly to the car.

Book Service and Repair - Register your pre- ferred workshop/dealer in My Volvo to be able to book service directly from the car.

Creating a Volvo ID It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created with My Volvo or the Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services.

4 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market. 5 Available in certain markets. 6 If you have Volvo On Call*.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.24

In My Volvo5

1. Go to www.volvocars.com and navigate through to My Volvo.

2. Enter a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.

With Volvo On Call mobile app6

1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.

2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's start page and enter a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.

Registering your Volvo ID to the car If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol- lows:

1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view.

NOTE

To download apps, the car must be con- nected to the Internet.

2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID.

> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.

Creating and registering a Volvo ID for the car 1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID

app from Download Centre.

2. Start the app and register a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.

Advantages of Volvo ID One user name and one password to access

online services, i.e. only one username and one password to remember.

If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services (e.g. My Volvo).

Related information Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps

(p. 472)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

5 Available in certain markets. 6 If you have Volvo On Call*.

INTRODUCTION

}}

25

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient

products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars core val- ues and influences all operations. The environ- mental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.

Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air

inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system.

Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur- ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the opera- tion's environmental issues, which leads to con- tinuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.

Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con- sumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.26

Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- ment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment - here is some advice:

Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.

Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and main- tenance of the car.

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.

Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.

Use preconditioning* before starting in cold conditions - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather. The engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which decreases consumption and reduces emissions.

Also remember to always dispose of environmen- tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work- shop in the event of uncertainty about how this

type of waste should be discarded - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encom- passes a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- ble standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger compart- ment via the air intake.

The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.

The system cleans the air in the passenger com- partment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.

Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowl- edge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer- ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 27

Related information Drive modes* (p. 400)

The owner's manual and the environment (p. 32)

Economical driving (p. 425)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 573)

Air quality (p. 184)

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.28

IntelliSafe-driver support IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning car safety. It comprises a number of systems that contribute to making a car journey safe, to the prevention of injuries and to the protection of passengers from other road users.

Support There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner. The driver support functions incorporated in the car include e.g. the adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control)* that ensures that a constant distance is held between the car and the vehicle in front.

Pilot Assist* helps the driver to keep the car between the lane's edge markings, combined with maintaining a preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by sensing the area around it.

Other examples of systems that help the driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys- tems.

Prevention An example of a function that helps to prevent accidents is City Safety. The function warns the driver of risks of collision with another vehicle, pedestrians, cyclists or larger animals. If the driver

does not react to the warning and the risk of col- lision is imminent then City Safety can automati- cally brake the car.

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a function that helps to prevent accidents by warn- ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter- ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side line.

Also available is the run-off mitigation function (Run off mitigation), whose purpose is to reduce the risk of the car unintentionally leaving the road, and it actively steers the car back onto the road.

Protection To protect the driver and passengers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can ten- sion the seatbelts in critical situations and in col- lisions. It also has airbags and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) which protects against whiplash injuries.

A Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is also available for mitigating a pedestrian's impact with the car in the event of a frontal collision.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)

Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)

Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

City Safety (p. 330)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Roll Stability Control (p. 272)

Seatbelt (p. 59)

Safety (p. 56)

Airbags (p. 63)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 29

Sensus - connection and maintenance Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, use different types of apps and make the car a Wi-Fi hotspot.

This is Sensus

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver.

Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectiv- ity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi- cation possible between you, the car and the out- side world.

Information when it is needed, where it is needed The different displays in the car provide informa- tion at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be pri- oritised by the driver.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.30

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.

Head-up display*

The head-up display shows selected information that the driver should deal with as soon as possi- ble. Such information includes traffic warnings,

speed information and navigation* information. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-up display. The dis- play is operated via the right-hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre display.

Driver display

12-inch driver display.

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 31

8-inch driver display.

The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being played. The display is operated via the two steer- ing wheel keypads.

Centre display

Many of the main functions of the car are con- trolled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- mal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves.

The climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position are controlled from here, for example. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises.

Voice recognition system The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The sys- tem can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to play back a song, call some-

one, increase the temperature or read out a text message.

For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement.

Related information Operating the centre display (p. 36)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

Driver display (p. 90)

Voice recognition (p. 115)

Online car* (p. 467)

Audio and media (p. 438)

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.32

The owner's manual and the environment The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi- nating from controlled forests.

The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC-certified forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)

Windows, glass and mirrors The car contains controls for windows, glass and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are reinforced with lamination, which makes the pas- senger compartment more soundproof, amongst other things.

Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina- ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. Laminated glass is available as an option for cer- tain other glass surfaces.

The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated7.

Related information Panorama roof* (p. 158)

Power windows (p. 151)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 194)

Using the sun blind* (p. 153)

Interior rearview mirror (p. 155)

Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 153)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)

Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)

7 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.

INTRODUCTION

}}

33

Overview of the centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options.

||

INTRODUCTION

34

Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively8.

Function view - car functions that are acti- vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func-

tions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window with set-

8 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 35

ting options. Examples of such are Camera and parking functions.

Home view - the first view that is shown when the screen is started.

Application view (app view) - apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.

Status bar - the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Net- work/connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media- related information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right.

Top view - drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner's manual, Profile and the car's saved mes- sages are accessed from here.

Navigation - leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Media - recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Phone - the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Extra subview - recently used apps/car func- tions that do not belong in any of the other subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Climate row - information and direct interac- tion to set temperature, seat heating level and fan level. Tap on the symbol in the cen- tre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options.

Related information Operating the centre display (p. 36)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40)

Function view with buttons for car functions (p. 47)

Changing settings for apps (p. 178)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

Settings view (p. 169)

Media player (p. 446)

Phone (p. 460)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 555)

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.36

Operating the centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.

Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Actions such as browsing between different

views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov- ing apps can be performed by touching the screen in different ways.

An infrared film enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This tech- nology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on.

Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively.

IMPORTANT

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.

The table below presents the different proce- dures for operating the screen:

Procedure Execution Result

Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.

Press twice in quick suc- cession.

Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.

Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.

Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 37

Procedure Execution Result

Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Drag apart Zooms in.

Drag together Zooms out.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.38

Turn off the screen and reactivate it

Home button for the centre display.

When the centre display is switched off, the screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible, and apps and other functions connected to the screen will continue to run.

1. Give a long press on the physical home but- ton below the screen.

> The screen goes dark except for the cli- mate row, which continues to be shown. All functions continue to run, such as cli- mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In this mode, the screen can be cleaned with the cloth supplied; see the section "Cleaning the centre display".

2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the home button.

> The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again.

NOTE

The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen.

NOTE

The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's door is opened.

Returning to home view from another view 1. Briefly press the home button.

> The last position of the home view is shown.

2. Briefly press again.

> All subviews of the home view are set to their default mode.

NOTE

In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.

Moving apps and buttons for car functions The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired.

1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed.

> The app/button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it.

2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the view.

The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app/button can be located.

An app/button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view.

Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/down- ward in the view.

INTRODUCTION

39

NOTE

Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often.

Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.

The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view.

Using the controls in the centre display

Temperature control.

The control is used for many of the car's func- tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following:

drag the control to the desired temperature,

tap on +/ in order to raise/lower the tem- perature gradually, or

tap on the desired temperature on the con- trol.

Related information Navigating in the centre display's views

(p. 40)

Settings view (p. 169)

Sensus - connection and maintenance (p. 29)

Remote control key range (p. 238)

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 472)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Change settings for the centre display (p. 45)

INTRODUCTION

40

Navigating in the centre display's views There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, appli- cation view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver's door is opened.

Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub- view.

An app/car function selected from the app/func- tion view starts in the respective subview of the home view. For example FM radio starts in the Media subview.

The extra subview contains the last used app/car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas.

The subviews show brief information about each different app.

NOTE

The first time the car is used, some of the home view's subviews have no content.

NOTE

In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.

INTRODUCTION

}}

41

Expanding a subview from default mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.

||

INTRODUCTION

42

Expanding a subview:

Press anywhere on the subview. When a subview is expanded, the fourth subview in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two are minimised and only certain information is shown.

The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app.

Closing an expanded subview:

The subview can be closed in three different ways.

Tap on the upper part of the expanded subview.

Tap on another subview (that subview will then open in expanded mode instead).

Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display.

Opening/closing a subview in full screen mode The extra subview and the subview for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more set- ting options.

When a new subview is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other subviews is shown.

In expanded mode, open the app in full screen - press on the symbol.

Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen.

Home button for the centre display.

There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. Go back to the home view's standard view from full screen mode - press twice on the home button.

Status bar The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network/connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right.

Top view

Top view dragged down.

A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.

In the top view, access is available to:

Settings

Owner's manual

Profile

The car's saved messages.

INTRODUCTION

}}

43

Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi- ble and available for use again.

NOTE

The top view is not available during starting/ shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when cli- mate view is shown.

Go into the top view from an app Drag down the top view when an app is running, e.g. FM radio:

Press FM Radio Settings - settings that are associated with FM radio are shown.

Press FM Radio Manual - an article that is associated with FM radio is opened.

This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not possible to access app-specific articles or set- tings, for example.

Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting tem- perature, seat heating and fan.

Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate set- tings.

Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view.

Application view

Application view with the car's apps.

Swipe from right to left9 across the screen in order to access the application view (app view) from the home view. Apps that have been down- loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer- tain apps show brief information directly in the

9 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.44

app view, such as the number of unread text messages for Messages.

Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the subview to which it belongs, such as Media.

Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.

To move an app:

1. Tap on the app and hold depressed.

> The app becomes slightly transparent and larger when it is ready to be moved.

2. Drag the app to the desired location.

NOTE

Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied.

Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right9 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.

Function view

The function view with buttons for different car func- tions.

Swipe from left to right9 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate/deactivate dif- ferent car functions, e.g. Lane Departure Warning, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.

Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.

Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated/deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some func- tions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed.

Just as in app view, it is possible to move the function buttons around and arrange them in the desired order.

Related information Operating the centre display (p. 36)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Function view with buttons for car functions (p. 47)

Changing settings for apps (p. 178)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

9 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

INTRODUCTION

}}

45

Symbols in the centre display's status bar Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display's status bar.

The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar.

Symbol Specification

Roaming activated.

Signal strength in mobile phone net- work.

Bluetooth device connected.

Bluetooth activated but no device connected.

Connected to Wi-Fi network.

Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection.

Car modem activated.

Remote diagnostics active.

Process in progress.

Symbol Specification

Preconditioning in progress.

Audio source being played back.

Audio source stopped.

Phone call in progress.

Audio source muted.

News is received from the radio channel.

Traffic information is received.

Clock.

Related information Messages in the driver display and the centre

display (p. 106)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40)

Change settings for the centre display The centre display is started automatically when the driver's door is opened. The settings can be changed for the centre display to personalise sound and themes. The screen can be switched off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving.

Switching off/changing the system sounds volume in the centre display. The system sounds volume in the centre display can be adjusted or switched off:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Sound System Volumes.

3. Under Screen Touch, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds and Keypad Touch in order to adjust the volume/switch off screen key- board touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume.

Changing the appearance of the screen 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Displays Display Themes.

3. Then select theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings.

As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos- sible to choose between Normal and Bright.

||

INTRODUCTION

46

With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day- light.

This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.

Related information Settings view (p. 169)

Sensus - connection and maintenance (p. 29)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 555)

Operating the centre display (p. 36)

INTRODUCTION

}}

47

Function view with buttons for car functions All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display's

basic views. Navigate to the function view from home view by swiping from left to right across

the screen10.

Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below:

Type of button Property Affects car function

Function buttons Have on/off positions.

When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the but- ton. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.

Most buttons in function view are function buttons.

Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.

When a trigger button is pressed, a window for the function opens. For example, it may be a window for changing a seat's position.

Camera

Headrest fold

Functions for folding seats

Head-up display adjustments

Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.

Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.

Park In

Park Out

10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

||

INTRODUCTION

48

The buttons' different modes

When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is acti- vated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated.

For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed.

Briefly tap on the button once in order to acti- vate/deactivate the function.

The function is deactivated when the LED indica- tor is extinguished.

When a warning triangle is shown in the right- hand section of the button there is something not working as intended.

Related information Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40)

Categories in the settings view (p. 170)

INTRODUCTION

}}

49

Using the keyboard in the centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand.

Making entries with the keyboard The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for arti- cles in the digital owner's manual.

The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen.

||

INTRODUCTION

50

The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used.

INTRODUCTION

}}

51

Row of suggested words or characters11. The suggested words are adjusted as new letters are being entered. Browse among the suggestions by pressing on the right and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note that this function is not supported by all lan- guage selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard.

The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.

The button works in different ways, depend- ing on the context in which the keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input).

Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown.

Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- tal letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or addresses, each word automatically starts with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address

entry, all letters are automatically lower case unless otherwise set with the button.

Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then

shown with numbers. Press , which in

number mode is shown instead of , to

return to the letter keyboard, or to open the keyboard with special characters.

Changes text input language, e.g. UK. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. Press to open a list of languages and then tap on the language to be used. To add addi- tional languages in the keyboard - see the heading "Changing keyboard language" below.

Space.

Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly.

Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead. Read more under the heading "Writing characters/ letters by hand on the screen".

Press the confirmation button above the key- board (not visible in the image) to confirm the entered text. The appearance of the button dif- fers depending on context.

Changing the keyboard language To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.

Adding/deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Keyboard Layouts.

3. Select one or more languages from the list.

> It is now possible to switch between the selected languages directly from the key- board for text input.

If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard uses the same lan- guage as the car's system language; see the section "Changing system settings in the set- tings view".

11 Applies to Asiatic languages.

||

INTRODUCTION

52

Switching between different languages in the keyboard

When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the keyboard button (shown in context as number 7 in the illustration above) is used to switch between different lan- guages.

To change keyboard language:

1. Press and hold the button (see image above).

> A list opens.

2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard.

> The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given.

Variants of a letter or character

To enter a variant of a letter/character, e.g. or :

1. Press and hold the letter/character.

> A box with possible variants of the letter/ character opens.

2. Press the required variant. If none of the vari- ants are selected, the original letter/charac- ter is entered.

Related information Settings view (p. 169)

Operating the centre display (p. 36)

Managing text messages (p. 465)

Changing system settings in the settings view (p. 172)

INTRODUCTION

53

Writing characters/letters by hand on the screen

Area for writing letters/characters.

Text field where letters/characters are entered as they are drawn out on the screen.

Suggested letters/characters. The list is scrollable.

Space.

Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one letter/character at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next letter/character, etc.

Return to the keyboard with regular charac- ter input.

Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown.

Change text input language.

Writing characters/letters by hand 1. Write a character/letter in the area for hand-

written letters (1).

> A number of suggested characters or let- ters is shown (3). The most likely choice is found at the top of the list.

2. Enter the character/letter by waiting a moment.

> The character/letter at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing the required character/letter in the list.

Deleting/changing characters/letters written by hand

Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1).

There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters:

Press the intended letter in the list (3).

Press the text undo button (5) to delete the letter and begin again.

Swipe horizontally from right to left12 over the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete multiple letters by swiping over the area several times.

Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text.

Changing row in the free text field with handwriting

Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field13.

Related information Managing text messages (p. 465)

Changing system settings in the settings view (p. 172)

12 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space. 13 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.

SAFETY

SAFETY

56

Safety The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- tems that work together to protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of an acci- dent.

The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, rollover or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide the best protection.

There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.

The car's safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged.

Warning symbol in driver display The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car's elec- trical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extinguished after

approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the mes- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible.

If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illu- minated instead and the driver display shows the same message.

Related information Safety during pregnancy (p. 56)

Seatbelt (p. 59)

Airbags (p. 63)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)

Pedestrian Protection System (p. 58)

Safety mode (p. 69)

Child safety (p. 71)

Safety during pregnancy It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position.

Seatbelt

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul- der then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 57

cle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- ing wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.

Related information Safety (p. 56)

Seatbelt (p. 59)

Manual front seat (p. 121)

Power front seat* (p. 121)

Whiplash Protection System Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is a pro- tection against whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy-absorbing backrests and seat cushions, and specially designed head restraints in the front seats.

WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the colli- sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back- rests are lowered backward and the seat cush- ions move downward to change the seating posi- tion of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING

WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a colli- sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged.

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- rest.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the cor- responding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the folded backrest.

Seating position For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's func- tion is not obstructed.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.58

Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS.

Related information Safety (p. 56)

Manual front seat (p. 121)

Power front seat* (p. 121)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)

Child seats (p. 71)

Pedestrian Protection System The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a system which, in certain frontal collisions, con- tributes to mitigating a pedestrian's impact with the car.

In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the sensors in the front of the car react and the sys- tem is activated.

When PPS is activated, the following occur:

The rear section of the bonnet is raised.

An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On Call*.

The sensors are active at a speed of approx. 25-50 km/h (15-30 mph).

The sensors are designed to detect a collision with an object that has similar properties to those of the human leg.

NOTE

There may be objects in the traffic environ- ment that prompt a signal to the sensors that is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is possible that the system will be activated in the event of a collision with such an object.

WARNING

Do not fit any accessories or change anything in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and damage to the car.

Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that only genuine parts are used for them.

WARNING

Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop in the event of any damage to the front of the car in order to ensure that the system is intact.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

PPS has been activated, or a fault has occurred in the system. Follow the recommendation given.

Related information Safety (p. 56)

SAFETY

}}

59

Seatbelt Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

WARNING

Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Safety (p. 56)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)

Seatbelt tensioner The car is fitted with pyrotechnic and electric seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seat- belts in critical situations and collisions.

Seatbelt tensioner during collision All the seatbelts are equipped with a pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner.

The pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant.

Seatbelt tensioner during critical situations The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.

The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support sys- tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, sharp evasive action, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls over into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits some off-road object), skidding, or risk of colli- sion, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seat- belt tensioner's electric motor.

The electric seatbelt tensioner adjusts the occu- pant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car's interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.60

IMPORTANT

If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner Once the critical situation has passed, the seat- belt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset automatically.

If the belt still remains tensioned:

1. Stop the car at a safe place.

2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.

> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten- sioner are reset.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt (p. 59)

Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)

City Safety (p. 330)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)

Activating/deactivating the passenger air- bag* (p. 66)

Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive.

Fastening a seatbelt 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it

is not twisted or damaged.

NOTE

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle.

> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

WARNING

Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a colli- sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

SAFETY

61

3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be adjusted for height.

Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down.

Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.

The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm).

4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.

WARNING

Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING

Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a colli- sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

Unfastening a seatbelt 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle

and then let the belt retract.

2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelt (p. 59)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)

SAFETY

62

Door and seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.

Driver display graphics

Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed.

The driver display's graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas- sengers.

The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail- gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.

The graphics are cleared automatically after approximately 30 seconds of driving, or by press- ing on the right-hand the steering wheel keypad's O button.

Seatbelt reminder

Visual reminder in the roof console.

A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis- play.

The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance.

The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display graphics when a belt is buckled or unbuckled.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The driver dis- play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use.

Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder stops when the seatbelt is refastened, or it can be acknowledged manually by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad.

Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display's graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's information symbol illu- minates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illumi- nates.

SAFETY

63

Related information Seatbelt (p. 59)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)

Airbags The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers.

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom- mends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Deployed airbags If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

Related information Safety (p. 56)

Driver and passenger airbags (p. 64)

Side airbag (p. 68)

Inflatable curtain (p. 69)

SAFETY

64

Driver and passenger airbags As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with airbags on the driver and passen- ger sides in the front seat.

Driver and passenger airbags1.

In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, face and chest of the driver and passenger as well as the knees and legs1 of the driver.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occu- pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire

process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- ingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

Driver airbags

Airbag in the steering wheel This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

Knee airbag1

The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed.

Passenger airbag The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

SAFETY

* Option/accessory. 65

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

WARNING

If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- bag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Related information Airbags (p. 63)

Activating/deactivating the passenger air- bag* (p. 66)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.66

Activating/deactivating the passenger airbag* The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS).

Switch The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required position.

ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac- ing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat.

OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat.

WARNING

If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- bag will always be activated.

Activating the passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF (B) to ON (A).

> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge.

NOTE

If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.

SAFETY

}}

67

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

> A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated.

The passenger airbag must always be acti- vated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Deactivating the passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from ON (A) to OFF (B).

> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge.

NOTE

If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

> A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated.

WARNING

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

IMPORTANT

If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

||

SAFETY

68

Related information Driver and passenger airbags (p. 64)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Child seats (p. 71)

Side airbag The side airbags on the driver and passenger seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a collision.

The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

WARNING

Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Side airbag and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

Related information Airbags (p. 63)

Child seats (p. 71)

SAFETY

}}

69

Inflatable curtain The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car dur- ing a collision.

The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas.

WARNING

Leave 10 cm space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information Airbags (p. 63)

Safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- gered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system.

If the car has been involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See Owner's manual is shown in the driver display together with the warning symbol. This means that the car has reduced functionality.

If the car is set in safety mode, it is possible to try to reset the system and then start and move the car from a dangerous position.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that engaging an author- ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner's manual has been shown.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

||

SAFETY

70

Related information Safety (p. 56)

Starting/moving the car after safety mode (p. 70)

Starting/moving the car after safety mode If the car is set in safety mode, it is possible to try to start and then move the car from a danger- ous position.

Starting the car after safety mode 1. First, check that no fuel is leaking from the

car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.

2. Turn the start knob to STOP and release it.

3. Then try to start the car.

> The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal sta- tus.

IMPORTANT

If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid- den damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.

Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the message Normal mode The car is

now in normal mode is shown in the driver display after a start attempt, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.

2. Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Safety mode (p. 69)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 71

Child safety Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car.

Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti- mum conditions are obtained for the child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits well and is simple to use.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front- facing booster cushions/child seats until the child is 140 cm tall.

NOTE

Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Related information Safety (p. 56)

Child seats (p. 71)

Integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)

Child seats The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size.

Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is impor- tant to read the installation instructions included.

Location of child seats

Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is

||

SAFETY

72

sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- senger seat.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of chil- dren in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

WARNING

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Child seat installation The following points are important to consider when a child seat is being fitted in the car.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Installation in the front seat

When fitting rear-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated.

Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.

ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console2

accessory.

If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these2.

The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to facilitate child seat installation.

Installation in the rear seat

Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.

A child seat with support legs must not be fitted in the centre seat.

The outer seats are equipped with the ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i- Size3.

The outer seats are equipped with upper mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat's upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.

If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed.

2 The accessory range varies depending on market. 3 Varies depending on market.

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 73

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

Related information Child safety (p. 71)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)

Activating/deactivating the passenger air- bag* (p. 66)

Upper mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest.

The mounting points are located on the rear of the rear seat's outer seats.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.74

WARNING

The child seat's upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- mendations from the child seat manufacturer.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- ing head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

Related information Child seats (p. 71)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 75)

Lower mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the rear seat.

The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations in the front seat.

The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.

The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.

Mounting point locations in the rear seat.

The mounting points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.

Related information Child seats (p. 71)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 75)

Activating/deactivating the passenger air- bag* (p. 66)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 75

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

NOTE

Always read the section "Child seats" before fitting a child seat in the car.

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing

child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg UA, B X UB UB

Group 0+

max 13 kg UA, B X UB UB

Group 1

9-18 kg LC UFA, D U, LC U

Group 2

15-25 kg LC UFA UE, F, B*, G, LC UE

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.76

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing

child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 3

22-36 kg X UFA UF, H, B*, G UH

U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.

L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.

B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.

X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.

A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). C Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. E Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type

approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). F Volvo recommends: Rmer KidFix XP (type approval E1 04301312). G Volvo recommends: integrated booster cushion. H Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Related information Child seats (p. 71)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 78)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 81)

SAFETY

77

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX4 mount- ing points for child seats in the rear seat.

i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols4 on the upholstery of the backrest.

The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are located behind covers in the lower section of the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.

Lift the covers in order to access the mounting points.

Related information Child seats (p. 71)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 81)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 78)

4 Names and symbols change depending on market.

SAFETY

78

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.

NOTE

Always read the section "Child seats" before fitting a child seat in the car.

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child

seats)B

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)B

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X

Group 0+

max 13 kg

E Rear-facing infant seat

ILB, C, E, XD X ILC XC Rear-facing child seat

D Rear-facing child seat

SAFETY

}}

79

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child

seats)B

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)B

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

A Front-facing child seat

X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF XB Front-facing child seat

B1 Front-facing child seat

C Rear-facing child seat ILB, E, XD X ILG X

D Rear-facing child seat

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego- ries.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.

X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.

A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. E Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not touch the child seat. F Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. G Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

NOTE

If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which i- Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

||

SAFETY

80

Related information Child seats (p. 71)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 81)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 75)

SAFETY

81

Table for location of i-Size child seats The table gives a recommendation for which i- Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129.

NOTE

Always read the section "Child seats" before fitting a child seat in the car.

Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-

facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac-

ing child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

i-Size child seats X X i-UA X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.

X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Related information Child seats (p. 71)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 78)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 75)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.82

Integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushions on the outer seats in the rear seat allow children to sit com- fortably and safely.

The booster cushion is specially designed to pro- vide optimum safety. In combination with the seatbelt it is approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 97 cm in height.

Correct position, the seatbelt must pass over the shoul- der.

Check before driving that:

the integrated booster cushion is in locked mode

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder

the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec- tion.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an inte- grated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

WARNING

If the instructions for the integrated booster cushion are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an acci- dent.

Related information Child safety (p. 71)

Folding up the integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)

Folding down the integrated booster cush- ion* (p. 84)

Folding up the integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushions on the outer seats in the rear seat are folded up for use.

The booster cushion can be folded up in two positions. The position that should be used depends on the weight of the child.

Lower position Upper position

Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg

Lower position:

Pull the handle forward and up in order to release the booster cushion.

SAFETY

* Option/accessory. 83

Press the booster cushion backwards to lock.

Upper position, start from the lower position:

Press the button to release the booster cushion.

Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge and press it back against the backrest to lock.

WARNING

If the instructions for the integrated booster cushion are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an acci- dent.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the booster seat from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper position, the booster seat must first be fully lowered into the seat cush- ion, and then folded up to the lower position.

Related information Integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)

Folding down the integrated booster cush- ion* (p. 84)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.84

Folding down the integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushions on the outer seats in the rear seat can be folded down when not in use.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the booster seat from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper position, the booster seat must first be fully lowered into the seat cush- ion, and then folded up to the lower position.

Pull the handle forwards to release the cush- ion.

Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it.

IMPORTANT

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the cush- ion before lowering.

NOTE

Before the rear backrest is lowered, the booster cushion must be lowered first.

Related information Integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)

Folding up the integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.86

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.

Display/function/control

Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indi- cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

Head-up display*

Driver display

Wipers and washing, rain sensor*

Display/function/control

Right-hand steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

Horn

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Bonnet opening

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking, tail- gate opening/closing*, halogen head- lamp levelling

Display/function/control

Front reading lamps and interior lighting

Panorama roof*

Display in roof console

Manual dimming of interior rearview mir- ror

Display/function/control

Centre display

Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ heated windscreen*, media, glovebox door opening

Gear selector

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 87

Display/function/control

Ignition dial

Drive mode control*

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Display/function/control

Memory for setup of:

power front seat*

Door mirrors

Head-up display*

Door opening, locking/unlocking of side doors and tailgate

Display/function/control

Power windows, door mirrors

Adjusting front seat

Instruments and controls, right- hand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.

Display/function/control

Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indi- cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

Head-up display*

Driver display

Wipers and washing, rain sensor*

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.88

Display/function/control

Right-hand steering wheel keypad

Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate, opening/closing the tailgate*

Bonnet opening

Horn

Steering wheel adjustment

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Display/function/control

Front reading lamps and interior lighting

Panorama roof*

Display in roof console

Manual dimming of interior rearview mir- ror

Display/function/control

Centre display

Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ heated windscreen*, media, glovebox door opening

Gear selector

Display/function/control

Ignition dial

Drive mode control*

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Display/function/control

Memory for setup of:

power front seat*

Door mirrors

Head-up display*

Door opening, locking/unlocking of side doors and tailgate

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

89

Display/function/control

Power windows, door mirrors

Adjusting front seat

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

90

Driver display The driver display shows information about the car and driving.

The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equip- ment, settings and which functions are active at that time.

The driver display is available in two versions, 12- inch and 8-inch.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information.

WARNING

If the driver display should extinguish, not illu- minate on activation/start or be fully or parti- ally illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

Driver display, 12-inch

Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right

Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols TachometerA

Trip meter Outside temperature gauge ECO gaugeA

Odometer Clock Gear shift indicator

Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Drive mode

(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 91

On the left In the middle On the right

Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Fuel gauge

Media player Status of the Start/Stop function

Navigation map* Distance to empty tank

Phone Instantaneous fuel consumption

Voice recognition App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)

CompassA

A Depending on selected drive mode.

Driver display, 8-inch

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.92

Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right

Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player

Drive mode

(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)

Road Sign Information* Phone

Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information Navigation information*

TachometerA Door and seatbelt information Clock

ECO gaugeA Status of the Start/Stop function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)

Distance to empty tank Instantaneous fuel consumption

Outside temperature gauge Odometer

Indicator and warning symbols Trip meter

Indicator and warning symbols

Voice recognition

Engine temperature gauge

Messages, in some cases with graphics

CompassA

A Depending on selected drive mode.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

93

Location of adaptable symbol

Example of indicator symbol in the 12-inch driver display.

In the centre of the driver display, different sym- bols can be shown for different types of mes- sage. It may be in the form of an indicator or warning symbol, or consist of an image sequence that starts from this position and is then conver- ted to a larger image.

Activating the driver display The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:

Depress the brake pedal.

Turn the ignition knob to ignition position to I.

Open one of the doors.

Related information Driver display settings (p. 94)

Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 95)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 97)

Application menu in the driver display (p. 105)

License agreement for the driver display (p. 99)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.94

Driver display settings Settings for the driver display can be made in the driver display's application menu, and in the centre display's Settings menu.

Settings in the app menu In the app menu, you can choose which informa- tion is shown on the driver display from

trip computer

media player

phone

navigation system*.

The application menu in the driver display is opened and navigated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad, see the section "Using the application menu in the driver display".

Settings in the centre display

Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Press My Car Displays Driver Display Information.

3. Select what should be shown in the back- ground:

Show no information in background

Show information for current playing media

Show navigation even if no route is set1.

The 12-inch driver display shows the infor- mation in the centre, and the 8-inch driver display shows the information in the top right-hand field.

Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Tap on My Car Displays Display Themes

3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display:

Glass

Minimalistic

Performance

Chrome Rings.

Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Tap on System System Language to select language.

> A change will affect the language in all displays.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Application menu in the driver display (p. 105)

Settings view (p. 169)

1 The map is only shown with 12-inch driver display. In the 8-inch driver display, only guidance is shown. For more information, see the section "Displays and controls for map navigation" and "Map navigation in the driver display".

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

95

Indicator symbols in the driver display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- tion is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition exists.

Symbol Specification

Information, read display text

When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the driver display. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Fault in brake system

The symbol lights up when there is a fault in the parking brake.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.

Symbol Specification

Automatic brake on

The symbol illuminates when the function is activated and the foot brake or parking brake is acting. The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped.

Tyre pressure system

The symbol illuminates when tyre pressure is too low. If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- shop for checking. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Symbol Specification

Left and right-hand direction indicator

The symbols flash when the direc- tion indicators are used.

Position lamps

The symbol lights up when the position lamps are switched on.

Fault in the headlamp system

The symbol illuminates if a fault has occurred in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights) or if another fault has occurred in the headlamp system.

Active main beam on

The symbol lights up blue when the automatic main beam is on.

Active main beam off

The symbol lights up white when the automatic main beam is off.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

96

Symbol Specification

Main beam On

The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Active main beam on

The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Position lamps are switched on.

Active main beam off

The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. Position lamps are switched on.

Main beam On

The symbol lights up when main beam and the position lamps are switched on.

Front fog lamps on

This symbol illuminates when the front fog lamp is switched on.

Rear fog lamp on

This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Symbol Specification

Rain sensor on

This symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on.

Preconditioning on

The symbol illuminates when the engine block and passenger com- partment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the car.

Stability system

A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with con- stant glow then there is a fault in the system.

Stability system, sport mode

The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driv- ing experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear sec- tion up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

Symbol Specification

Lane assistance

White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected.

Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected.

Yellow symbol: Lane assistance warns/intervenes.

Lane assistance and rain sensor

White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Rain sensor is on.

Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Rain sensor is on.

Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis- play.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 97)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

97

Warning symbols in the driver display The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Symbol Specification

Warning

The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Airbags

If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Symbol Specification

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Visit the nearest authorised workshop to have the brake fluid level checked and rectified.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates with a con- stant glow when the parking brake is applied.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

98

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressure

If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pres- sure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Alternator not charging

This symbol illuminates during driv- ing if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis- play.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 95)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)

Safety (p. 56)

Outside temperature gauge The outside temperature gauge is shown in the driver display.

A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car.

Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.

If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis- play a temperature reading that is too high.

When the outside temperature is within the range +2C to -5C, a snowflake symbol is shown in the driver display as a warning for potentially slippery conditions. The snowflake symbol is also illumi- nated briefly in the head-up display, if the car is equipped with one.

Outside temperature gauge setting Change the unit for the temperature gauge via the centre display's top view.

Select Settings System Units of Measurement and select the required unit type, Metric, Imperial or US.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Climate control - sensors (p. 183)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

99

Clock The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display.

Location

Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.

In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar.

In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display.

Settings for time and date Select Settings System Date and Time in the centre display's top view to change set- tings for time and date format.

Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen.

Automatic time for cars with GPS If the car is equipped with a navigation system then Auto Time can be selected. The time zone is then adjusted automatically based on the loca- tion of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.

Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select auto- matic setting of summer time with Auto. For other countries, summer time can be set with On or Off.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Settings view (p. 169)

License agreement for the driver display A license is an agreement for the right to oper- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- oper.

BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

100

University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derive from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

BSD 2-clause Simplified license Copyright (c) , All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

101

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

FreeType Project License 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG

(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we are be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This

license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType archive, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType project, you indicate

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

102

that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType code, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.

3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors and contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials:

`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.

4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o devel@freetype.org Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation. You can also contact us individually at: David Turner Robert Wilhelm Werner Lemberg

Libpng License This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

103

libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of

merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.

A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:

printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));

Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).

Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.

Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu April 15, 2002

MIT License Copyright (c)

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

104

THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

zlib License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c)

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)

Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE

OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

105

Application menu in the driver display Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis- play provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps.

The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of using the centre display.

The app menu is shown in the driver display and is controlled using the steering wheel's right- hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel and take your eyes off the road.

App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associ- ated functions can be controlled from the app menu:

App Functions

Trip com- puter

Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the driver dis- play, etc.

Media player

Selection of active source for the media player.

Phone Calling a contact from the call list.

Navigation Pause guide, start guide to recently used destination, etc.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Using the application menu in the driver dis- play (p. 105)

Using the application menu in the driver display The application menu (the app menu) in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key- pad.

Open/close

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

106

Opening/closing the app menu Press on open/close (1).

(It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message must be confirmed before the app menu can be opened.)

> The app menu opens/closes.

The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected.

Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the different apps that are

available by tapping on left or right (2).

> Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu.

2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3).

3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func- tion by pressing on confirm (4).

> The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes.

If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first.

Related information Application menu in the driver display

(p. 105)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

Messages in the driver display and the centre display The driver display and centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.

Driver display

Message in the driver display2.

2 With 8-inch driver display.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

107

Message in the driver display3.

The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver.

The messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other infor- mation is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/ action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display.

Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

Service messages Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Turn off engineA

Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Service urgent Drive to work- shopA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Regular main- tenance

Book time for maintenance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date.

Message Specification

Regular main- tenance

Time for main- tenance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date.

Regular main- tenance

Maintenance overdue

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tem- porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

3 With 12-inch driver display.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

108

Centre display

Message in the centre display.

The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver.

Most messages are shown above the centre dis- play's status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi- tioned in the top view in the centre display.

Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a but- ton for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the sta- tus bar and require acknowledgement/action

before they disappear. Messages that need to be saved are positioned in the top view in the centre display.

Related information Driver display (p. 90)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

Managing messages saved from the driver display and centre display (p. 110)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display Messages in the driver display and centre dis- play are managed with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad and in the centre display's views.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

109

Driver display

Message in the driver display4 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Message in the driver display5 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Left/right

Confirm

Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

Managing a new message For messages with buttons:

1. Navigate between the different buttons that are available by tapping on left or right (1).

2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2).

> The message disappears from the driver display.

For messages without buttons:

Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automati- cally after a while.

> The message disappears from the driver display.

If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this.

Centre display

Message in the centre display.

Some messages in the centre display have a but- ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for

4 With 8-inch driver display. 5 With 12-inch driver display.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

110

e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

Managing a new message For messages with buttons:

Press the button to perform the action or allow the message to close automatically after a while.

> The message disappears from the status bar.

For messages without buttons:

Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while.

> The message disappears from the status bar.

If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.

Related information Messages in the driver display and the centre

display (p. 106)

Managing messages saved from the driver display and centre display (p. 110)

Managing messages saved from the driver display and centre display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.

Messages saved from the driver display

Saved messages and possible options in the Car status app.

Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added in the Car status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown

in the centre display in conjunction with this.

Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately:

Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display.

> The saved message is shown in the Car status app.

To read a saved message later:

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

> The app is opened in the bottom subview of the home view.

2. Select the Messages tab in the app.

> A list of saved messages is shown.

3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/ minimise a message.

> More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

111

Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner's manual.

To book service for a saved message:

In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint.Call to make Appointment6 for help in booking service.

> With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work.

With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work.

To read the owner's manual for a saved mes- sage:

In maximised mode for the message, press Owner's manual to read about the mes- sage in the owner's manual.

> The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message.

Saved messages in the app are deleted automat- ically each time the engine is started.

Messages saved from the centre display

Saved messages and possible options in the top view.

Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display.

Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display.

> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes- sages with an arrow to the right can be maximised.

2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise the message.

Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ deactivating a function linked to the message.

Press the button to perform the action.

Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off.

Related information Messages in the driver display and the centre

display (p. 106)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

6 Depending on market.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.112

Head-up display* The head-up display supplements the car's driver display and projects information from the driver display onto the windscreen. The projec- ted image can only be seen from the driver posi- tion.

Incoming phone calls.

The head-up display shows warnings and infor- mation relating to speed, cruise control functions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road sign information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-up display.

IMPORTANT

The display unit from which the information is projected is located in the instrument panel. To avoid damage to the display unit's cover glass - do not store any objects on the cover glass and make sure that no objects fall down onto it.

Examples of what can be shown in the display.

Speed

Cruise control

Navigation

Road signs

A number of symbols can be shown temporarily in the head-up display, e.g.:

If the warning symbol illuminates - read the warning message in the driver dis- play.

If the information symbol illuminates - read the message in the driver display.

NOTE

The driver's ability to see the information in the head-up display is impaired by the follow- ing:

use of polarising sunglasses

a driving position which means that the driver is not sitting centred in the seat

objects on the display unit's cover glass

unfavourable light conditions.

NOTE

Certain visual defects may cause headaches and a feeling of stress during the use of the head-up display.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 113

City Safety in the head-up display

NOTE

When City Safety* is activated, the informa- tion in the head-up display is replaced by a graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi- nated even if the head-up display is switched off.

The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the driver's attention.

Activating/deactivating the head-up display This function can be activated/deactivated in two ways via the centre display:

Via the function view Press the Head-up display button.

Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Displays.

3. Select/deselect Head-Up Display.

The option can be saved as a personal setting in the driver profile.

NOTE

Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the head-up-display can only be performed when it shows a projected image. The car's engine must be running.

Settings for head-up display Select the option and adjust the settings for the head-up display's projection onto the windscreen.

Selecting display options 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options.

3. Select which functions should be shown:

Show Navigation

Show Road Sign Information

Show Driver Support

Show Phone.

The setting can be saved as a personal setting in the driver profile.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.114

Adjusting brightness and vertical position

1. Press the Head-up display adjustments button in the function view in the centre dis- play.

2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of the projected image in the driver's field of vision using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Reducing the brightness

Increasing the brightness

Raising the position

Lowering the position

Confirm

The brightness of the graphics is automatically adapted to their background light conditions. The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car's other displays.

The vertical position can be stored in the memory function of the power front seat*.

Calibrate the horizontal position The head-up display's horizontal position may need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro- jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- wise.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up Display Calibration.

3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with the steering wheel's right keypad.

Rotate anticlockwise

Rotate clockwise

Confirm

Cleaning Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois- ten the microfibre cloth.

Never use strong stain removers. A special clean- ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.

When replacing the windscreen Cars with head-up display are equipped with a special type of windscreen that meets the requirements for displaying the projected image.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 115

When replacing the windscreen - contact an authorised workshop7. The correct version of the windscreen must be fitted in order that the head- up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly.

Related information Function view with buttons for car functions

(p. 47)

Settings view (p. 169)

Steering wheel (p. 131)

Using the memory function in the power front seat* (p. 122)

Driver display (p. 90)

Voice recognition8

The voice recognition system allows the driver to use voice recognition to control certain functions of the media player, Bluetooth-connected phone, the climate system and Volvo's navigation sys- tem*.

Voice commands offer convenience and help the driver to avoid being distracted, and instead con- centrate on driving and focus attention on the road and the traffic conditions.

WARNING

The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road.

Voice control system microphone

Voice recognition control takes place in dialogue form with spoken commands from the user and verbal response from the system. The voice rec- ognition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth handsfree system and the voice recognition system's replies come via the car's speakers. In some cases, a text message is also shown in the driver display. Functions are con- trolled from the right-hand steering wheel key- pad. Settings are made via the centre display.

System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. Download updates for optimal perform- ance, see support.volvocars.com.

7 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 8 Applies to certain markets.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

116

Related information Using voice recognition (p. 116)

Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 118)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Voice recognition control of climate control (p. 119)

Voice recognition and map navigation (p. 120)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

Using voice recognition9

Basic instructions for using voice recognition control.

Depress the steering wheel button for voice recognition

to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands.

Remember the following during communication:

For a command - speak after the tone in a normal voice at normal speed.

Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time).

Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment by having the doors, windows and sunroof closed.

Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:

by saying "Cancel".

with a long press on the voice recognition

button on the steering wheel .

To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering

wheel button for voice recognition when the system voice is speaking and say the next com- mand.

Example of voice recognition control Press , say Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]" - calls the selected contact from the phone book if the contact has more than one phone number (e.g. home, mobile, work), e.g.:

Press , say "Call Robin Smith Mobile".

Commands/phrases The following commands are always available for use:

"Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue.

"Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.

"Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example.

Commands for specific functions are described in the corresponding sections, e.g. Voice recogni- tion control of the phone.

9 Applies to certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

117

Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled:

Phone numbers and postcodes must be spoken individually, number by number, e.g. zero three one two two four four three (03122443).

House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- two (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300.

Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point two or hundred four point two (104.2).

Related information Voice recognition (p. 115)

Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 118)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Voice recognition control of climate control (p. 119)

Voice recognition and map navigation (p. 120)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

Settings for voice recognition10

Several settings for the voice recognition system can be made.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press System Voice Control and select settings.

Repeat Voice Command

Gender

Speech Rate

Audio settings 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Sound System Volumes Voice Control and select settings.

Change language Voice recognition is not possible for all lan- guages. Languages available for voice recogni- tion are marked with an icon in the language list -

.

Changing the language also affects menu, mes- sage and help texts.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press System System Language and select language.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 115)

Using voice recognition (p. 116)

Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 118)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Voice recognition control of climate control (p. 119)

Voice recognition and map navigation (p. 120)

10 Applies to certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.118

Voice recognition control of the phone11

Command for voice recognition control of a Bluetooth-connected mobile phone to e.g. call a contact, a number, or to listen to a message.

To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact infor- mation that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin Smith Mobile".

Tap on and say one of the following com- mands:

"Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book.

"Call [phone number]" - dials the phone number.

"Recent calls" - displays the call list.

"Read message" - message is read out. If there are several messages - select which message should be read out.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 115)

Using voice recognition (p. 116)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

Voice recognition control of radio and media12

Command for voice recognition control of radio and media player.

Tap on and say one of the following com- mands:

"Media" - starts a dialogue for media and radio and shows examples of commands.

"Play [artist]" - plays back music by the selected artist.

"Play [song title]" - plays back the selected song.

"Play [song title] from [album]" - plays back the selected song from the selected album.

"Play [TV channel name]" - starts the selected TV channel.

"Play [radio station]" - starts playing back the selected radio channel.

"Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default.

"Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band.

"Radio" - starts FM radio.

"Radio FM" - starts FM radio.

"Radio AM" - starts AM radio.

"DAB " - starts DAB radio.

"TV" - starts playback from TV*.

"CD" - starts playback from CD*.

"USB" - starts playback from USB.

"iPod" - starts playback from iPod.

"Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue- tooth-connected media source.

"Similar music" plays back music similar to the music currently playing back from USB devices.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 115)

Using voice recognition (p. 116)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

11 Applies to certain markets. 12 Applies to certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 119

Voice recognition control of climate control13

Voice recognition commands for the climate control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- vate a heated seat or change fan level.

Press and say one of the following com- mands:

"Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands.

"Set temperature to X degrees" - sets the desired temperature.

"Raise temperature"/"Lower temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step.

"Sync temperature" - synchronises the temperature for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver's side.

"Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the desired air flow.

"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes the desired air flow.

"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes the air flow to Max/Off.

"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - raises/lowers the fan level one step.

"Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate regulation.

"Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - activates/deactivates the air conditioning.

"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - activates/deactivates the air circulation.

"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors.

"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max defroster off" - activates/deactivates the max defroster.

"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*.

"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors.

"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac- tivates the heated steering wheel*.

"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step.

"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" - activates/deactivates the heated seat*.

"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step.

"Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat ventilation*.

"Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for the ventilated seat* one step.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 115)

Using voice recognition (p. 116)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

Climate control (p. 182)

13 Applies to certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

120

Voice recognition and map navigation14

Command for voice control of the navigation system, e.g. set destination or pause guidance.

Tap on and say one of the following com- mands:

Navigation - Initiates a navigation dialogue and shows examples of commands.

"Take me home" - Guidance is given to the Home position.

"Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti- nation. Example "Drive to London".

"Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address as a destination. An address must contain city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King Street".

"Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue where two streets must be specified. The intersection point of the specified streets then becomes the destination.

"Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2 3 4 5".

"Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address from the phone book as a destination. Exam- ple "Drive to Robyn Smith".

"Search [POI category]" - Searches for adjacent points of interest (POI) within a cer- tain category (e.g. restaurants).15 To have the list sorted along the route - say "Along the route" when the results list is shown.

"Search [POI category] in [City]" - Searches for points of interest (POI) within a certain category and city. The results list is sorted according to the city's centre point. Example "Search for restaurant in London".

"Search [POI name]". Example "Search Hyde Park".

"Change country/Change state16, 17" - Changes the search area for navigation.

"Show favourites" - Shows favourited posi- tions in the driver display.

"Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored intermediate destinations and final destina- tion in an itinerary.

"Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the last spoken guidance.

"Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off voice guidance.

"Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the switched-off voice guidance.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 115)

Using voice recognition (p. 116)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

14 Applies to certain markets. 15 The user has the option of calling the POI or specifying it as a destination. 16 In European countries, Country is used instead of State. 17 For Brazil and India, the search area is changed via the centre display.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 121

Manual front seat The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- ion* by pumping up/down.

Change the length of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand.

Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted.

Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/back.

Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.

Change the backrest rake by turning the control knob.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

Related information Power front seat* (p. 121)

Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* (p. 203)

Seatbelt (p. 59)

Power front seat* The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward.

The power seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then operate the seat again.

The seat can be adjusted for a period of time after unlocking the door without the engine run- ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed when the engine is running. Adjustment can also be performed for a period of time after the engine has been switched off.

Related information Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 122)

Using the memory function in the power front seat* (p. 122)

Manual front seat (p. 121)

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* (p. 203)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.122

Adjusting the power front seat* Set to desired sitting position using the control on the front seat's seating section.

Change the lumbar support by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/back.

Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down.

Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.

Move the seat forward/backward by adjust- ing the control forward/backward.

Change the backrest rake by adjusting the control forward/backward.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

The backrests of the front seats cannot be low- ered fully forward.

Related information Power front seat* (p. 121)

Using the memory function in the power front seat* (p. 122)

Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)

Seatbelt (p. 59)

Using the memory function in the power front seat* The memory function stores settings for the seat, door mirrors, and head-up display*.

It is possible to store two different settings with the memory function. The memory function key- pad is located either on one front door or both*.

Button M for storing settings.

Memory button

Memory button

Store setting 1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display

to the desired position.

2. Push the M button and release. The light indicator in the button illuminates.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 123

3. Within three seconds, depress the 1 or 2 button.

> When the position has been stored in the selected memory button an acoustic sig- nal sounds and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes.

If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extin- guishes and no storing takes place.

The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set.

Using a stored setting A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed:

Open front door Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or2

with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and head-up display move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory but- ton.

Closed front door Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2

depressed until seat, door mirrors and head- up display stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button.

If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will be stopped.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the keypad. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trapped.

Related information Power front seat* (p. 121)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 122)

Multi-functional front seat* Enhance the seating comfort using the multi- function control.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.

The multi-function control can, in some variants, be used to adjust the lumbar support*, side sup- port*, cushion length and massage settings*. Set- tings made with the multi-function control are shown in the centre display*. Certain function selections can also be made directly in the centre display.

Centre display The driver and the passenger seat settings that are made with the multi-function control are shown in the centre display. If the settings for only one of the front seats are shown in the cen- tre display, the settings are positioned centred in

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.124

the screen. When it is possible to show setting options for both the front seats, the driver's set- ting options are shown in the upper half and the passenger's in the lower half.

To stop showing the seat settings view in the centre display, press the home button, which is located under the centre display.

Related information Power front seat* (p. 121)

Adjusting functions in the multi-functional front seat* (p. 124)

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* (p. 203)

Adjusting functions in the multi- functional front seat* Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display*.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.

To activate the multi-function control, turn the control upwards/downward.

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat The front seat has massage in the backrest. The massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with different settings.

View for massage in the centre display.

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

2. Select Massage in the seat settings view.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 125

3. To choose between the different massage functions, select either directly in the touch screen or by moving the cursor up/down using the multi-function control's upper/ lower button. Change the setting in the selected function by selecting directly in the touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by using the multi-function control's front/rear button.

Settings for massage The following setting options are available for massage:

On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch on/off the massage function.

Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell, Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.

Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and High.

Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and Fast.

Restarting massage

Button for restarting massage in the centre display.

The massage function is deactivated automati- cally after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated manually.

Tap on Restart in the centre display in order to restart the selected massage program.

> The massage program restarts. If no action is taken, the message remains shown in the top view.

It is not possible to use the massage function when the engine is switched off.

Adjusting side support* in the front seat backrests The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro- vide side support.

View for adjustable side support in the centre display.

To adjust the side support:

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.126

2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view.

Press the front seat button in order to increase the side support.

Press the rear seat button in order to reduce the side support.

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/ downward/forward/backward.

View for lumbar support in the centre display.

To adjust the lumbar support:

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.

Press the seat button up/down to move the lumbar support up/down.

Press the front seat button in order to increase the lumbar support.

Press the rear seat button in order to decrease the lumbar support.

Extending the seat cushion in the front seat Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the multi-function control on the seat.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 127

View for extension of the cushion in the centre display.

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- tings view.

Press the front seat button in order to extend the seat cushion.

Press the rear seat button in order to retract the seat cushion.

Related information Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)

Managing messages saved from the driver display and centre display (p. 110)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* The front passenger seat can be adjusted from the driver's seat.

Activating the function The function can be activated in two ways via the centre display:

Via the function view Press the Adjust passenger seat button to activate.

Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Seats.

3. Select Adjust Passenger Seat From Driver Position to activate.

Adjust passenger seat From activation of the function, the driver must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this time the func- tion is deactivated.

The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the controls on the driver's seat:

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.128

Move the passenger seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward.

Change the passenger seat's backrest rake by adjusting the control forward/backward.

Related information Power front seat* (p. 121)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 122)

Seatbelt (p. 59)

Rear seat The car has 5 seats. The second seat row is divided into two parts, with one or two passen- ger seats respectively.

Related information Lowering the backrests in the rear seat

(p. 130)

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat (p. 128)

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* (p. 203)

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility.

Adjusting the head restraint, centre seat

The centre seat's head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger's height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 129

To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus- tration) must be depressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.

WARNING

The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints*

The outer head restraints can be lowered in two ways via the centre display:

Via the function view Press the Headrest fold but- ton to activate/deactivate low- ering.

Via settings The car's electrical system must be in the ignition position II.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Seats.

3. Select Fold Headrest On Second Row Seats to lower the rear outer head restraints.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING

The head restraints must be in locked posi- tion after being raised.

Related information Rear seat (p. 128)

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 130)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.130

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat The rear seat's backrest is divided into two parts. The two parts can be lowered forward individually.

WARNING

Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrol- led or careless adjustment can lead to trap- ping injuries.

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

IMPORTANT

The integrated booster cushions* on the outer seats must be lowered before lowering the seat.

The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat.

If the car has private locking, the tailgate must be closed before lowering the seat.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.

Lowering the backrest

Car with electronic folding

If the car is equipped with electronic folding of the rear seat* there are buttons located in the cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered manually.

WARNING

Pay attention that people are not at risk of being trapped during the automatic folding of the rear seat. Since this takes place automati- cally on the press of a button, no one must be on or too close to the rear seat.

For electronically controlled folding of backrests:

1. Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat.

2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man- ually.

3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The buttons are marked L and R for left and right backrest section respectively.

4. The backrests are lowered automatically to horizontal position. The head restraints are also lowered automatically.

To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must be stationary and the tailgate open.

To lower the backrest manually:

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 131

1. Lower the centre head restraint manually.

2. Pull forward the handles that are fitted in the car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests.

3. The backrest disengages from the lock and is automatically lowered to the horizontal position.

Car without electronic folding If the car is only equipped with manual lowering of rear seat:

1. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man- ually.

2. Pull forward the handles that are fitted in the car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests.

3. The seat is released from the lock but remains in the same position. Lower the backrest to the horizontal position.

Raising the backrest Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually:

1. Move the backrest up/down manually.

2. Slide the backrest until the catch engages.

3. The head restraint is raised manually.

4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head restraint.

Related information Rear seat (p. 128)

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat (p. 128)

Steering wheel The steering wheel has controls for horn, driver support systems and voice recognition, amongst other things.

Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.

Controls for driver support systems18.

Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox.

Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis- play settings, and menu, message and phone handling.

18 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.132

Horn

The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.

Related information Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 132)

Activating/deactivating heating of steering wheel* (p. 205)

Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Cruise control (p. 284)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 395)

Voice recognition (p. 115)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

Using the application menu in the driver dis- play (p. 105)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

Phone (p. 460)

Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions.

The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

133

Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ- ent ways depending on whether or not the car is equipped with knee airbag19.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.

With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is regulated according to the car's speed in order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.

With knee airbag

Adjusting the steering wheel.

1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back.

Without knee airbag

Adjusting the steering wheel.

1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer- ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer- ing wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back.

Related information Steering wheel (p. 131)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 272)

19 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.134

Headlamp control Use the light controls in the left-hand stalk switch to activate external lighting. Use the thumbwheels in the instrument panel to adjust

headlamp levelling20 and the brightness of the interior lighting.

Rotating ring in the steering wheel stalk switch

Position Specification

Daytime running lights when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is run- ning.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights and position lamps when the car's electrical sys- tem is in ignition position II or when the car is running.

Position lamps when the car is parkedA.

Main beam flash can be used.

Dipped beam and position lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

Position Specification

Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight when the car's electrical system is in ignition posi- tion II or when the car is running.

Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.

The Active main beam function can be activated.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

Active main beam on/off.

A Also at stationary when the car is running, provided that the rotating ring is moved to this position from another position.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the vehicle is driven.

20 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 135

WARNING

The car's audio system is not able to deter- mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit- able for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Thumbwheel in the instrument panel

Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

A car with LED21 headlamps* has automatic headlamp levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.

Adjusting the interior brightness The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used.

The thumbwheel adjusts the brightness of display lighting, control lighting, ambient light and ambi- ence light*.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

For different load cases and settings, see the section "Headlamp levelling".

Related information Passenger compartment lighting (p. 145)

Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Position lamps (p. 136)

Headlamp levelling (p. 135)

Headlamp levelling Headlamp levelling22 is adjusted using one of the thumbwheels in the instrument panel.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in ignition position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower beam alignment.

The position in which the thumbwheel should be set for a number of load cases is shown below.

Examples of thumbwheel position.

Thumbwheel in position 0

Thumbwheel in position 1

21 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 22 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

136

Load case Thumb-

wheel

position

Only driver. 0

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat.

0

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat.

Three passengers in the rear seat.

1

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat.

Three passengers in the rear seat.

220 kg load in the cargo area.

1

Driver and maximum load in the cargo area.

2

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Position lamps The position lamps are switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch.

Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.

Turn the rotating ring to the position - the position lamps are switched on (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or the car is running then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front posi- tion lamps. However, this does not apply at sta- tionary when the car is running, if the rotating

ring is moved to position from another position. In this case, the position lamps are switched on.

If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching

from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi- tion of the car's electrical system.

When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver should

turn to a position other than .

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 137

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in

position , or as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II

or when the car is running. For the posi- tion, this only applies in daylight. In weak daylight or darkness, dipped beam is switched on instead.

Daytime running lights during the day. DRL

Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness.

Changing to dipped beam also takes place if the front fog lamp and/or rear fog lamp are activated.

At stationary when the car is running, the posi- tion lamps are switched on instead of other light- ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position

for position lamps, , from another position.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accord- ance with applicable traffic regulations.

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Dipped beam (p. 137)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Dipped beam When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring

in the position, dipped beam is activated automatically in weak daylight or darkness.

Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the position, dipped beam is activated automatically in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running.

With the stalk switch's rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automati- cally if:

the front fog lamps* are activated

the rear fog lamp is activated

the front and rear fog lamps are activated

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

138

Dipped beam is always switched on when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position

when the car's electrical system is in igni- tion position II or when the car is running.

Tunnel detection The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam.

Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk

switch must be in mode for tunnel detec- tion to work.

Related information Daytime running lights (p. 137)

Headlamp control (p. 134)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Activating/deactivating main beam Main beam is activated with the stalk switch.

Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on the stalk switch.

Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in position

23 or . Activate main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display.

Active main beam Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.

Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen- sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or vehicles ahead.

Car with halogen headlamps The lighting returns to main beam about a sec- ond after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

23 When dipped beam is activated.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 139

Car with LED24 headlamps* If the active main beam has the on/off functional- ity25 then the lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

If the active main beam has adaptive functional- ity25 then, unlike what happens during conven- tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed.

Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle.

The lighting returns to full main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Activate/deactivate The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher.

Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning

the stalk switch's rotating ring to position and release. If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam.

When active main beam is activated, the symbol

illuminates with a white glow in the driver display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam.

24 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 25 Depending on the car's equipment level.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

140

Manual operation

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.

If this symbol is shown in the driver dis- play, together with the message Active High Beam Temporarily unavailable, then switching between

main and dipped beam must be performed man- ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still

be in the position. The symbol extin- guishes when these message are shown.

The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual.

Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,

the message goes out and the symbol illu- minates.

WARNING

Active main beam is an aid for using the opti- mum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for man- ually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather con- ditions so require.

IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:

In heavy rain or dense fog

In freezing rain

In snow flurries or slush

In moonlight

When driving in poorly lit built-up areas

When the traffic ahead has weak lighting

If there are pedestrians on or beside the road

If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road

When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

When there is traffic on connecting roads

On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

In sharp bends.

Read more about the camera sensor's limitations in the section "Limitations for City Safety".

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 141

Active bending lights* Active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions.

Cars with LED26 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equip- ment level.

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

The LED headlamps can include the Active bend- ing lights function, depending on the car's equip- ment level. Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide maximum illumina- tion in bends and junctions and thereby increase safety.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the func-

tion, the symbol illuminates in the driver display at the same time as the driver display shows an explanatory text.

The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on.

Deactivating/activating the function The function is in activated mode when the car is delivered from the factory and can be deacti- vated/activated via the centre display in two ways:

Via the function view Press the Active Bending Lights button.

Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Exterior Lights.

3. Deselect/select Active Bending Lights.

Related information Settings view (p. 169)

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 142)

Adapting the beam pattern from the headlamps If the car is equipped with LED headlamps with adaptive functionality, then the headlamp pattern should be reset when changing from right to left- hand traffic, and vice versa.

Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern does not need to be adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

LED headlamps* The headlamp pattern should be adjusted if the active main beam has adaptive functionality; see the section "Activating/deactivating main beam". The car must remain stationary and be running when the headlamp pattern is changed between right and left-hand traffic.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Exterior Lights.

3. Select Temporary Right Hand Traffic/ Temporary Left Hand Traffic.

Related information Settings view (p. 169)

Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)

26 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.142

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* The front fog lamps have cornering lights that shine diagonally to the side.

Button for front fog lamps.

The front fog lamps can only be switched on when ignition position II is active or the car is running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch

is in position , or .

Press the on/off button. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the front fog lamps are switched on.

The front fog lamps are switched off automati- cally when the ignition knob is turned to STOP or when the stalk switch's rotating ring is turned to

position .

NOTE

Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary from country to country.

Cornering lights The front fog lamps include the cornering lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the direction indicators.

The function is activated in weak daylight or dark- ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in

the or position and the speed of the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (20 mph).

In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing.

The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/acti- vated via the centre display.

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Rear fog lamp (p. 142)

Active bending lights* (p. 141)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Rear fog lamp When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users can detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left- hand side on a left-hand drive car, or on the right- hand side on a right-hand drive car.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:

ignition position II is active or the car is run- ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in

position or

the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position

and the front fog lamps are switched on.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 143

Press the on/off button. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when:

the ignition knob is turned to STOP or when the stalk switch's rotating ring is set in posi-

tion

the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position

and the front fog lamps are switched off.

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 142)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driver support systems Adaptive cruise control*, City Safety or Rear Collision Warning brakes the car.

Related information Emergency brake lights (p. 408)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

City Safety (p. 330)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)

Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indi- cator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.

The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stop- ped flashing and are then deactivated automati- cally when the car drives away again or are deac- tivated if the button is depressed.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

144

Related information Using direction indicators (p. 144)

Emergency brake lights (p. 408)

Using direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated via the centre display.

NOTE

This automatic flashing sequence can be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction.

If the symbol for direction indicators in the driver display flashes more quickly than normal - see the message in the driver display.

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)

Settings view (p. 169)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

145

Passenger compartment lighting The passenger compartment lighting is acti- vated/deactivated with the buttons in the over- head controls above the front seats and the rear seat.

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:

the car has been switched off and its electri- cal system is in ignition position 0

the car has been unlocked but it has not been started.

Front lighting

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Front reading lamps The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the but- ton in the roof console.

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. The light indicator in the button illuminates when the automatic function is activated. Press the AUTO button to switch the passenger compart- ment lighting on and off in accordance with the following.

Passenger compartment lighting:

illuminates when the car is unlocked and when it is switched off

extinguishes when the car is started and when it is locked

comes on and goes off, respectively, when a side door is opened or closed

remains on for two minutes if one of the side doors is open.

Rear lighting The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting.

The reading lamps are located in the interior roof.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.146

Reading lamps above the rear seat27.

Reading lamp above the rear seat in cars with panorama roof*.

The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright- ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- tively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting* The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Ground lighting The ground lighting is switched on and off when the corresponding door is opened or closed.

Door sill lighting The door sill lighting is switched on and off when the corresponding door is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Ambient light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting.

3. Choose between the following settings:

Under Ambient Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.

Under Ambient Light Level, select from Reduced and Full.

Controls located next to the steering wheel.

The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted using the control in the instrument panel:

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.

Ambience lights* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is run- ning.

27 In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

147

The ambience lights can be changed via the cen- tre display:

Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.

3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.

Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.

3. Choose between By Temperature, By Colour and Theme Colours in order to change the colour of the light.

With colour option By Temperature, the colour of the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature.

Controls located next to the steering wheel.

The intensity of the ambience light can be adjusted using the controls in the instrument panel:

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.

Lighting in storage compartments in doors The lighting in storage compartments in doors is switched on when the car is running. The bright- ness can be finely adjusted using the control in the instrument panel.

Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel console The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be finely adjusted using the control in the instrument panel.

Related information Headlamp control (p. 134)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Settings view (p. 169)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.148

Home safe light duration Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

To activate the function:

1. Switch off the car.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam, position lamps, lighting in the outside handles* and number plate lighting are switched on.

The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display.

Related information Approach light duration (p. 148)

Settings view (p. 169)

Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote control key during unlocking, the position lamps, lighting in outer handles*, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor lighting will switch on. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the lighting in the outside handles* and the interior lighting will be extended.

The function can be deactivated/activated via the centre display.

Related information Home safe light duration (p. 148)

Remote control key (p. 236)

Settings view (p. 169)

Using windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wiper are made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch.

Right-hand stalk switch.

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent

wiping is selected.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

149

Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed.

Raise the stalk switch further for the wip- ers to sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear win- dow) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Related information Activating/deactivating the rain sensor

(p. 149)

Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv- ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch.

Right-hand stalk switch.

Rain sensor button

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor

symbol is shown in the driver display.

Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the electrical system in ignition posi- tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk

switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-

sor button .

Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.

Deactivating the rain sensor Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain

sensor button or moving the stalk switch up to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off.

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service position has been deactivated.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti- vate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is in igni- tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.150

Activating/deactivating the memory function The memory function for the rain sensor can be activated in such a way that the rain sensor but- ton does not need to be depressed each time the car is started:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function.

Related information Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)

Rear window wiper and washer (p. 151)

Windscreen and headlamp washers Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is started by means of the right-hand stalk switch.

Starting windscreen and headlamp washers

Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.

Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

> The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released.

IMPORTANT

Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other- wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.

Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from freezing.

Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- matically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid

Level low, refill, together with the symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind- screen and the visibility through it.

Related information Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)

Rear window wiper and washer (p. 151)

Filling washer fluid (p. 533)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 151

Rear window wiper and washer Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear window. Washing/wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch.

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped with over- heating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling- down period.

Using the rear window wiper and washer

Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper.

Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper.

Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping.

Activating/deactivating wiping when reversing 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti- vate wiping when reversing.

Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip- ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func- tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at continu- ous speed, no change is made.

Related information Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)

Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 149)

Power windows Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door.

Driver's door control panel.

Electric child safety locks* that prevent chil- dren from being able to open the rear doors from inside and open/close the rear win- dows.

Controls for rear windows.

Controls for front windows.

Related information Operating power windows (p. 152)

Child safety locks (p. 261)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

152

Operating power windows Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door.

WARNING

Check that no children or other passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.

WARNING

Check that no children or other passengers are trapped if/when the windows are closed using the remote control key.

WARNING

If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors can only operate the power window in the individual door. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.

In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be at least I. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the igni- tion has been switched off - although not after a door has been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the win- dow is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection

when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if ice has formed on the window. After two successive clos- ing interruptions the pinch protection will be over- ridden and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by hold- ing the button in its raised position.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

NOTE

The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (112 mph), but they can be closed.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs auto- matically to its end position.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 153

Operating with the remote control key, door handle or central locking button To control the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or door handle, or from the inside with the central locking button, see the section "Remote control key", "Locking/ unlocking from the outside" or "Locking/unlock- ing from the inside".

Resetting If the starter battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.

WARNING

A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

Related information Power windows (p. 151)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Remote control key (p. 236)

Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)

Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)

Using the sun blind* Sun blinds are built into each rear door.

In the rear door - manually operated

Hook with associated catch

Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the hook in the upper door frame.

The window can still be opened and closed with the sun blind up.

Adjusting the door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel.

Controls for door mirrors.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-

ror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING

Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to pro- vide optimal vision. Objects may appear fur- ther away than they actually are.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.154

Memory function in power front seat* Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem- ory function of the power front seat.

Angling the door mirror when parking28

The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.

Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking28

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for exam- ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after a short time.

Settings for this function are set via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.

3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled.

Automatic retraction when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.

3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- vate/deactivate.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors.

For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function requires that the interior rearview mirror also has automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear- view mirror".

Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in three levels and will affect the interior rearview and the door mirrors.

NOTE

When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- diately noticeable change in dimming, but the change will be complete after a while.

Settings for this function are set via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.

3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light.

28 Only in combination with power seat with memory.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 155

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (ignition position must be at least I).

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- cally stop in the fully extended position.

Related information Interior rearview mirror (p. 155)

Settings view (p. 169)

Using the memory function in the power front seat* (p. 122)

Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically.

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim- ming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal mode by moving the control towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with auto- matic dimming.

The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sen- sors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.

Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in three levels and will affect the interior rearview and the door mirrors.

NOTE

When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- diately noticeable change in dimming, but the change will be complete after a while.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.156

Settings for this function are set via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.

3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light.

Related information Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 153)

Settings view (p. 169)

Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- ror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different compass directions are shown by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Activating/deactivating the compass The compass is activated automatically when the car is started.

To deactivate/activate the compass:

Depress the button on the underside of the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.

Related information Calibrating the compass* (p. 157)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 194)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 157

Calibrating the compass* The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones.

Proceed as follows to perform calibration:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed.

NOTE

Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- cal equipment is not switched off.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the com- pass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the under- side of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char- acter C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated.

8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

Related information Compass* (p. 156)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.158

Panorama roof* The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec- tions. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon- tally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass.

The panoramic roof has a wind deflector.

The panorama roof has a sun blind made of per- forated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight.

The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof.

The control is activated when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.

Always operate the panorama roof with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the panorama roof by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the panorama roof when load carriers are fitted.

Wind deflector

The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panorama roof is in the open position.

Related information Operating the panorama roof* (p. 159)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 159

Operating the panorama roof* When operating with the control in the roof, the panoramic roof is first opened horizontally to a comfort position.

In ventilation position, the front glass cover in the roof is raised at the rear.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.

Always operate the panorama roof with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the panorama roof by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the panorama roof when load carriers are fitted.

In order that the panoramic roof and sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in at least ignition position I.

Operating with the control in the roof

Opening, manual

Opening, automatic

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind - press the control

backwards to the position for manual open- ing. The sun blind moves towards maximum opening position for as long as the control is held depressed rearward.

2. Open the panorama roof - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening. The panoramic roof first reaches comfort position29. In order to open to maximum opening position - press the control backwards a third time.

Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the manual closing position instead.

The movement of the roof is stopped if the con- trol is released or when the glass reaches the comfort position or the maximum opening or closing position.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be closed.

29 Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

160

Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -

press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release.

2. To open the panorama roof, press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release. The panor- amic roof first reaches comfort position29. To open to the maximum opening position - press the control a third time backward to the position for automatic opening and release.

Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the automatic closing posi- tion instead.

The movement of the roof is stopped when the glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi- mum opening or closing position. The movement is also stopped if the control is operated again in the opposite direction to the direction of move- ment in progress.

The movement of the roof is not stopped when the glass reaches the comfort position when closing from maximum opening position.

Automatic operation - rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and sun blind can be opened/closed simultaneously:

To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

To close - press the control forward/down- ward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

The movement of the roof is stopped when the glass reaches the comfort position or the closing position. The movement is also stopped if the control is operated again in the opposite direction to the direction of movement in progress.

The movement of the roof is not stopped when the glass reaches the comfort position when closing from maximum opening position. The movement of the blind is never stopped when the roof reaches comfort position.

Ventilation position

Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the control upward.

Close by pressing the control forward/down- ward.

When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm.

Automatic closing of the sun blind When the car is parked in sunny/hot weather, the sun blind closes automatically 15 minutes after the car is locked. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car upholstery from being bleached by the sun.

29 Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 161

The function is deactivated when the car is sup- plied from the factory and can be activated/deac- tivated:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Locking.

Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate.

Closing using the remote control key, central locking button or door handles

Remote control key Give a long press on the remote control key's

lock button until the panorama roof and sun blind start moving towards the closed position. Then release the lock button.

Movement stops if the remote control key's lock button is pressed again or when the roof/blind has reached the closed position.

Central locking button

Central locking button.

When the car's electrical system is set in at least ignition position I, the central locking button in the driver's door or passenger door* can be used to close the panoramic roof.

Give a long press on the central locking but-

ton until the panorama roof and sun blind start moving towards the closed position. Then release the button.

Movement stops if the central locking button is pressed again or when the roof/blind has reached the closed position.

Door handle Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of the outside door handle.

Place your finger against the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of one of the door handles until the panorama roof and sun blind start moving towards the closed posi- tion. Then remove your finger from door han- dle's recess.

Movement stops if you place your finger against the door handle recess again or once the roof/ blind has reached the closed position.

WARNING

If the panorama roof is closed with the remote control key, the central locking button or door handle, check that no one risks being trapped.

IMPORTANT

Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing.

Pinch protection The panorama roof has pinch protection that is triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is blocked by an object during closing. In the event of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops and is then opened automatically to approx. 50 mm from the blocked position (or to full ventila- tion position). The pinch protection is also active when the glass cover or sun blind is opened.

If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.162

blind once more in the same direction without pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has formed around the glass cover, by continually pressing the control forward/downward until the glass cover and/or sun blind is closed.

Related information Panorama roof* (p. 158)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Remote control key (p. 236)

Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)

Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)

HomeLink*30

HomeLink is a programmable remote control that is integrated into the car's electrical system.

General

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Indicator lamp

HomeLink31 is a programmable remote control that can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys- tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus replace their remote controls. HomeLink is sup- plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The

HomeLink panel consists of three programma- ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror glass.

For more information about HomeLink, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277).

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to control a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is near the door or gate while it is in motion.

While programming HomeLink, the garage door or gate being programmed may activate. For this reason, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress.

The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being pro- grammed.

Do not use HomeLink for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse.

Save the original remote controls for future pro- gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-

30 Applies to certain markets. 31 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 163

mended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold; see the section "Programming HomeLink".

Related information Programming HomeLink* (p. 163)

Programming HomeLink*32

Instructions for programming HomeLink.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink can be programmed or used. Preferably fit new batteries in the remote con- trol that will be replaced by HomeLink for faster programming and improved transmis- sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink but- tons should be reset before programming, see the heading "Resetting the HomeLink

buttons". When the reset is complete, HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and ready for programming.

1. Press the33 button on HomeLink you want to program. The indicator lamp33 on HomeLink should flash yellow once per second. It is not necessary to hold the button depressed.

2. Aim the remote control towards the HomeLink button to be programmed and hold it 2-8 cm from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink.

Note: Some remote controls can program HomeLink better at a distance of 15-20 cm. Bear this in mind if you encounter problems during programming.

3. Press and hold the button on the original remote control to be programmed on HomeLink and keep an eye on the indicator lamp. Do not release the button until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing yellow once per second to either flashing green 10 times per second or illuminating in a constant green glow. The button on the remote control can be released once the indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green.

Note: For some receivers, programming step 3 may need to be replaced with the instruc- tions in step 4.

4. Press and release the button on the original remote control every other second until the indicator lamp has changed from flashing yellow once per second to either flashing green 10 times per second or illuminating in a constant green glow.

32 Applies to certain markets. 33 See section "HomeLink*" for the location of buttons and indicator lamp.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

164

5. Depress the programmed HomeLink button and check the indicator lamp.

> Constant green glow: If the indicator lamp illuminates in a constant green glow, programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be acti- vated when the programmed button is depressed.

Flashes green 10 times per second: Depress the button being programmed, hold it depressed for 2 seconds and then release it. Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time. Programming should now be complete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed button is depressed.

If the receiver is still not activated: Continue with programming steps 6-8 to complete programming.

6. Locate programming button34 on the receiver for the garage door or similar. It is normally located near the antenna bracket on the receiver.

7. Depress and release the receiver's program- ming button. Step 8 must be completed within 30 seconds of the button being depressed.

8. Depress the button being programmed, hold it depressed for 2 seconds and then release it. Repeat the sequence of press- ing/holding/releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time. Programming is now be com- plete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the pro- grammed button is depressed.

Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls.

Depress the programmed button. The garage door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated (may take a few seconds). The indicator lamp illu- minates or flashes when the button has been depressed. Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink if required.

NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277).

Resetting the HomeLink buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink

buttons at the same time, not each button indi- vidually. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed; see the section "Programming individual buttons" below.

34 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 165

1. Depress buttons 1 and 3 on HomeLink and hold them depressed until the indicator lamp begins flashing green (about 10 seconds).

2. Release the buttons.

> HomeLink is now set to "learn mode" and is ready to be reprogrammed; see the section "Programming HomeLink" above.

Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink button, proceed as follows:

1. Depress the required button and do not release.

2. After approx. 20 seconds when the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash yellow, start with step 1 from the section "Program- ming HomeLink" above.

Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is not programmed with a new unit, it will resume the previously saved programming.

For more information or to provide feedback about HomeLink, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277).

Related information HomeLink* (p. 162)

Trip computer The car's trip computer records and calculates vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving.

In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa- tion is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis- play.

12-inch driver display.

8-inch driver display.

The following meters are included in the trip computer:

Trip meter

Odometer

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Distance to empty tank

Tourist - alternative speedometer

Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA.

TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- matically if the car is not used for at least four hours.

The following information is registered while driv- ing:

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

166

Mileage

Driving time

Average speed

Average fuel consumption.

The values apply from the trip meter's latest reset.

Odometer The odometer records the car's total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero.

Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second.

Distance to empty tank The trip computer calculates the remaining mile- age with the fuel available in the tank.

The calculation is based on the average fuel con- sumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.

No guaranteed range remains when the gauge shows "----". In which case, refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance.

Tourist - alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas- ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car's instruments.

The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres- ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.

Related information Show trip data in the driver display (p. 166)

Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 168)

Show trip data in the driver display The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- ues can be shown in the driver display.

The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

167

Open and navigate in the app menu35 using the right- hand steering wheel keypad.

App menu

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

1. Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1).

(It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message must be confirmed before the app menu can be opened.)

2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2).

> The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3).

3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver dis- play:

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Distance to empty tank

Odometer

Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis- play of mileage

Tourist (alternative speedometer).

Select or deselect an option with the O but- ton (4). The change is made immediately.

Resetting the trip meter

Reset the trip meter TM with one long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch.

Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours or more.

Change unit Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the centre display as follows:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Units.

3. Under Units of Measurement, select the required unit standard: Metric, Imperial or US.

35 The appearance of the display may vary depending on instrument variant.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.168

NOTE

In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys- tem*.

Related information Trip computer (p. 165)

Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 168)

Using the application menu in the driver dis- play (p. 105)

Show trip statistics in the centre display Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis- played graphically in the centre display and pro- vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi- cient driving.

Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics.

Each bar in the diagram sym- bolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The

bars are filled in from the right as driving pro- gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance.

The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset.

Trip statistics from the trip computer36.

Settings for trip statistics

Press Preferences to

change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.

reset data after every trip. Performed when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours.

reset data for the current trip.

Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset simultane- ously.

Change unit Change the unit for mileage, fuel consumption, etc. via the centre display as follows:

36 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

169

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Units.

3. Under Units of Measurement, select the required unit standard: Metric, Imperial or US.

Related information Trip computer (p. 165)

Show trip data in the driver display (p. 166)

Settings view Settings and information for many of the car's functions can be managed in the centre dis- play's settings view.

Opening/closing and navigating in the settings view

Top view with button for Settings.

1. Drag down the tab at the top of the centre display to open the top view.

2. Press Settings to open the settings view.

3. Press one of the categories shown and navi- gate to subcategories and Settings by pressing again.

4. Press Back to go back in the settings view.

Press Close to close the settings view.

Changing a setting

A subcategory in the settings view with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but- tons).

1. Press on categories and subcategories to navigate to the required setting.

2. Change one or more settings. Different types of settings are changed in different ways (see the table below for a description of each type).

> The changes are saved immediately.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

170

Types of settings There are several different types of settings:

Setting

type

Description

Trigger function

Starts an app or separate view for more advanced settings through a press on the text, e.g. to connect a device with Bluetooth.

Radio but- ton

Select a setting from several options by pressing the required radio button, e.g. to select a sys- tem language.

Multi- selector button

Select a level for something by pressing the required part of the button, e.g. to select a sensitivity level for City Safety.

Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by pressing on the box to select/ deselect it, e.g. to select auto- matic start of seat heating.

Slider Select a level for something within an interval by pressing and dragging the slider, e.g. to select volume level.

Display of informa- tion

No actual setting. Shows infor- mation about something, e.g. the car's identification number.

Related information Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Categories in the settings view (p. 170)

Categories in the settings view The settings view has a number of main catego- ries and subcategories where settings and infor- mation for many of the car's functions are collec- ted.

The settings view has 7 main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System.

In turn, each category contains a number of sub- categories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual. For system settings not descri- bed in the corresponding section, see the section "Changing system settings in the settings view".

Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to a Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile. The tables below provide an overview showing whether a category's set- tings are personal, global or a mixture of both.

My Car

Subcategories Settings

Displays Personal

IntelliSafe Mixed

Park Assist Global

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 171

Subcategories Settings

Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mode*

Mixed

Lights and Lighting Mixed

Mirrors and Easy Entry Personal

Locking Mixed

Parking Brake and Suspension Mixed

Seats Mixed

Wipers Mixed

Suspension Global

Sound

Subcategories Settings

Sound Experience* Personal

Tone Personal

Balance Personal

System Volumes Mixed

Navigation

Subcategories Settings

Map Personal

Route and Guidance Personal

Subcategories Settings

Traffic Personal

Guidance Personal

System Personal

Media

Subcategories Settings

AM/FM radio Personal

DAB Personal

Gracenote Personal

Video Personal

Communication

Subcategories Settings

Phone

Text Messages

Bluetooth Devices

Wi-Fi Global

Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Global

Car Modem Internet Global

Subcategories Settings

Volvo On Call

Volvo Service Networks Global

Climate The main category Climate has no subcatego- ries.

System

Subcategories Settings

Driver Profile Personal

Date and Time

System Language Personal

Keyboard Layouts Global

Voice Control Personal

Units Personal

Storage

Software Updates

Factory reset

Services

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

172

Related information Settings view (p. 169)

Changing system settings in the settings view (p. 172)

Changing system settings in the settings view The System category in the settings view col- lects general settings and information for car systems, such as language and units.

The system settings under Driver Profile, Date and Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, Software Updates, Factory reset, Factory Reset and Services are described in the corres- ponding section of the owner's manual.

Changing system language 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press System System Language.

3. Select system language. Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recog- nition symbol.

> The language in the driver display, centre display and head-up display is changed.

Changing system units

Changing length and volume units 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press System Units Units of Measurement.

3. Select from the following unit standards:

Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees Celsius.

Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees Celsius.

US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- heit.

> The units in the driver display, centre dis- play and head-up display are changed.

See storage information 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press System Storage.

> Storage information for the car's hard disk is shown, including total capacity, available capacity and how much space installed applications are using.

See the car's vehicle identification number 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press System Vehicle Identification Number.

> The car's vehicle identification number (VIN37) is shown.

37 Vehicle Identification Number.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

173

Related information Categories in the settings view (p. 170)

Driver profiles (p. 174)

Clock (p. 99)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

System updates (p. 513)

Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 173)

Book service and repair (p. 510)

Resetting settings in the settings view It is possible to reset all modified settings in the settings view to their default values at once.

Types of resets There are three different types of resets for set- tings in the settings view:

Factory Reset - clears all data and media and resets all settings to their default values.

Reset Car Settings - resets global settings to their default values.

Reset Personal Settings - clears personal data and resets personal settings to their default values.

Resetting settings

NOTE

Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press System Factory reset.

3. Select the required reset type.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Press OK to confirm the reset.

For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles.

> Selected settings are reset.

Related information Changing system settings in the settings

view (p. 172)

Driver profiles (p. 174)

Resetting user data for change of ownership (p. 179)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

174

Driver profiles Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver's personal pref- erences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles.

The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile.

What settings are saved in the driver profiles? Many of the settings made in the car will be auto- matically saved in the active driver profile if the profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a driver profile". Settings made in the car are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles.

Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation, audio and media system, language and voice control.

Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro- files.

Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver profiles.

They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active.

Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile - the settings are global.

Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - the brightness setting is a personal setting.

Refer to the section "Categories in the settings view" for more information on which settings are personal and which are global.

Related information Editing a driver profile (p. 175)

Categories in the settings view (p. 170)

Selecting driver profile (p. 174)

Selecting driver profile The last used driver profile is the one selected when the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked.

When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. How- ever, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started. See "Linking remote control key to driver profile".

There are two options for changing to another driver profile.

Option 1:

1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the dis- play has been started.

> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.

2. Select the driver profile required.

3. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Option 2:

1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

175

2. Press Profile.

> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.

3. Select the driver profile required.

4. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 174)

Editing a driver profile (p. 175)

Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 176)

Editing a driver profile It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car.

All types of changes to driver profiles are made from the top view in the centre display - Settings

System Driver Profiles.

Renaming a driver profile Rename a driver profile starting from the Driver Profile window:

1. Press Edit Profile.

> A menu opens, where the profile can be edited.

2. Tap in the box Profile Name.

> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to

change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard.

3. Save the name change by tapping on Back/ Close.

> The name has now been changed.

NOTE

A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved.

Resetting settings in the driver profiles Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.

NOTE

Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Factory Reset Reset Personal Settings.

3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 174)

Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 173)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

176

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Selecting driver profile (p. 174)

Linking remote control key to driver profile It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key.

The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated.

A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used.

Linking a remote control key to a driver profile First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active. The active profile can then be linked to the key.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

3. Select the desired profile. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key.

4. Drag down the top view and tap on Settings

System Driver Profiles Edit Profile.

5. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro- file to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be dis- played.

Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. > When the message Profile connected

to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked.

6. Press OK.

> This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

177

Related information Driver profiles (p. 174)

Editing a driver profile (p. 175)

Remote control key (p. 236)

Importing/exporting a driver profile from/to USB The personal settings saved in the driver profiles can be exported/imported to other cars via USB.

Follow these steps in order to import/export a driver profile from/to a USB memory:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

USB socket in tunnel console.

3. Insert a USB memory in the tunnel console.

4. Select Import profile from USB/Export profile to USB.

NOTE

Only one USB memory can remain inserted in the port while profiles are being imported and exported. If there is more than one then there is the risk that the profile is saved to the wrong USB memory or that the car cannot find a profile to import.

NOTE

A number of profiles can be exported to a USB memory, but only one profile can be imported at a time. When a profile is imported it overwrites the cars current profile. The pro- file name is also written over.

The guest profile cannot be exported or imported.

5. Select the profile to be imported or the pro- file(s) to be exported.

> The current driver profile is overwritten when a new one is imported.

6. Select OK.

If the export fails, it may be due to the following:

The USB memory is full.

The USB memory is incorrectly inserted or was pulled out during the export.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

178

If the import fails, it may be due to the following:

The USB memory is incorrectly inserted or was pulled out during the import.

There is no driver profile saved on the USB memory.

The file for the driver profile on the USB memory is corrupt.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 174)

Changing settings for apps All of the car's apps are listed in the app view. The app settings that relate to the car's embed- ded functions can be changed from the centre display's top view.

Apps for embedded functions - basic apps The apps installed in the car from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. Set- tings for these apps can be changed directly in the top view in the centre display.

Change the settings for a basic app 1. Tap on the app, e.g. FM radio.

2. Drag down the top view.

3. Press FM Radio Settings.

4. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections.

5. Press either the physical home button or the virtual close button.

Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Refer to the section "Categories in the settings view" for more infor- mation on how settings are changed.

Third party apps Third party apps are not included in the car's sys- tem from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings

are always made inside the app and not from the top view.

Related information Navigating in the centre display's views

(p. 40)

Settings view (p. 169)

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 472)

Categories in the settings view (p. 170)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 179

Resetting user data for change of ownership In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to fac- tory settings.

The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service.

Related information Resetting settings in the settings view

(p. 173)

Volvo ID (p. 23)

CLIMATE CONTROL

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.182

Climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate con- trol. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

2-zone climate

Climate zones with 2-zone climate.

With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides.

All climate control system functions are con- trolled from the centre display and physical but- tons in the centre console.

4-zone climate*

Climate zones with 4-zone climate.

With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides in both the front and rear seat.

All climate control system functions are con- trolled from the centre display and physical but- tons in the centre console. The functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.

Related information Climate control - sensors (p. 183)

Perceived temperature (p. 183)

Air quality (p. 184)

Climate controls (p. 186)

Air distribution (p. 197)

Parking climate* (p. 206)

Voice recognition control of climate control (p. 119)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 183

Climate control - sensors The climate control system has a number of sen- sors to help control the climate in the car.

Sensor location

Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte- rior rearview mirror.

Outside temperature sensor - in the right- hand door mirror.

Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru- ment panel.

Temperature sensor for the passenger com- partment - by the physical buttons in the centre console.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth- ing or other objects.

With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake.

Related information Climate control (p. 182)

Perceived temperature (p. 183)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)

Perceived temperature The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual tempera- ture.

The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically per- ceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time.

The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passen- ger compartment. This means that the tempera- ture can differ between the right and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information Climate control (p. 182)

Climate control - sensors (p. 183)

Regulating the temperature (p. 190)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.184

Air quality The materials selected for the passenger com- partment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high.

Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean.

Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- ommended by Volvo to clean the interior.

Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the modifications for Clean Zone Interior Package* and the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* also help to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment.

Clean Zone* The Clean Zone function checks whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment.

The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display.

The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open.

If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue.

Conditions that are checked:

That all doors and the tailgate are closed.

That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed.

That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated.

That the ventilation fan is activated.

That the air recirculation is deactivated.

NOTE

Clean Zone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the con- ditions for good air quality have been met.

Related information Climate control (p. 182)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 185)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)

Cleaning the interior (p. 554)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 185

Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.

Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- ommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- ter is fitted.

Related information Air quality (p. 184)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 185)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)

Volvo service programme (p. 510)

Clean Zone Interior Package* Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passen- ger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- senger compartment with fresh air. The func- tion starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.

The fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).

Related information Air quality (p. 184)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)

Interior Air Quality System* Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto- matic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen- ger compartment from contaminants such as par- ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground- level ozone.

If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated.

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger com- partment.

In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear win- dow should be used.

Activating/deactivating the air quality sensor It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.186

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac- tivate the air quality sensor.

Related information Air quality (p. 184)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 185)

Activating/deactivating air recirculation (p. 196)

Climate controls The climate control system's functions are con- trolled from the centre display, physical buttons in the centre console and the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console*.

Overview of climate controls

Climate controls in the centre display.

Defrost buttons in the centre console.

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.

Related information Climate control (p. 182)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console* (p. 188)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 194)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 187

Climate controls in the centre display All climate functions can be regulated from the climate row and the climate view in the centre display.

Climate row The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row.

Temperature controls for driver and passen- ger side.

Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*.

Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated cli- mate settings.

Climate view One tap on the centre button in the climate row gives access to the climate view. The climate view is divided into the tabs Main climate, Rear climate* and Parking climate*. Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading.

Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors.

AC - Controls for air conditioning.

Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.

Controls for air distribution.

Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli- mate, the control is shared with the rear seat).

AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.188

Rear climate control* All climate functions for the rear seat can be regulated in the Rear climate tab.

2nd row climate - Controls for climate func- tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear seat.

Temperature controls for rear seat.

Controls for heated rear seat*.

Parking climate* The car's parking climate control can be regula- ted in the Parking climate tab.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 194)

Activating/deactivating air conditioning (p. 190)

Activating/deactivating air recirculation (p. 196)

Changing the air distribution (p. 198)

Regulating the fan level (p. 193)

Auto-regulating the climate (p. 189)

Regulating the temperature (p. 190)

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* (p. 203)

Activating/deactivating ventilation of the seats* (p. 204)

Activating/deactivating heating of steering wheel* (p. 205)

Parking climate* (p. 206)

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console* The rear seat's climate functions are controlled from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.

Controls for heated rear seat*.

Fan controls for rear seat.

Temperature controls for rear seat.

If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear of the tunnel console for controlling these.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* (p. 203)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 189

Regulating the fan level (p. 193)

Regulating the temperature (p. 190)

Auto-regulating the climate With an auto-regulated climate, several climate functions are controlled automatically by the cli- mate control system.

Auto-regulation automatically controls the air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution.

Auto-regulation button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Give a short or long press on AUTO.

Temperature and fan level are changed depending on whether a short or long press is given:

Short press - resets to previous settings for auto-regulated climate control.

Long press - changes to default settings: 22 C/72 F and level 3 (level 2 in the rear seat1).

> Auto-regulation of the climate is acti- vated/deactivated and the button illumi- nates/extinguishes.

Related information Climate controls in the centre display

(p. 187)

1 For cars with 4-zone climate*.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.190

Activating/deactivating air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

Activating/deactivating the main air conditioning

The air conditioning button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press AC.

> The air conditioning is activated/deacti- vated and the button illuminates/extin- guishes.

When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically con- trols starting and switching off as required.

NOTE

Close all side windows and the panorama roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.

NOTE

It is not possible to activate the air condition- ing when the fan control is in Off position.

Related information Climate controls in the centre display

(p. 187)

Regulating the temperature The temperature can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides. With 4-zone climate* the temperature can also be set separately for the front and rear seats.

Regulating temperature for front seat2

Temperature buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate row to open the controls.

2 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 191

Temperature control.

2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following:

drag the control to the desired tempera- ture, or

press +/ to raise/lower the temperature gradually.

> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature.

Synchronising the temperature

Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls.

1. Press the driver's side temperature button in the centre display's climate row in order to open the controls.

2. Press Synchronise temperature.

> The temperature for all zones in the car is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera- ture button.

Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on Synchronise temperature or by changing the passenger side or rear seat* temperature set- tings.

Regulating temperature for rear seat* From the front seat

Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli- mate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display and select the tab for Rear climate.

2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button to open the control.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.192

Temperature control.

3. Regulate the temperature by means of the following:

drag the control to the desired tempera- ture

press +/ to raise/lower the temperature gradually.

> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature.

From the rear seat

Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.

Press the left or right-hand side buttons on the tunnel console's climate panel in order to lower/raise the temperature gradu- ally.

> The temperature changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set tem- perature.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console* (p. 188)

Perceived temperature (p. 183)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 193

Regulating the fan level The fan can be set to five different automatic fan levels as well as Off and Max. With 4-zone cli- mate* the fan level can be set separately for the front and rear seats.

Regulating fan level for front seat3

Fan control buttons in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

IMPORTANT

If the fan is fully switched off then the air con- ditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Regulating fan level for rear seat* From the front seat

The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display and select the tab for Rear climate.

2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.

The rear seat's fan level can be switched off by tapping on 2nd row climate.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

From the rear seat

Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun- nel console.

Press the desired fan level, Off or 1-5 on the tunnel console climate panel.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

NOTE

The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if the fan level for the front seat is in position Off.

3 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.194

NOTE

The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.

Related information Climate controls in the centre display

(p. 187)

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console* (p. 188)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors The three functions max defroster, heated wind- screen*, and heated rear window and door mir- rors are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windows and door mirrors.

From physical buttons in the centre console The centre console contains physical buttons for quick access to the defrost functions.

With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display.

Physical buttons in the centre console.

Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster.

Button for heated rear window and door mir- rors.

Cars without heated windscreen:

Press the button (1).

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

Cars with heated windscreen:

Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels:

Activated heated windscreen

Activated heated windscreen and max defroster

Deactivated.

> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

NOTE

Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button.

Rear window and door mirror defrosters:

Press the button (2).

> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 195

From the climate view in the centre display

Activating/deactivating max defroster

Max defroster button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Max.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, acti- vates air conditioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.

When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the pre- vious settings.

NOTE

Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level.

Activating/deactivating heated windscreen*

The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Electric.

> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti- vated and the button illuminates/extin- guishes.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

NOTE

The heated windscreen may affect the per- formance of transponders and other commu- nication equipment.

NOTE

If the heated windscreen is activated when the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the engine then the engine will be restarted.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.196

Activating/deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors

The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Rear.

> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

Activating/deactivating automatic start of heated windows It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen* and heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the

windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated wind- screen.

Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Activating/deactivating air recirculation The air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust fumes, etc. from the passenger compartment, by means of no outside air being drawn into the car.

The air recirculation button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Recirc.

> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 197

NOTE

It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated.

Activating/deactivating the timer for air recirculation It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer.

Related information Climate controls in the centre display

(p. 187)

Air distribution The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Overview of air distribution

Air distribution in the passenger compartment with 4- zone climate.

Automatic and manual air distribution With auto-regulated climate running the air distri- bution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually.

Adjustable air vents There are 6 or 8* adjustable air vents in the pas- senger compartment depending on the climate control system.

Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com- partment.

With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument panel and one on each of the door pillars between the front and rear doors.

Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the rear of the tunnel console.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sensi- tive to air flows and draughts.

Related information Climate control (p. 182)

Changing the air distribution (p. 198)

Opening/closing and aiming the air vents (p. 199)

CLIMATE CONTROL

198

Table of air distribution options (p. 201)

Auto-regulating the climate (p. 189)

Changing the air distribution The air distribution can be changed manually if required.

The air distribution buttons in the climate view.

Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents

Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel and centre console

Air distribution - air vents in the floor

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press one or more of the air distribution but- tons in order to open/close the correspond- ing air flow.

> The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish.

Related information Air distribution (p. 197)

Opening/closing and aiming the air vents (p. 199)

Table of air distribution options (p. 201)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

199

Opening/closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually.

If the door pillar vents and instrument panel outer vents are aimed toward the side windows, then misting can be removed.

If the door pillar vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.

Opening/closing the air vents Air vents for the front seat:

Air vent knob4.

Turn the knob in order to open/close the air flow from the vent.

The air flow is at maximum when the marking on the knob is in vertical position.

Air vents for the rear seat:

The air vent's thumbwheel4.

Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close the air flow from the nozzle.

The longer the white lines on the thumb- wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.

4 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

200

Aiming the air vents

The air vent's lever4.

Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to aim the air flow from the nozzle.

Related information Air distribution (p. 197)

Changing the air distribution (p. 198)

Table of air distribution options (p. 201)

4 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

201

Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting.

Air distribution Purpose

If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.

Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.

Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides heat or cooling to the floor.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

202

Air distribution Purpose

Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.

Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or humid climate.

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures.

Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor.

Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

Related information Air distribution (p. 197)

Changing the air distribution (p. 198)

Opening/closing and aiming the air vents (p. 199)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 203

Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.

Activating/deactivating heating of the front seat*

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- trols for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel, the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Activating/deactivating heating of the rear seat* From the front seat*

Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display and select the tab for Rear climate.

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

From the rear seat With 2-zone climate:

Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con- sole.

Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's physical buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the LEDs in the button show the set level.

With 4-zone climate*:

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.204

Seat heating indication and controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.

Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel console's climate panel to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set level.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Activating/deactivating automatic start of heated seats It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in order to activate/deactivate the automatic starting of the heating for the driver and passenger seats and to select the level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console* (p. 188)

Activating/deactivating ventilation of the seats* The seats can be ventilated, for example, to remove moisture from clothes.

The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is running and takes seat temperature, solar radia- tion and outside temperature into consideration.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 205

Activating/deactivating ventilation of the front seat*

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- trols for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with heated seats or heated steering wheel, the button for ven- tilated seats is immediately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

NOTE

The seat ventilation should be used carefully by people sensitive to draughts. Level Low is recommended for long-term use.

IMPORTANT

Seat ventilation cannot be started if the pas- senger compartment temperature is too low. This is in order to avoid cooling down the per- son sitting in the seat.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Activating/deactivating heating of steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.

Activating/deactivating heating of steering wheel

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.206

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Activating/deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- tivated when the engine is started. With auto- matic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in order to activate/deactivate the automatic starting of steering wheel heating and to select the level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 186)

Climate controls in the centre display (p. 187)

Steering wheel (p. 131)

Parking climate* The climate of the car's passenger compartment can be preconditioned or maintained while the car is parked.

Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con- trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis- play's climate view.

Preconditioning Preconditioning of the car before driving reduces wear and energy needs during a journey.

Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via the timer.

The function utilises several systems in different cases:

The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms up both the passenger compartment and the engine.

The ventilation, in a hot climate, cools the passenger compartment to the current outer temperature.

NOTE

During preconditioning of the passenger compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature set in the climate control system.

Climate comfort retention The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be switched off but the driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car and maintain the level of climate comfort.

Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 207

The function utilises several systems in different cases:

Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli- mate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature.

The ventilation, in a hot climate, cools the passenger compartment to the current outer temperature.

NOTE

Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.

Related information Climate control (p. 182)

Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)

Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- tion* (p. 210)

Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 212)

Heater* (p. 213)

Parking heater* (p. 214)

Starting/stopping preconditioning* Preconditioning warms the passenger compart- ment and engine or airs the passenger compart- ment before driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display or a mobile phone.

Starting/stopping from the centre display

Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press Preconditioning.

> Preconditioning is started/switched off and the button is illuminated/extin- guished.

NOTE

The car's doors and windows should be closed during the preconditioning of the pas- senger compartment.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

Starting from the app* Start of preconditioning and information about the selected settings can be managed from a device that has the Volvo On Call* app. The pre- conditioning warms the passenger compartment to the comfort temperature or airs it to the cur- rent outer temperature.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.208

To be able to also cool the passenger compart- ment to the comfort temperature (with the car's air conditioning) the engine remote start function Engine Remote Start - ERS5 via the Volvo On Call* app. can be used.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 206)

Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- tion* (p. 210)

Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 212)

Heater* (p. 213)

Timer for preconditioning* The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time.

The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for:

A time on a single date

A time on one or more days of the week, with or without repetition.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 206)

Setting the timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Activating/deactivating the timer for precon- ditioning* (p. 210)

Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)

Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 212)

Setting the timer for preconditioning* The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings.

Adding a time setting

The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate tab in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

5 Certain car models and markets.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 209

3. Press Add timer.

> A pop-up window is shown.

NOTE

It is not possible to add a time setting if there already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to add a new one.

4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date.

Tap on Days to set the time for one or more days of the week.

With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat weekly.

5. With Date: Select the date for precondition- ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows.

With Days: Select the days of the week for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week.

6. Set the time when the preconditioning should be finished by scrolling with the arrows.

7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set- ting.

> The time setting is added to the list and is activated.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Edit the time setting in the same way as described in "Adding a time setting" above.

Deleting a time setting

The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press Edit list.

4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.

> The icon changes to the text Delete.

5. Press Delete to confirm.

> The time setting is removed from the list.

Related information Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Activating/deactivating the timer for precon- ditioning* (p. 210)

Heater* (p. 213)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.210

Activating/deactivating the timer for preconditioning* A time setting in the timer for preconditioning can be activated or deactivated based on need.

The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli- mate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the setting.

> The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

Related information Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Setting the timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Heater* (p. 213)

Starting/switching off climate comfort retention* Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after driving. The function can use direct start from the centre dis- play.

Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking climate tab in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press Keep climate comfort.

> Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/ extinguishes.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 211

NOTE

It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger com- partment climate, or if the outside tempera- ture is above approx. 20 C.

NOTE

Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 206)

Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.212

Symbols and messages for parking climate control* A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display.

This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the parking heater is active.

Symbol Message Specification

Parking climate

Service required

Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.

Parking climate

Temporarily unavailable

Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work- shopA to check the function.

Parking climate

Unavailable Fuel level too low

Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill- ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.

Parking climate

Unavailable Charge level too low

Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the parking heater*. Charging the battery.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 206)

Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)

Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- tion* (p. 210)

Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)

Heater* (p. 213)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 213

Heater* The heater helps the engine and passenger compartment reach the correct temperature before and during driving.

The heater has two subfunctions:

Parking heater - heats the engine and pas- senger compartment, if necessary, when the parking climate control's preconditioning* is activated.

Additional heater - heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- ing driving.

The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the heater is active.

NOTE

When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

Battery and charging The heater is powered by the car's starter battery. If the charge level of the starter battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

NOTE

Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used.

Fuel and refuelling6

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel tank.

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the heater.

If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.

Related information Parking heater* (p. 214)

Additional heater* (p. 215)

Parking climate* (p. 206)

6 Applies to fuel-driven heater.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.214

Parking heater* The parking heater helps the passenger com- partment reach the correct temperature before driving.

The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

NOTE

When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

The parking heater starts automatically when extra heat is required if the parking climate con- trol's preconditioning* is activated.

It is then switched off automatically when the right temperature, the time of a set timer or the heater's maximum running time has been reached.

The heater's maximum running time is 40 minutes.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.

Make sure that there is enough charge in the starter battery if the heater needs to be used.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

If the heater is used on a regular basis, then the car should be driven for the same amount of time that the heater is used in order to ensure that the car's battery is recharged with the same amount of energy as consumed by the parking heater. The parking heater is used for a maximum of 40 minutes each time.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

WARNING

If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com- ing from the parking heater, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo work- shop should be contacted for repair.

Related information Heater* (p. 213)

Additional heater* (p. 215)

Parking climate* (p. 206)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 215

Additional heater* The additional heater helps the passenger com- partment and engine reach the correct tempera- ture while driving.

The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

NOTE

When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven.

It then switches off automatically when the car is switched off.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.

Make sure that there is enough charge in the starter battery if the heater needs to be used.

Activating/deactivating automatic start for the additional heater It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/deacti- vated.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac- tivate automatic start of the additional heater.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances.

Related information Heater* (p. 213)

Parking heater* (p. 214)

LOADING AND STORAGE

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.218

Passenger compartment interior Overview of the passenger compartment's inte- rior and storage locations.

Front seat

Storage compartment in the door panel and by the steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors.

Storage spaces with cup holder, ashtray*, electrical socket and cigarette lighter*, mesh pocket*, as well as an AUX/USB socket in the tunnel console.

Rear seat

Storage compartment and ashtray* in the door panel, cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front seat backrest and also electrical sockets and cigarette lighter* in the tunnel console.

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compart- ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

Related information Tunnel console (p. 219)

Using the glovebox (p. 225)

Sun visors (p. 226)

Electrical sockets (p. 220)

Emptying ashtrays* (p. 224)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 219

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch is opened/closed with a push on the handle.

Storage compartment with cup holder for driver and passenger as well as 12 V socket. If ashtray and cigarette lighter were specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.

Storage compartment and AUX/USB input under the armrest.

Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)

Electrical sockets (p. 220)

Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 224)

Emptying ashtrays* (p. 224)

Connecting media via AUX/USB input (p. 452)

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console* (p. 188)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.220

Electrical sockets In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri- cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical socket*.

For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec- trical system must be set in the lowest ignition position I. The sockets are then active as long as the starter battery level does not become too low.

If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is switched off and the car is not locked, or is locked with blocked lock position temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to be active for a further ten minutes.

NOTE

Remember that use of the electrical socket with the engine switched off entails a risk of discharging the starter battery, which can limit functionality.

230 V electrical socket*

230 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

The socket can be used for various accessories requiring a 230 V supply, e.g. chargers and lap- top computers.

IMPORTANT

Maximum socket output is 150 W.

Using the socket 1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the

accessory's plug.

> The diode on the socket indicates its sta- tus.

2. Check that the diode is illuminated with a steady green light - only then is current avail- able at the socket.

3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the plug - do not pull on the cable.

Pull up the cover when the socket is not being used or the socket is left unattended.

IMPORTANT

Do not use accessories with large or heavy connectors - they can damage the socket or come loose when driving.

Do not use accessories that can cause interference to the car's radio receiver or electrical system for example.

Position the accessory so that it is not at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or collision.

Keep an eye on connected accessories as they can generate heat that can burn passengers or the interior.

WARNING

Only use accessories that are undam- aged and fault-free. The accessories must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with connectors designed for the socket. The accessories must have a CE marking, UL marking or an equivalent safety marking.

Never allow sockets, connectors or accessories to come into contact with water or other liquids. Do not touch or use the socket if it appears to be dam-

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

221

aged or has come into contact with water or other liquid.

Do not connect junction sockets, adapt- ers or extension cables to the socket as these can override the socket's safety features.

The socket is equipped with a protective cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or damages the socket preventing the cover from doing its job. Do not leave children in the car unsupervised when the socket is active.

Failure to follow the advice given above can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.

Status indication A diode on the socket indicates its status:

Status indication Reason Action

Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.

Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart- ment is too warm).

Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool down before reinserting the plug.

The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or contin- uously) or is defective.

None. The accessory cannot be connected to the socket.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.222

Status indication Reason Action

Diode not illuminated The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the socket.

The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni- tion position I.

The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.

If the problem persists, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contac- ted.

12 V electrical socket

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat. 12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.

The sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.

The socket in the tunnel console can be comple- mented with a cigarette lighter*.

IMPORTANT

Maximum socket output is 120 W per socket.

LOADING AND STORAGE

223

Using the sockets 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)

or fold down the cover (cargo area) and plug in the accessory.

2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not being used or if the socket is left unat- tended.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.224

Using the cigarette lighter* The cigarette lighter can be mounted in the 12 V sockets in the front and rear sections of the tun- nel console.

Cigarette lighter in the tunnel console, front seat.

Cigarette lighter in the tunnel console, rear seat.

1. Press in the button on the lighter.

> When the lighter is glowing the button hops up.

2. Pull out the lighter from the socket and light a cigarette on the glowing coils.

3. Replace the lighter in the socket.

IMPORTANT

Observe caution when the lighter is activated so that the glowing part does not damage the interior for example.

Related information Tunnel console (p. 219)

Electrical sockets (p. 220)

Emptying ashtrays* (p. 224)

Emptying ashtrays* With a cigarette lighter in the car, there are detachable ashtrays in the tunnel console's cup holders and in the door panels for the rear seat.

Emptying an ashtray in the tunnel console 1. Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up

from the cup holder and empty the contents.

2. Refit the ashtray in the cup holder.

Emptying an ashtray in the door panels for the rear seat

1. Open the ashtray's cover and then press the cover up to a fully vertical position.

> The catch that holds the ashtray in place is released.

2. Lift up the ashtray and empty the contents.

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 225

3. Refit the ashtray and allow it to slide down in the tracks on the sides.

4. Carefully press the two short sides of the ashtray.

> The catch that holds the ashtray in place reattaches.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)

Tunnel console (p. 219)

Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 224)

Using the glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.

The printed owner's manual and maps can be kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also a pen holder on the inside of the lid.

Locking/unlocking the glovebox* The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the accompanying key.

The key's designated storage space

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.

Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.226

Using the glovebox as a cooled area* The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli- mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running).

Cooling activated

Cooling deactivated

Activate/deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the passenger compartment/glovebox.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)

Using private locking (p. 249)

Sun visors The rear of each sun visor includes a vanity mir- ror with card holder.

Vanity mirror with lighting plus card holder.

The vanity mirror lighting* is switched on auto- matically when the lid is lifted.

The vanity mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. cards or tickets.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)

Cargo area The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it possible to transport and secure large objects.

By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to con- ceal the load if desired. The warning triangle and first-aid kit are also stored in the cargo area.

The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area floor.

Related information Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 229)

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 130)

Loading (p. 227)

Tool kit (p. 504)

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

227

Loading There are a number of things to remember when loading the car.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor- responding weight.

WARNING

The cars driving properties change depend- ing on the weight and positioning of the load.

Recommendations for loading in the cargo area Position the load firmly against the rear

seat's backrest.

Centre the load.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low- ered backrests.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weigh- ing 1000 kg.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatable cur- tain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.

Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

Increasing the space in the cargo area To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note

that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down.

A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.

Recommendations for roof loads For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers1

that Volvo have developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey.

Carefully follow the installation instructions sup- plied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carri- ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

1 Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.228

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving charac- teristics are altered by roof loads.

Read about maximum permitted roof load in the section on Weights.

Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)

Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)

Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 229)

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 130)

Safety grille* (p. 233)

Safety net* (p. 232)

Cargo cover* (p. 230)

Weights (p. 564)

Load retaining eyelets The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- trude may cause injury under violent braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information Loading (p. 227)

Bag hooks (p. 228)

Safety grille* (p. 233)

Safety net* (p. 232)

Cargo cover* (p. 230)

Bag hooks Bag hooks, together with an elastic strap, hold bags in place and prevent them from falling over and spreading their contents across the cargo area.

Under the floor hatch*

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 229

There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap2 in the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in the cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four differ- ent positions.

Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks. Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles and are a suitable height - hang them in the hooks.

Along the sides

There are two bag hooks in the side panel on each side of the cargo area.

IMPORTANT

The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi- mum of 5 kg.

Related information Loading (p. 227)

Safety grille* (p. 233)

Safety net* (p. 232)

Cargo cover* (p. 230)

Through-load hatch in the rear seat The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.

1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and fold down the hatch.

2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.

If the private locking* function is used then the hatch must be closed.

Related information Using private locking (p. 249)

Loading (p. 227)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)

2 It is possible to reorder additional elastic straps at a Volvo dealer.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.230

Cargo cover* In the extended position, the cargo cover pre- vents visual access to the cargo area.

Installation

Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in the recess in the side panel in the cargo area.

Then insert the other end piece in the recess in the side panel on the opposite side.

Press down the end pieces on both sides - one by one.

> When a "click" is heard and the red mark- ing on each end piece has disappeared, the cargo cover is attached - check that it is affixed securely.

4. Fold the cargo cover's front sealing disc for- ward to eliminate the space between the cargo cover and the rear seat's backrests.

If the safety net* shall be used at the same time as the cargo cover then the safety net must be fitted first.

Usage There are two extended positions for the cargo cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi- tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas- ier to reach further into the cargo area.

Full-cover position

1. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover so that it slides over the side panels in the cargo area. Pull to the end position.

2. Guide the cover's attachment pins into the grooves in the side panels. Release, while at the same time angling the handle slightly upwards so that the attachment pins hook in.

> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover position.

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 231

Loading mode From the full-cover position:

Grip the handle to release the attachment pins from the hooks.

> The cover retracts until it stops in the loading position.

Returning to full-cover position from loading posi- tion:

1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out to the end position.

2. Release the handle so that the attachment pins hook into the hooks.

> The cover is then locked in the loading position.

With an automatic* cargo cover, the cover will be retracted from full-cover position to loading posi- tion every time the tailgate is opened, and extended again when the tailgate is closed. The cargo cover detects if something is obstructing its movement and then retracts automatically.

NOTE

The cargo cover may not operate automati- cally in low passenger compartment tempera- tures.

IMPORTANT

Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover.

IMPORTANT

Pay attention to the risk of crushing when opening and closing with the automatic* cargo cover.

IMPORTANT

If the cargo area is loaded with a bulky load then the automatic* cargo cover is moved to retracted position in order to avoid it making contact with the load.

Retracting 1. From the full-cover position:

Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- engage the cargo cover's attachment pins and then release.

From loading position:

Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position. Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- engage the attachment pins and then release.

2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins outside of the side panels until it stops in the retracted position.

Remember that a retracted cargo cover may obstruct rearward visibility.

Removal In retracted position:

1. Depress the button on one of the retracted cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that end.

2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.

> The other end piece loosens automatically and the cover can be lifted out of the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 227)

Safety grille* (p. 233)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.232

Safety net* (p. 232)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)

Safety net* The safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.

For reasons of safety, the safety net must always be fastened and anchored as described below.

The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car:

Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.

Front fitting - behind the front seats.

WARNING

Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fit- ted safety net.

Installation

Rear fitting

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrests for- ward in order to facilitate installation.

2. Lower the safety net cassette's end pieces over the mounting eyelets in the recess of the side panels. Press down the end piece one side at a time. Check that the cassette is properly secured.

3. Pull up the net.

4. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks into the rear roof mounting and then press it forward to the end position.

5. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining hooks on the opposite side and press it for- ward to the end position.

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 233

Front fitting

1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.

2. Align the safety net cassette's anchor rails in front of the backrest's attachment lugs.

3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs.

4. Pull up the net.

5. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks into the front roof mounting and then press it forward to the end position.

6. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining hooks on the opposite side and press it for- ward to the end position.

Removing and storing 1. Undo the safety net from the roof mountings

by pressing the retaining hooks backwards. Allow the net to roll into the cassette.

2.

Rear fitting:

Press the button on each side of the cas- sette in order to release the end pieces from the mounting eyelets. Lift out the safety net.

Front fitting:

Slide the cassette from the attachment lugs and lift out the safety net.

Related information Loading (p. 227)

Safety grille* (p. 233)

Cargo cover* (p. 230)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)

Safety grille* The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the cargo area from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment.

The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils Volvo's strength requirements.

For safety reasons, the safety grille must always be attached and anchored correctly.

WARNING

Under no circumstances may anybody remain in the cargo area while the car is moving. This is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.234

Installation Before first installing the safety grille, the existing plastic roof mountings must be replaced with steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that replacing roof mountings is performed at an authorised Volvo workshop or dealer.

1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.

2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in the right direction. Lift in the safety grille through one of the rear side doors.

3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the roof mountings.

The next step is facilitated if two people hold the safety grille in the right position.

4. Fit the enclosed screw and screw in. Repeat on the other side.

> Check that the safety grille is firmly fitted.

For more information about the tools required and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa- tion instructions3 that were included with the ini- tial purchase.

IMPORTANT

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.

Related information Loading (p. 227)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)

Safety net* (p. 232)

Cargo cover* (p. 230)

3 Installation instructions no. 31659257.

LOCKS AND ALARM

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.236

Remote control key The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors and tailgate. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started.

Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key Tag), on right.

The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with sup- port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand- ard. The key needs to be located in the front of the passenger compartment, e.g. in the drivers pocket or in the cup holder in the tunnel console, to be able to start the car. See the section "Star- ting the engine".

As an option, keyless locking/unlocking of doors and tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available. The key then has a range extending in a semicircle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre out from the

tailgate. See the section "Remote control key range".

With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock- ing, the remote control key can be located any- where in the passenger compartment or the cargo area and maintain the functionality to start the car.

Each of the remote control keys that are supplied with the car can be linked to a driver profile with unique settings for the car. When a key with a specific profile is used, the car's settings are adjusted to match the settings for that profile. See the section "Driver profiles".

Button-less key (Key Tag) For cars equipped with keyless locking/unlock- ing*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as the normal remote control key when it comes to keyless starting and locking/unlocking. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced. A new key tag can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Ordering additional keys The car is supplied with two remote control keys - one key tag is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If addi- tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles

are added - one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag.

In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss of a remote control key" below.

Remote control key buttons

The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.

Locking - Pressing the button locks the doors and the tailgate and also arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all of the win- dows and the panorama roof* simultane- ously. See the section "Locking/unlocking from the outside" and "Locking/unlocking from the inside".

Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks the doors and tailgate and also disarms the alarm. A longer press opens all the windows

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 237

simultaneously, also called Global opening1. See the section "Locking/unlocking from the outside".

Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- matically when the button is held depressed. The tailgate is also closed with a long press - acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec- tion "Power operated tailgate".

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- tion switches off automatically after 3 minutes.

WARNING

If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and sunroof are de-energised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key/Key Tag in the car.

A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked.

Interference Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.

NOTE

Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - preferably no closer than 10-15 cm.

If there is still interference - use the remote con- trol key's key blade and then place the key in the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the car. See section "Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade".

NOTE

When the remote control key is placed in the cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car keys close to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other.

Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the work- shop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the centre display's top view.

Related information Remote control key range (p. 238)

Detachable key blade (p. 250)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 257)

Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)

Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)

Driver profiles (p. 174)

1 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.238

Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)

Starting the car (p. 386)

Red Key - Restricted remote control key* (p. 239)

Remote control key range In order for the remote control key to work prop- erly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car.

For manual use The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on

or have a range that extends approx. 20 metres from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

For keyless use2

The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered by the system's antennas.

For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-

cle format area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres on both long sides and approx. 1 metre from the tailgate.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade.

If the remote control key is removed from the car

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is run- ning, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is

shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed.

The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed.

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Antenna locations for the start and lock sys- tem (p. 240)

2 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 239

Red Key - Restricted remote control key* A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for certain car properties. The restrictions are intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g. when it is loaned out.

For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter- mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. In addition, some of the car's driver support sys- tems will always be active. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key.

One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric- tions can be programmed and used for a single

car - at least one must be a normal remote con- trol key.

The settings for Red Key are made by the user of the normal remote control key from the centre

display's top view; go to: Settings System

Driver Profiles Red Keys

Some of the car's driver support functions cannot be deactivated by the user of a Red Key.

The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri- vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings cannot be changed by the person using a Red Key.

Possible settings The following settings can be made to apply for a Red Key:

Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)3 (On/Off):

Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)

Setting during first use is 120 km/h (75 mph)

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

The driver display shows the symbol and message

Red key Speed limitation cannot be exceeded.

Speed reminder3 (On/Off):

Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)

Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6

Muted max. volume3 (On/Off):

Setting at first use: On

Adaptive cruise control*: Setting at first use: Longest intervals

See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for more information

Driver support functions The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key:

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section "Blind Spot Information"

Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec- tion "Lane assistance"

Distance warning* - see section "Distance warning"

City Safety - see section "City Safety"

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section "Driver Alert Control"

Road Sign Information* - see section "Road Sign Information".

3 Option, only available with Red Key.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.240

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

City Safety (p. 330)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Driver Alert Control (p. 352)

Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Driver profiles (p. 174)

Antenna locations for the start and lock system The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock

system4 and therefore has a number of built-in antennas positioned at different locations in the car.

Antenna locations.

Under the cup holder in the front section of the tunnel console

In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door5

In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door5

In the cargo area

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless sys- tem's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pace- maker and the keyless system.

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Remote control key range (p. 238)

4 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*). 5 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 241

Locking/unlocking from the outside The car is locked/unlocked from the outside using buttons on the remote control key or with the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip- ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power operation* and/or foot movement*.

Locking/unlocking

The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously.

Locking The driver's door must be closed in order for the lock sequence to be activated. If any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not locked and their alarms armed* until they are closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key/Key Tag in the car.

A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Unlocking If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade. See the section "Detachable key blade" for more information.

NOTE

Always try moving closer to the car and mak- ing another unlock attempt.

Settings for remote-controlled unlocking It is possible to select different sequences for unlocking.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock.

3. Select option:

Unlock All Doors

- unlocks all doors simultaneously.

Single Door

- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key's unlock button.

The settings made for the Remote and Interior Unlock function also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside. For more infor- mation about how unlocking from the inside is affected, see the section "Locking/unlocking from the inside".

Keyless locking/unlocking* If the car is equipped with keyless locking/ unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con- trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag, making it more convenient to open the car if your hands are full. For information on the system's range, see the section "Remote control key range".

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.242

Touch-sensitive surfaces The outside of the door handles contains a recess for locking, while the inside contains a touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. The tail- gate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that is only used for unlocking.

Touch-sensitive recess for locking

Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking

NOTE

It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping the handle while touching the lock surface risks giving double commands. This means that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay.

Rubberised pressure plate on the boot lid used for unlocking only.

Keyless locking All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be open when locking the car with a side door han- dle.

Touch the marked surface towards the rear on the outside of a door handle after the door has been closed, or press the lock but- ton on the bottom edge of the tailgate before closing it.

> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts to flash to indicate the car is locked.

To close all side windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the touch- sensitive recess on the outside of the door han- dle until all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed.

Keyless entry Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised

pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car.

> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin- guishes to confirm the car is unlocked - open the doors or tailgate as usual.

Settings for Keyless entry It is possible to select different sequences for Keyless entry.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless Unlock

3. Select option:

All Doors

- unlocks all doors simultaneously.

Single Door

- unlocks selected door.

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally.

Unlocking with Volvo On Call It is possible to remotely unlock the car with the Volvo On Call* app.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 243

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)

Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)

Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move- ment* (p. 256)

Remote control key range (p. 238)

Detachable key blade (p. 250)

Alarm* (p. 262)

Indication on locking/unlocking the car When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key, the direction indicators con- firm that locking/unlocking was correctly per- formed.

It is possible to separately adapt the indication for locking/unlocking, see the heading "Select how the car confirms locking and unlocking".

Exterior indication Locking

The car's hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors6.

Unlocking

The car's hazard warning flashers indicate unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors6.

All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to indicate the car is locked.

If locking is performed with only the driver's door closed7, the car will be locked but indication will only occur after all doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed.

Lock and alarm indicator

The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel show the status of the alarm system.

Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul- sating flashes.

6 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. 7 Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.244

Indication in lock buttons

Front doors

Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin- guish in both doors.

In all doors*

Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate.

Select how the car confirms locking and unlocking

Different options for indicating locking/unlocking can be set via the centre display.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking Visible Locking Feedback.

3. Select setting for audible and visible response.

Read more about indication of locking/unlocking in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the door mirrors".

Related information Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)

Approach light duration (p. 148)

Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 153)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 245

Locking/unlocking from the inside The doors and tailgate can be locked and unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on the rear doors each lock their own rear door.

Central locking

Locking/unlocking button with indicator lamp in the front door.

Press the button to lock and the but- ton to unlock.

Unlocking Press the button to unlock all side doors

and the tailgate.

A long press on the button opens all the side windows simultaneously - also called global opening8.

Alternative unlocking method

Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front door.

Pull the opening handle on one of the front doors and release.

> If the Unlock All Doors option is selected for the Remote and Interior Unlock function for the remote control key, all doors will be unlocked. If the Single Door option is selected, only the individual front door will be unlocked and opened.

For more information about Remote and Interior Unlock, see the section "Locking/ unlocking from the outside".

Locking Press the button - both front doors must

be closed.

> All doors and the tailgate are locked.

A long press on the button closes all side windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.

Lock button* rear doors

Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.

The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec- tive rear door.

To unlock the rear door:

Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks and opens.

8 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.246

Settings for automatic locking The doors and tailgate can be locked automati- cally when the car starts to move.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking.

3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving.

Related information Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)

Indication on locking/unlocking the car (p. 243)

Deadlocks* Deadlocks means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from the inside.

Deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*. Deadlocks are activated with a delay of about 10 seconds after the doors have locked.

NOTE

If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.

The car can only be unlocked with the remote control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On Call* app when deadlocks are activated.

The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with the detachable key blade, the alarm* will be trig- gered. See the section "Alarm" for switching off the alarm.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Switching off deadlocks temporarily If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then deadlocks can be temporarily switched off with the Reduced guard function.

Tap on the Reduced guard button in the centre display's function view.

Reducing the alarm level can also be selected via the centre display's top view.

Tap on Settings My Car Locking and select Reduced Guard.

After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen- tre display and deadlocks are temporarily deacti- vated in the subsequent locking of the car.

In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are deactivated immediately, but when deadlocks are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.

If the car is unlocked and then locked again, deadlocks must be temporarily deactivated again. Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detec- tors* are switched off at the same time.

The system is reset the next time the engine is started.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 247

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)

Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)

Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 251)

Alarm* (p. 262)

Locking/unlocking the tailgate The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and opened in different ways depending on the equipment level of the car.

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key

The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail-

gate unlocked by using the remote control key's button.

There are two different ways to unlock the tail- gate

1. Press the remote control key's button.

> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru- ment panel extinguishes in order to show that the alarm is not armed for the whole of the car.

The alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed.

To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres- sure plate beneath the tailgate handle and open the tailgate.

If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

2. With the power operated tailgate* option

Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the

remote control key's button

> The tailgate is unlocked and opened, while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.248

Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*

Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. You simply need to have the remote control key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag.

1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail- gate handle.

> The lock is released.

NOTE

If the remote key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will not work. See the section "Remote key range" for more information.

2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

IMPORTANT

Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub- berised panel.

Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rub- ber panel.

WARNING

Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car

To unlock the tailgate:

1. Brief press on the button on the instru- ment panel.

> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened from the outside by grasping the rubber- ised pressure plate.

2. Plus with the power operated tailgate option

Long press on the button on the instru- ment panel.

> The tailgate opens.

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key's button.

> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru- ment panel starts to flash - the car is locked and the alarm* is armed.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 249

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)

Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move- ment* (p. 256)

Using private locking The tailgate can be locked with the private lock- ing function when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.

NOTE

The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a minimum for the private locking function to be activated.

Function button for private locking. Depending on the cur- rent status of the lock, Private locking unlocked or Private locking locked is shown.

Enter the security code before using for the first time A security code needs to be selected during the first time the function is used. It can then be used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been lost or forgotten. The security code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function.

Save the security code in a safe place.

1. The security code can be activated from the function view or the top view in the centre display.

Tap on the Private Locking button in the function view.

Or:

Tap on Settings in the top view. Tap on

My Car Locking and select Private Locking.

> A pop-up window is shown.

2. Enter the desired security code.

> The security code is saved. The private locking function is now ready to be acti- vated.

If the system has been reset then the above pro- cedure needs to be repeated.

Activate private locking 1. The function can be activated from the func-

tion view or the top view in the centre display.

Tap on the Private Locking button in the function view.

Or:

Tap on Settings in the top view. Tap on

My Car Locking and select Private Locking.

> A pop-up window is shown.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.250

2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm.

> The tailgate is locked. Locking is con- firmed by a green indication at the button in the function view and the private lock- ing box being ticked in the settings view.

Deactivate private locking 1. The function can be deactivated from the

function view or the top view in the centre display.

Tap on the Private Locking button in the function view.

Or:

Tap on Settings in the top view. Tap on

My Car Locking and select Private Locking.

> A pop-up window is shown.

2. Enter the code that was used for locking and tap on Confirm.

> The tailgate is unlocked. Unlocking is con- firmed by the green indication at the but- ton in the function view disappearing and the tick disappearing from the private locking box in the settings view.

NOTE

If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if the wrong PIN code has been entered more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate the private locking.

NOTE

Is private locking is activated and the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On Call* app, private locking will be deactivated automatically.

Related information Using the glovebox (p. 225)

Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)

Detachable key blade The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which a number of func- tions can be activated and some operations car- ried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom- mended when ordering new key blades.

The key blade's application areas Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the left-hand9 front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be acti- vated with the remote control key.

all doors are emergency locked - see the section "Locking/unlocking with detachable key blade".

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated - see the sec- tion "Child safety locks".

The button-less key10 (Key Tag) does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key.

9 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. 10 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

251

Detaching the key blade

Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Guide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Detach the key blade by angling it up.

Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use.

Refit the shell by pressing it downward until a clicking sound is heard.

Then slide the shell back sedan.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.

Related information Locking/unlocking with the detachable key

blade (p. 251)

Child safety locks (p. 261)

Remote control key (p. 236)

Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade Amongst other things, the detachable key blade can be used to unlock the car from the outside - e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged.

Unlocking

Pull out the front door handle on the left- hand side11 to its end position so that the lock cylinder become visible.

Insert the key in the lock cylinder.

Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back.

Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylin- der and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again.

11 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.252

5. Pull out the handle.

> The door opens.

Locking will be performed in the same way, but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of clockwise in step (3).

Switching off the alarm*

NOTE

When the door is unlocked using the key blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig- gered.

The backup reader's location in the cup holder.

Deactivate the alarm as follows:

1. Place the remote control key in the backup reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the tunnel console.

2. Then turn the start knob to START and release it.

> The control automatically returns to its starting position - the alarm signal stops and the alarm switches off.

Locking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the event of a loss of power or if the key's battery has become discharged.

The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.

Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent them being opened from outside.

The doors can still be opened from the inside.

Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the child safety locks.

Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.

The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key or with the cen- tral locking button on the driver's door.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 253

NOTE

A door's lock reset only locks that partic- ular door - not all doors simultaneously.

A manually locked rear door with acti- vated manual or electric child safety locks cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking but- ton.

Related information Detachable key blade (p. 250)

Power operated tailgate* The car's tailgate can be opened/closed electri- cally.

Opening/closing via a foot movement is also available as an extended option - see the section "Opening/closing the power operated tailgate with foot movement" for more information.

Opening The tailgate can be opened with its handle, with foot movement*, a button on the instrument panel or the remote control key.

Opening/closing button on the instrument panel.

Choose one of the following options to open the tailgate:

Light press on the tailgate handle.

Long press on the instrument panel's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Long press on the remote control key's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Closing The tailgate can be closed via the instrument panel's button, with foot movement*, with the remote control key or the buttons12 along the bottom edge of the tailgate.

Choose one of the following options to close the tailgate.

Long press on the instrument panel's

button or the remote control key's but- ton.

> The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked.

12 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.254

Button for closing and locking on the underside of the tailgate.

Press the button12 on the underside of the tailgate to close.

> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- gate remains unlocked.

NOTE

The button is active 24 hours after the hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it must be closed manually.

Press the button12 on the underside of the tailgate to close it and simultaneously lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be closed for locking).

> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- gate and doors are locked, and the alarm* is armed.

NOTE

If the remote key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will not work. See the section "Remote key range" for more information.

NOTE

When using key-free* blocking/closing, three signals will sound if the key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec- tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and remote keys" for more information.

IMPORTANT

During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be dam- aged and stop working correctly.

Cancel opening/closing There are five ways to cancel opening/clos-

ing:

Press the button on the instrument panel.

Press the remote control key's button.

Press the close button12 along the bottom edge of the tailgate.

Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle.

Using the foot movement* (see section "Opening/closing power operated tailgate with foot movement" for more informa- tion).

> Tailgate movement will be interrupted and the tailgate will stop and can then be manoeuvred manually.

Programmable max. opening The maximum opening position of the tailgate can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in a garage.

To adjust max. opening:

1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi- tion.

12 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 255

2. Press the button on the underside of the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.

> Two short acoustic signals sound to indi- cate that the set position has been saved.

To reset max. opening:

Manually move the tailgate to its highest

possible position - press the button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.

> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been cleared. The tailgate will then assume its max. position when opened.

NOTE

If the system has been operating continu- ously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes.

Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch protection is activated.

During opening - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds.

During closing - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position.

WARNING

Observe the risk of trapping when opening/ closing. Before starting opening/closing, check that there is nobody near to the tailgate as trapping may have serious consequences.

Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Pre-tensioned springs

The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail- gate.

WARNING

Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten- sioned with high pressure and can cause injury if opened.

Related information Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-

ment* (p. 256)

Remote control key range (p. 238)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.256

Opening/closing the tailgate with foot movement* To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when your hands are occupied, it can be opened/ closed by means of a forward kicking motion under the rear bumper.

The sensor is positioned to the left of centre in the bumper13.

One of the car's remote control keys must be within range14 behind the car in order for open- ing/closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash.

Operation

Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.

Opening/closing

NOTE

The foot-operated tailgate function is availa- ble in two versions:

Opening and closing with foot movement

Only unlocking with foot movement (lift up the tailgate manually to open it)

Note that the function for opening and clos- ing with foot movement requires the "Power operated tailgate"* option.

Make one slow, forward kicking motion under the left part of the rear bumper. Then take a step back. The bumper must not be touched.

> A short acoustic signal sounds when opening/closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed.

If the tailgate is on open position then it is always closed on activation via foot move- ment.

The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument panel's button, the remote control key or the but- ton(s)15 under the tailgate. For more information, see the section "Power operated tailgate".

If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay.

Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause acti- vation to fail.

Cancel opening/closing Make one slow forward kicking motion when

opening/closing is in progress in order to stop the movement of the tailgate.

The remote control key does not have to be in the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing.

13 If the car is equipped with skid plate/diffuser* then the detector is positioned out towards the left-hand corner of the bumper. 14 See the section "Remote control key range" for more information. 15 Only applies to a car equipped with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry)*.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 257

NOTE

There is a risk of reduced function, or no function, if the rear bumper is loaded with large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For this reason, make sure you keep it clean.

NOTE

Pay attention to the possibility that the sys- tem may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range.

Related information Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)

Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)

Remote control key range (p. 238)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged.

NOTE

All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- ies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used.

The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if:

the information symbol illuminates and the message Car key battery low See Owner's manual is shown in the driver display

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

NOTE

Always try moving closer to the car and mak- ing another unlock attempt.

The battery in the button-less key16 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.

IMPORTANT

A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start.

16 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

258

Opening and changing

Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- tery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text.

Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.

Then prize the battery cover upwards.

The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their con- tact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

259

Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- tery contacts with your fingers.

Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches.

Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.

NOTE

Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.

Reposition the rear side's shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard.

Then slide the shell back sedan.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.260

Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard.

Then slide the shell back sedan.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car.

The car can only be started with the correct remote control key.

The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser:

Symbol Message Specification

Car key not found

See Owner's manual

Error reading the remote control key during starting - place the key in the cup holder near the key symbol and try again.

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system17

The car is fitted with a system which makes it possible to track and locate the car and to remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.

The following error message in the driver display is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system:

Symbol Message Specification

Remotely immobilised

Car not pos- sible to start

The remote-con- trolled immobiliser with tracking sys- tem is activated. The car cannot be started. Contact Volvo On Call Service Centre.

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

Remote control key range (p. 238)

17 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 261

Child safety locks The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside. There is an electric* and a manual lock.

Electric activation/deactivation* The electric child safety locks can be activated/ deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition position" for more information.

Button for electric activation/deactivation.

1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- tion higher than 0.

2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.

> The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Activated and the but- ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.

When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

To deactivate the locks:

Press the button in the driver's door control panel.

> The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Deactivated and the button's lamp goes out - the locks are deactivated.

The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are acti- vated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.

Symbol Message Specification

Rear child lock Acti- vated

Child safety locks are acti- vated.

Rear child lock Deacti- vated

Child safety locks are deacti- vated.

Manual activation/deactivation

Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man- ual door locks.

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob. For more information, see the section "Detachable key blade".

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.262

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

NOTE

A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.

Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.

Related information Detachable key blade (p. 250)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Alarm* The alarm alerts e.g. in the event of a break-in in the car.

When armed, the alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened18

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the starter battery's cable is disconnected or

the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, the driver display shows the symbol and the message Alarm system failure Service required. In which

case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insur- ance.

NOTE

The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.

To avoid this: Close the window/panoramic roof when leaving the car. If the car's inte- grated parking heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards into the passenger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used - see the section further down in this article.

Arming the alarm Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:

press the remote control key's lock button

touch in the marked area on the outside of the door handle19 or

push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate19.

If the car is equipped with a power-operated tail- gate, the button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm the car alarm.

18 Applies to certain markets. 19 Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 263

Deactivate the alarm Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:

press the remote control key's unlock button

grip one of the door handles19 or

push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate19.

Switching off a triggered alarm Press the remote control key's unlock button

or set the car in ignition position I by turning the ignition dial to START and then releas- ing.

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

Alarm signals When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens:

A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times20.

Lock and alarm indicator

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit alarm not armed.

The LED flashes once every other second alarm is armed.

After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED flashes rapidly for up to 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been selected by turn- ing the ignition dial to START and releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.

Reduced alarm level Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.

Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans- port on a car train or car ferry. The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of the deadlocks function.

Press the Reduced guard button in the centre display's function view in order to switch off the movement and tilt detectors temporarily.

For more information, see the section "Dead- locks".

Related information Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*

(p. 264)

Disarming the alarm* without working remote control key (p. 264)

Deadlocks* (p. 246)

19 Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) 20 Applies to certain markets.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.264

Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm* Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintention- ally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto- matically after a certain delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked.

Related information Alarm* (p. 262)

Disarming the alarm* without working remote control key (p. 264)

Disarming the alarm* without working remote control key The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead.

1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade.

> The alarm is triggered.

The backup reader's location in the cup holder.

2. Place the remote control key in the backup reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.

3. Turn the ignition dial to START and release.

> The alarm is deactivated.

Related information Alarm* (p. 262)

Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm* (p. 264)

Detachable key blade (p. 250)

Starting the car (p. 386)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 265

Type approval for the remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key system can be read in the table.

Lock system keyless start (Passive Start) and keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*)

CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval number, see the table below.

Country/Area Type approval

Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250

Serbia P1614120100

Argentina CNC ID: C-14771

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

266

Country/Area Type approval

Brazil MT-3245/2015

Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015

Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)

Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396

Russia

The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15

DA0062437/11

For more information about type approval for the remote control key system, see support.volvocars.com.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

267

Remote control key

Country/Area Type approval

Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numro dagrment: MR 10668 ANRT 2015

Date dagrment: 24/07/2015

Mexico IFETEL

Marca: HUF

Modelo (s): HUF8423

NOM-121-SCT1-2009

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

Oman

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

268

Country/Area Type approval

Serbia

The United Arab Emi- rates

Key Tag

Country/Area Type approval

Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numro dagrment: MR 10667 ANRT 2015

Date dagrment: 24/07/2015

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

269

Country/Area Type approval

Mexico IFETEL

Marca: HUF

Modelo (s): HUF8432

NOM-121-SCT1-2009

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

Oman

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

270

Country/Area Type approval

Serbia

The United Arab Emi- rates

Related information Remote control key (p. 236)

DRIVER SUPPORT

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.272

Speed-dependent steering force Speed related power steering causes the steer- ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ity.

On motorways the steering feels firmer. When parking and at low speed steering is light and requires only a slight effort.

NOTE

In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be tempo- rarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be per- ceived to be slightly heavier.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- ing assistance, the driver display shows a message.

Change the steering force level* To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive modes" section and see the description at the alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading "Selectable drive modes".

For the car models without a drive mode control with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of steering force is instead made via the centre dis- play's top view and the following search path:

Settings My Car Drive Modes Steering force

Selection of steering force is not accessible while turning is in progress.

Related information Drive modes* (p. 400)

Roll Stability Control Roll Stability Control (RSC) is a stabiliser sys- tem that minimises the risk of overturning, for example during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.

The RSC system registers if and how much the car's lateral inclination changes. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn- ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con- trol system engages, the engine torque is reduced and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability.

WARNING

Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys- tem improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving.

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 273)

Safety (p. 56)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 273

Electronic stability control Electronic stability control (Electronic Stability Control ESC) helps the driver to avoid skid- ding and improves the cars traction.

The activation of the ESC sys- tem during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accel- erator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

The stability system ESC is supplementary assistance - it cannot handle all situations in all road conditions.

The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

The ESC system consists of the following func- tions:

Active Yaw Control

Spin Control

Traction control system

Engine Drag Control

Trailer stability assist

Active Yaw Control The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceler- ation.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.

Engine Drag Control Engine Drag Control (Engine Drag Control EDC) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driv- ing in low gear on slippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.

Trailer stability assist*1

The function of trailer stability assist (Trailer Stability Assist - TSA) is to stabilise a car with attached trailer in situations where snaking occurs. For more information, see the Driving with a trailer section.

NOTE

The TSA function is deactivated if sport mode is activated.

Related information Sport mode for electronic stability control

(p. 274)

Symbols and messages for electronic stabil- ity control (p. 275)

Roll Stability Control (p. 272)

Driving with a trailer (p. 429)

1 Trailer stability assist is included when installing the Volvo genuine towbar.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.274

Sport mode for electronic stability control Electronic stability control (Electronic Stability Control ESC) helps the driver to avoid skid- ding and improves the cars traction.

The ESC system is always activated it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select Sport mode, which allows for a more active driv- ing experience.

In Sport mode the ESC system detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows a certain degree of con- trolled skidding with the rear section before ESC intervenes and stabilises the car.

For example, if the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal, the ESC sys- tem intervenes and stabilises the car.

Sport mode also provides maximum traction if the car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as sand or deep snow.

Select/deselect Sport mode The Sport mode is activated/ deactivated in the centre dis- play's function view.

Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in function view.

> Sport mode is activated/deactivated, a green/grey indicator is displayed in the button.

The driver display indicates Sport mode by displaying this symbol with a con- stant glow until the function is deacti- vated or the engine is switched off. The

next time the engine is started, the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.

Limitations for Sport mode The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when one of the functions from speed limiter, cruise control or adaptive cruise control is activated.

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 273)

Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Cruise control (p. 284)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

275

Symbols and messages for electronic stability control A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (Electronic Stability

Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis- play.

The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Specification

Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode it is partly reduced.

ESC

Temporarily off

ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva- ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC

Service required

ESC system disengaged.

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

276

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 273)

Sport mode for electronic stability control (p. 274)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 277

Speed limiter* A speed limiter (Speed Limiter SL) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented by the speed limiter from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/preset maximum speed.

Overview

Buttons and symbols for functions2.

Increase the stored maximum speed or reac- tivate the speed limiter and resume the stored maximum speed

Activate the speed limiter and store the cur- rent speed, or deactivate the speed limiter

Reduces stored maximum speed

Marker for stored max speed

The car's current speed

Stored maximum speed

WARNING

The Speed Limiter is an aid and cannot deal with all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The driver must always pay attention to traffic conditions and take action when the Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suitable speed.

The driver always has the ultimate responsibil- ity for the car being driven safely and in accordance with applicable traffic rules and regulations, even when the Speed Limiter function is in use.

Limitations On steep downhill gradients the speed limiters braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed limit exceeded in the driver display.

NOTE

A text message that the maximum speed is exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph).

Related information Activating and starting the speed limiter

(p. 278)

Managing speed for the speed limiter (p. 278)

Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter (p. 279)

Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)

Automatic speed limiter* (p. 281)

2 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.278

Activating and starting the speed limiter The speed limiter function (Speed Limiter - SL) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.

Activate the speed limiter

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-

bol/function (4).

> The symbol is shown and the speed lim- iter can then be activated.

Start the speed limiter The lowest maximum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).

With the symbol/function displayed,

press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limiter starts and the current speed is stored as the maximum speed.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Managing speed for the speed limiter (p. 278)

Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter (p. 279)

Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)

Managing speed for the speed limiter The speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL) can be set to different speeds.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Change the stored maximum speed with short or long presses on the steering wheel

button (1) or - (3):

Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) with each press.

Hold the button depressed to adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release when the driver display's marking (4)/(6) is at the desired speed.

> The speed set after the last press is stored in the memory.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 279

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Activating and starting the speed limiter (p. 278)

Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter (p. 279)

Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)

Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter The speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limit markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now temporarily deactivated and the driver can exceed the maximum speed setting.

Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The driver display's speed limit markings change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car's speed is then limited again by the last stored maximum speed.

or

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limiter indicators and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE the car will now apply its current speed as the maximum speed.

Temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be temporarily overrid- den with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter being set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. In which case, proceed as follows:

1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and release it so that acceleration is interrupted when the desired speed has been reached.

> In this case, the speed limiter is still acti- vated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE.

2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is finished.

> The car is then braked automatically below the last stored maximum speed.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.280

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Activating and starting the speed limiter (p. 278)

Managing speed for the speed limiter (p. 278)

Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)

Switching off the speed limiter The speed limiter Speed Limiter SL can be deactivated.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

1. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.

2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function.

> The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off - which deletes the set/stored maximum speed.

3. Press the steering wheel button (2) again.

> Another function is activated.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Activating and starting the speed limiter (p. 278)

Managing speed for the speed limiter (p. 278)

Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter (p. 279)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 281

Automatic speed limiter* The automatic speed limiter (Automatic Speed Limiter - ASL) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs.

The speed limiter function (Speed Limiter SL) can be changed to automatic speed limiter.

The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa- tion from the Road Sign Information3 function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.

WARNING

The automatic speed limiter function is an aid, and does not work in all driving situations, traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, as well as when the automatic speed limiter is being used.

Even if the driver clearly sees the speed-rela- ted road sign, the speed from the Road sign information function many be incorrect - in such cases the driver must intervene him/ herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed.

See also the heading "Limitations for Road sign information".

Is SL or ASL active? Symbols in the driver display show which speed limiter function is active:

Symbol SL ASL

A

Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is acti- vated.

A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode. B See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-

ing of the symbol's colour.

The ASL symbol The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the centre of the speedometer) can be shown in three colours with the following mean-

ings:

Colour of sign

symbol

Meaning

Greenish yellow ASL is active

Grey ASL has been set in standby mode

Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby modeA

A For example, scanning of a sign failed.

Limitations of ASL Automatic speed limitation takes place using speed information from the RSI3 function - not from the speed limit road signs that the car passes.

If RSI3 cannot interpret and provide speed infor- mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed.

The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI3 func- tion can once again interpret and provide speed information to the ASL.

See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign Information".

3 Road Sign Information RSI

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.282

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Activating/deactivating the automatic speed limiter (p. 282)

Changing the tolerance for the Automatic speed limiter (p. 283)

Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 352)

Activating/deactivating the automatic speed limiter The automatic speed limiter function (Automatic Speed Limiter - ASL) can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL).

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Activating the automatic speed limiter 1. Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in

function view.

> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi- cator appears on the button, and the driver display shows a sign symbol in the centre of the speedometer.

2. Press the steering wheel button .

> ASL is activated with the cars current speed.

Deactivating the automatic speed limiter Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in

function view.

> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi- cation becomes GREY - SL is activated instead.

WARNING

After switching from ASL to SL the car will no longer follow the signed speed limit but only the maximum speed stored in memory.

Related information Automatic speed limiter* (p. 281)

Changing the tolerance for the Automatic speed limiter (p. 283)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 283

Changing the tolerance for the Automatic speed limiter The speed limiter function (Automatic Speed Limiter - ASL) can be set for different tolerance levels.

It is possible to increase/decrease the signed speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 70 km/h (43 mph) the driver can instead choose to allow the car to maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).

Buttons and symbols for functions.

Press the steering wheel button (1) until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h (47 mph).

> After which, the car uses the selected tol- erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).

The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed - then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory.

If the Road Sign Information* function is activated, the signed speed limit will then be shown with a RED indicator on the speedometer.

The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the speed setting is in the speed limiter.

NOTE

The maximum selectable tolerance is +/- 10 km/h (5 mph).

Related information Automatic speed limiter* (p. 281)

Activating/deactivating the automatic speed limiter (p. 282)

Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Managing speed for the speed limiter (p. 278)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.284

Cruise control The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.

Overview

Buttons and symbols for functions.

Increase the stored speed or reactivate the Cruise control and resume the stored speed

Activate the Cruise control and store the cur- rent speed, or deactivate the Cruise control

Reduces stored speed

Marker for stored speed

The car's current speed

Stored speed

In cars equipped with the adaptive cruise control option, the driver can change between CC and ACC - see "Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control".

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Activating and starting the Cruise control

(p. 284)

Managing speed for the Cruise control (p. 285)

Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control (p. 286)

Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)

Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 301)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Activating and starting the Cruise control Cruise control function (Cruise Control - CC) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Active Cruise Control Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-

bol/function (4).

> The symbol is shown and the cruise con- trol can then be activated.

Start Cruise Control In order to start the Cruise control from the standby mode, the car's current speed must be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

285

With the symbol/function displayed,

press the steering wheel button (2).

> Cruise Control starts and the current speed becomes the stored speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).

Related information Cruise control (p. 284)

Managing speed for the Cruise control (p. 285)

Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control (p. 286)

Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)

Managing speed for the Cruise control The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be set to different speeds.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Change the stored speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or - (3):

Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) with each press.

Hold the button depressed to adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release when the driver display's marking (4)/(6) is at the desired speed.

> The speed set after the last press is stored in the memory.

If the driver increases the cars speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

wheel button , the speed stored will be the cars speed when the button is depressed, provi- ded the drivers foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Using engine braking instead of the foot brake With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler- ation by engine braking. In this case the driver can temporarily disable foot brake application by Cruise Control.

Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release.

> Cruise Control will disengage its auto- matic foot braking and then uses engine braking only.

Related information Cruise control (p. 284)

Activating and starting the Cruise control (p. 284)

DRIVER SUPPORT

286

Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control (p. 286)

Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)

Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Deactivate Cruise Control and set in standby mode Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limit markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY Cruise Control is now temporarily deactivated and the driver can temporarily exceed the set speed.

Standby mode on driver intervention The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the gear selector is moved to N position

the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer than 1 minute

the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

wheels lose traction

engine speed is too low/high

brake temperature is too high

speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).

The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself.

Reactivating cruise control from standby mode

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 287

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again.

or

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE the car will now follow the current speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by pressing steer-

ing wheel button .

Related information Cruise control (p. 284)

Activating and starting the Cruise control (p. 284)

Managing speed for the Cruise control (p. 285)

Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)

Deactivating Cruise Control Cruise control Cruise Control CC can be deactivated.

Buttons and symbols for functions.

1. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Cruise control is set in standby mode.

2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function.

> The driver display's symbol and indicator for Cruise control (4) are switched off - which deletes the set/stored speed.

3. Press the steering wheel button (2) again.

> Another function is activated.

In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* it is possible to change between both cruise control

functions - see the heading "Change between CC and ACC".

Related information Cruise control (p. 284)

Activating and starting the Cruise control (p. 284)

Managing speed for the Cruise control (p. 285)

Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control (p. 286)

Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 301)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.288

Distance Warning* The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead becomes too short.

Distance warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING

Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.

Head-up display*

Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen4.

In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol is shown on the windscreen for as long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value. However, this presupposes that the Show Driver Support function is activated via settings in the car's menu system; see the heading "Head-up display" for how this works.

NOTE

Information on the windscreen may be diffi- cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- ing sunglasses.

Related information Activating and setting the time interval for

Distance warning* (p. 289)

Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 290)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

4 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 289

Activating and setting the time interval for Distance warning* The Distance warning (Distance Alert) function can be activated/deactivated and a time interval can be set.

Activating/deactivating Distance warning

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Tap on the Distance Alert button in func- tion view.

> Distance warning is activated/deactivated, a green/grey indicator is displayed in the button.

Setting the time interval for Distance warning

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle

in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

The same symbol is also shown when the adap- tive cruise control function is activated.

Control for time interval.

Decrease time interval

Increase time interval

Distance indicator

Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- rent time interval.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

The set time interval is also used by the Adaptive Cruise Control function.

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 290)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.290

Limitations of Distance Warning* The Distance warning (Distance Alert) function may have limitations in certain situations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun- glasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar unit's capacity to detect vehicles in front.

The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limita- tions for radar unit" section.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Activating and setting the time interval for Distance warning* (p. 289)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

Adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax- ing driving experience on long journeys on motor- ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf- fic flows.

The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead5.

The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

291

is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.

WARNING

The Adaptive cruise control is an aid, which cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The driver must always be observant with regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and intervene if the Adaptive cruise control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable time interval.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before the function is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct time interval and speed - even when the Adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.

Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies in case of large speed differ-

ences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed.

The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox:

Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

The following applies for cars with manual gear- box:

The Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid- ance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the Adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- ponents must only be performed at a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

292

Overview

Controls

Buttons and symbols for functions5.

Increases stored speed or reactivates the adaptive cruise control and resumes stored speed and time interval

Activate the adaptive cruise control and store the current speed or deactivate the adaptive cruise control

Reduces stored speed

Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead

Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead

Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected and is following a target vehicle at the preset time interval

Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead

In cars equipped with the adaptive cruise control option, the driver can change between CC and ACC - see "Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control".

Driver display

Indication of speeds5.

Stored speed

Speed of vehicle ahead.

Current speed of your car.

To see different combinations of symbols depending on traffic situation - see the heading

"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control".

Collision risk warning

Audio and symbol for collision warning5

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision

Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- sion

Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit

Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise control is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 293

activated to alert the driver that immediate inter- vention is required.

WARNING

The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which its radar unit has detected - hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Head-up display*

Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen5.

In cars equipped with a head-up display, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol.

NOTE

Information on the windscreen may be diffi- cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- ing sunglasses.

Related information Activating and starting the adaptive cruise

control* (p. 294)

Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)

Setting the time interval for the adaptive cruise control* (p. 296)

Change of target and automatic braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 299)

Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 301)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Deactivating/activating the adaptive cruise control* (p. 297)

Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)

Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control* (p. 302)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.294

Activating and starting the adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) must first be activated and then started if it is to control the speed and distance.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Activate Adaptive Cruise Control Immediately after the engine is started the Adap- tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode.

Press (2) or (3) to browse to the sym-

bol/function (4).

> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode.

Start Adaptive Cruise Control In order to start the ACC the following require- ments apply:

The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed.

There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).

For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).

With the symbol/function displayed -

press the steering wheel button (1).

> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur- rent speed is stored, which is shown in figures in the centre of the speedometer.

The time interval is only adjusted to the vehicle ahead by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two vehicles.

At the same time a speed range is marked.

The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehi- cle ahead (target vehicle).

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 295

Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control -ACC) can be set to different speeds.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Change the stored speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or - (3):

Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) with each press.

Hold the button depressed to adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release when the driver display's marking (4) is at the desired speed.

> The speed set after the last press is stored in the memory.

If the driver increases the cars speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

wheel button , the speed stored will be the cars speed when the button is depressed, provi- ded the drivers foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic gearbox Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.

Maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Manual gearbox The Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

The lowest programmable speed for the Adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi- mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.296

Setting the time interval for the adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control -ACC) can be set to different time inter- vals.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle

in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

The same symbol is also shown when the Dis- tance Warning function is activated.

NOTE

When the symbol in the driver display shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval.

When only one car is shown, there is no vehi- cle within a reasonable distance ahead.

Control for time interval.

Decrease time interval

Increase time interval

Distance indicator

Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- rent time interval.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- val to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con- trol increases the time interval slightly.

Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen problem should arise.

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If the adaptive cruise control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the vehicle in front is pre- venting an increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 297

Deactivating/activating the adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can later be reactivated.

Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The symbol on the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.

In standby mode, the driver must him/herself control both speed and distance.

When the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode and the car drives too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned about the short dis- tance by the Distance Warning function instead (see reference to the heading "Distance Warn- ing" at the end of this section).

Standby mode on driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti- vated and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the gear selector is moved to N position.

the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.

In this situation, the driver must intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC. If any of these systems stops working, adaptive cruise control is switched off automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and a message is shown in the driver dis- play. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

Automatic deactivation may occur if:

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump.

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow.

speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off the seatbelt

engine speed is too low/high

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

the parking brake is applied

the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked).

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.298

Reactivating adaptive cruise control from standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To reactivate ACC from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by pressing steer-

ing wheel button .

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* Adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) or Pilot Assist can assist the driver when overtaking other vehicles.

When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to

overtake by activating the direction indicator6, adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist helps by accelerating the car towards the vehicle ahead before the car reaches the overtaking lane.

The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the drivers car is approaching a slower vehicle.

The function remains active until the drivers vehi- cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.

WARNING

Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during overtak- ing, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.

Starting Overtaking Assistance The following conditions must exist for Overtak- ing Assistance to be activated:

there must be a vehicle in front (the target vehicle)

the speed must be at least 70 km/h (43 mph)

the stored speed for ACC or Pilot Assist must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 299

Activate the direction indicator.

Use the left direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the left, or the right direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the right.

> Overtaking assistance is started.

Limitations When using Overtaking Assistance the driver should be prepared for sudden changes in condi- tions. In some conditions Overtaking Assistance can cause unwanted acceleration.

Some situations should be avoided for this rea- son. Examples of such situations are:

the car is approaching an exit road in order to turn off in the same direction that is nor- mally used for overtaking

the vehicle in front slows before your car has entered the overtaking lane

traffic in the overtaking lane is slowing

a car designed for right-hand traffic is being driven in a country with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).

Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo- rarily setting ACC or Pilot Assist in standby mode.

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Change of target and automatic braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control In combination with automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC ) has functionality for change of target and braking at certain speeds.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov- ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.

The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehi- cle or some other object, such as a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap- tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Automatic braking For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati- cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in

6 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.300

front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking.

The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in one of the following ways:

Press the steering wheel button .

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol- lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov- ing forward within 6 seconds.

NOTE

ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi- mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

The parking brake must be released before the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.

Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.

This may take place in the following situations:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the parking brake is applied

the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- tion

the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in the standby mode.

Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations the parking brake is applied to keep the car stationary.

This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:

the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

ACC has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes

the brakes have overheated

the engine is switched off.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* The (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) may have limitations in certain situations.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use the adaptive cruise control with a heavy load or with a trailer connected to the car.

Miscellaneous Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected

when the adaptive cruise control is activated.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limita- tions for radar unit" section.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 301

Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control* In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the driver can change between Cruise Control (CC) and ACC.

A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise control is active:

CC

Cruise Control

ACC

Adaptive Cruise Control

A A

Cruise control Adaptive cruise control

A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode

Changing from ACC to CC How to change from Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to Cruise Control (CC):

1. Set adaptive cruise control in standby mode

using the steering wheel button.

2. Tap on the Cruise control button in the function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.

> The symbol in the driver display changes

from ACC to CC. Adap- tive Cruise Control (ACC) is now switched off and Cruise Control (CC) is set in standby mode.

3. Press the steering wheel button .

> Cruise control starts and stores the cur- rent speed.

WARNING

The car no longer maintains the preset time interval after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

If CC is active when the engine is switched off, ACC will be activated the next time the engine is started.

Changing from CC to ACC Proceed as follows to change from cruise control (CC) to adaptive cruise control (ACC):

1. Set cruise control in standby mode using the

steering wheel button.

2. Tap on the Cruise control button in the function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREEN to GREY.

> The symbol in the driver display changes

from CC to ACC. Adap- tive Cruise Control is set in standby mode.

3. Press the steering wheel button .

> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores the current speed, together with the pre- set time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Related information Cruise control (p. 284)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.302

Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control* A number of symbols and messages regarding the adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) can be shown via the driver dis- play and/or the head-up display*.

Here are some examples7.

The previous illustration8 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.

The previous illustration8 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the same speed.

Symbol Message Specification

The symbol is WHITE The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.

Unavailable and the symbol is GREY Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

7 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h. 8 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 303

Symbol Message Specification

Adaptive cruise

Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.304

Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car between the lane's side markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

The Pilot Assist function gives more comfortable driving and a more relaxed driving experience during, for example, long journeys on motorways in even traffic flows.

The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings9.

Camera and radar unit

Distance readers

Readers, side markings

The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings on the road surface using the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is maintained with automatic speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane.

Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road.

If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig- uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo- rarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control func- tions remain active.

NOTE

Pilot Assist steering assistance is deactivated and is resumed without prior warning.

The current status of steering assistance is indicated by the colour of the steering wheel's symbol:

GREEN steering wheel indi- cates active steering assis-

tance

GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi- cates deactivated steering assistance.

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

305

WARNING

Pilot Assist is an aid which cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The driver must always be observant with regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and intervene if Pilot Assist does not provide suit- able steering assistance or maintain a suita- ble speed or suitable time interval.

Read all the sections about this function in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before the function is used.

Pilot Assist must only be used if there are clear lane lines painted on the road surface on each side of the lane. All other use involves increased risk of contact with sur- rounding obstacles that are not detected by the function.

The driver always bears responsibility for how the car is controlled as well as for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when Pilot Assist is being used.

Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed.

Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak- ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in case of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the

limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed.

The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox:

Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).

The following applies for cars with manual gear- box:

Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph).

WARNING

Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance sys- tem. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

Pilot Assist does not brake for people, ani- mals, objects, small vehicles (e.g. cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

Do not use Pilot Assist, for example, in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip roads, or with a trailer connected to the car.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of Pilot Assist components must only be performed at a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

306

Overview

Controls

Buttons and symbols for functions9.

Increases stored speed or reactivates Pilot Assist and resumes stored speed and time interval

Activates/deactivates Pilot Assist

Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise control

Reduces stored speed

Increases the distance to vehicles ahead

Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot Assist

Reduces the distance to vehicles ahead

Function symbol

Symbols for target vehicle and time interval to vehicles ahead

Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance

Driver display

Indication of speeds9.

Stored speed

Speed of vehicle ahead.

Current speed of your car.

To see different combinations of symbols depending on traffic situation - see the heading "Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".

Collision risk warning

Audio and symbol for collision warning9

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision

Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- sion

Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit

Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's capacity. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 307

WARNING

Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles whose camera and radar unit has been detected - therefore a warning may not occur or be delayed. Do not wait for a warning with- out braking when so required.

Head-up display*

Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen9.

In cars equipped with a head-up display, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol.

NOTE

Information on the windscreen may be diffi- cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- ing sunglasses.

Related information Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*

(p. 307)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist must first be activated and then started to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:

The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed.

There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).

For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.308

With the adaptive cruise control in the standby mode:

1. Press (6).

> The symbol changes to Pilot Assist in standby mode (8).

2. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is stored, which is shown with figures in the centre of the speedometer.

...or...

With the adaptive cruise control started:

Press (6).

> Pilot Assist is started.

Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to GREEN.

Pilot Assist only regulates the time interval to the vehicle

ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) above the steering wheel symbol.

At the same time a speed range is marked.

The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehi- cle ahead (target vehicle).

Hands on the steering wheel In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. The system continually monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel then a text message is shown, prompting the driver to actively steer the car. If this is not done, an acoustic warning signal will also be given.

If that does not prompt the driver to put his/her hands on the steering wheel either, Pilot Assist changes to standby mode. Following which, Pilot Assist must be restarted with the steering wheel

button .

NOTE

Note that Pilot Assist only works when the driver has hands on the steering wheel.

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 309

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Change the stored speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or - (3):

Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) with each press.

Hold the button depressed to adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release when the driver display's marking (4) is at the desired speed.

> The speed set after the last press is stored in the memory.

If the driver increases the cars speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

wheel button , the speed stored will be the cars speed when the button is depressed, provi- ded the drivers foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic gearbox Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Note that the lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.

Maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Manual gearbox Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.310

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter- vals.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle

in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

NOTE

When the symbol in the driver display shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol- lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.

When only one steering wheel is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.

Control for time interval.

Decrease time interval

Increase time interval

Distance indicator

Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- rent time interval.

In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions. For example, at low speed, when the distances become short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval slightly.

Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen problem should arise.

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If Pilot Assist does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time dis- tance to the vehicle in front is preventing an increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 311

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later.

Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the symbol (8) in the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speed- ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.

...or...

Press (3).

> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes to the adaptive cruise control in active mode.

In standby mode, the driver is no longer given any driver steering recommendations and must con- trol both speed and distance him/herself.

When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car drives too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned about the short distance by the Distance Warning function instead (see reference to the heading "Distance Warning" at the end of this section).

Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the gear selector is moved to N position.

the direction indicators are used for longer than 1 minute .

the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man- ual gearbox.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

When the direction indicators are used, Pilot Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen- gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be detected.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.312

Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC. If any of these other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is switched off automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and a message is shown in the driver dis- play. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

Automatic deactivation may occur if:

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump.

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.

speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.

the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off the seatbelt

engine speed is too low/high

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

the parking brake is applied

the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked).

Reactivating Pilot Assist from the standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by pressing steer-

ing wheel button .

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 313

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot Assist has functionality for change of target and braking at certain speeds.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.

The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar- get object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Automatic braking For shorter stops in connection with inching for- ward in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the Pilot Assist is set in standby mode with automatic braking.

Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following way:

Press the steering wheel button .

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within 6 seconds.

NOTE

Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking brake is applied and the function is disen- gaged.

Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.314

Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car him- self/herself to keep it stationary.

This may take place in the following situations:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the parking brake is applied

the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- tion

the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby mode.

Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations the parking brake is applied to keep the car stationary.

This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:

the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes

the brakes have overheated

the engine is switched off.

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in certain situations.

The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help the driver in many situations. But the driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis- tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi- tion in the lane.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 315

IMPORTANT

In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering assistance may have difficulty helping the driver in the right way or it may be automati- cally deactivated - in which case, the use of Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of such situations may be that:

the lane markings are worn, missing or cross each other.

lane division is unclear, for example, when the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in the event of multiple sets of markings.

edges or other lines than lane markings are present on or near the road, e.g. curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or strong shadows.

the lane is narrow or winding.

the lane contains ridges or holes.

weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, snow or fog or slush or impaired view with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc.

The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations:

High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly as lane

markings, with a subsequent risk of con- tact between the car and such obstacles. The driver must ensure him/herself that the car is at a suitable distance from such obstacles.

The camera and radar sensor does not have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic environ- ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles or objects which completely or partially block the route.

Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc.

The recommended steering input is force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the car within the lane.

The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfa- ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use Pilot Assist with a heavy load or with a trailer con- nected to the car.

Miscellaneous Off Road drive mode cannot be selected

when Pilot Assist is activated.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limita- tions for radar unit" section.

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.316

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 316)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*.

Here are some examples10.

The previous illustration11 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.

Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.

The previous illustration11 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the same speed.

Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.

10 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h. 11 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 317

The previous illustration11 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the same speed.

Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis- tance since the lane's side markings can be detected.

The previous illustration11 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.

Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis- tance since the lane's side markings can be detected.

Related information Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* (p. 310)

Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist* (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* (p. 311)

Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

11 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.318

Radar unit The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing other vehi- cles.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The radar unit is used by the following functions:

Distance Warning*

Adaptive cruise control*

Pilot Assist*

City Safety

Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal.

Related information Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

Type approval for radar units (p. 323)

Distance Warning* (p. 288)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

City Safety (p. 330)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

319

Limitations of the radar unit The radar unit has certain limitations - which in turn also limits those functions that use the unit.

Blocked unit

The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.12.

The radar unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's camera unit.

IMPORTANT

Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit this can interfere with camera and radar-depend- ent functions.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

If the driver display shows this symbol with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual, it means that the

camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi- cles in front of the car.

The following table presents examples of possi- ble causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov- ered with ice or snow.

Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit.

Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

320

Cause Action

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit.

Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen clean in front of the camera and radar unit.

Vehicle speed The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles ahead is reduced significantly if:

the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi- cantly different from that of your own car

Limited field of vision The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

The radar unit's field of vision.

Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle

that drives in between your car and the vehi- cle ahead.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi- cles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.

In bends, the radar unit may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

Low trailers

Low trailer in radar shadow.

Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver should therefore be particularly careful when driv- ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 321

High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently.

Damaged windscreen

IMPORTANT

If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- screen in front of one of the camera and radar unit windows covers an area of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen replaced. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- ance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies:

Volvo recommends against repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit. Instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved wind- screen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

IMPORTANT

When the windscreen is replaced, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated at the workshop to ensure the functionality of all the cars camera and radar-based systems. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance In order that the radar and camera unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

Related information Radar unit (p. 318)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 290)

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.322

Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* (p. 300)

Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

323

Type approval for radar units Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Modelo: L2C0055TR

1500-15-8065

EAN: 07897843840978

Modelo: L2C0054TR

4122-14-8645

EAN: (01)07897843840855

Europe

Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA

The United Arab Emi- rates

TRA

REGISTERED No: ER37536/15

DEALER No: DA37380/15

TRA

REGISTERED No: ER37357/15

DEALER No: DA37380/15

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

324

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Indonesia

37295/POSTEL/2014

4927

38806/SDPPI/2015

4927

Jordan

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255

Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3

Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Korea

Certification No.

MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR

Certification No.

MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR

Morocco

AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC

NUMRO DAGRMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014

DATE DAGRMENT: 26/12/2014

Moldavia 1024

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 325

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA105753

South Africa

TA-2014/1824

APPROVED

TA-2014/2390

APPROVED

Taiwan

CCAB15LP0560T3

CCAB15LP0680T0

A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control B BLIS = Blind Spot Information

Related information Radar unit (p. 318)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.326

Camera unit The camera unit is used by several driver sup- port systems and has the task of for example detecting lane lines or traffic signs.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The camera unit is used by the following func- tions:

Adaptive cruise control*

Lane assistance*

Driver Alert Control*

Pilot Assist*

City Safety

Run-off Mitigation

Road Sign Information*

Active main beam*

Related information Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Driver Alert Control (p. 352)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

City Safety (p. 330)

Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)

Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

327

Limitations of the camera unit The camera unit has certain limitations - which in turn also limits those functions that use the unit.

Impaired vision The camera has limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage- way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig- nificantly reduce camera function when it is used to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.

Blocked unit

The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.13.

The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec- tion of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit.

IMPORTANT

Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit this can interfere with camera and radar-depend- ent functions.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

If the driver display shows this symbol with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual, it means that the

camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi- cles in front of the car.

The following table presents examples of possi- ble causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:

13 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

328

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit.

Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam- era and radar unit.

Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi- tions.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen clean in front of the camera and radar unit.

High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently.

Damaged windscreen

IMPORTANT

If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- screen in front of one of the camera and radar unit windows covers an area of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen replaced. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- ance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies:

Volvo recommends against repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit. Instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 329

that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved wind- screen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

IMPORTANT

When the windscreen is replaced, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated at the workshop to ensure the functionality of all the cars camera and radar-based systems. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance In order that the radar and camera unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

Related information Camera unit (p. 326)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 354)

Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)

Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)

Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 352)

DRIVER SUPPORT

330

City Safety City Safety uses visual, haptic and acoustic sig- nals to alert the driver of any pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and vehicles that appear. The car then brakes automatically unless the driver him/herself acts within a reasonable time.

Location of the radar unit14.

City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli- sion speed.

City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle.

The City Safety function can help the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

The function helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of an imminent risk of collision if the driver does not react in time by braking and/or swerving.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce- dure, normally stopping the car just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well out- side normal driving style and may be perceived as uncomfortable.

City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven- tion.

The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation where a collision is immediately imminent.

City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle ahead or a bicycle by reducing the speed of the car by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).

If the speed difference is greater than 50 km/h (30 mph) or 45 km/h (28 mph) respectively, City Safety's automatic braking cannot prevent a colli- sion but it can mitigate the consequences of a collision.

In the event of a risk of a collision with a large animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). The braking function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the collision force at high speeds. Braking is most effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and less effective at low speeds.

14 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

331

WARNING

City Safety is an aid and does not work in all driving situations, traffic, weather and road conditions.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section and the section "Limitations for City Safety" inform about limi- tations that the driver should be aware of before using City Safety.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph).

City Safety's auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even if the car auto-brakes.

City Safety does not activates any auto-brake functions in the event of heavy acceleration.

The driver is always responsible for maintain- ing the correct distance and speed - never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene.

Market limitation City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety does not appear in the centre display's Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function.

Search path in the top menu: Settings My

Car IntelliSafe

Overview

Function overview14.

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision

Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- sion

Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit

City Safety carries out three steps in the follow- ing order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support

3. Auto Brake

Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- nent collision.

City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani- mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.

In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes- trian, large animal, cyclist or vehicle (including vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by means of a red flashing warning signal, an acous- tic signal and a haptic warning in the form of a brake pulse. At lower speeds or with hard braking or acceleration there will be no haptic warning. The brake pulse frequency varies according to the car's speed.

Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.

Brake support reinforces the drivers braking action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

14 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

332

Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.

In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt tensioner may also be activated. For more infor- mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.

In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action.

When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to match that of the vehicle in front.

NOTE

On cars with manual gearbox, the engine stops when the Auto-brake function has stop- ped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

The driver can always interrupt a braking inter- vention by firmly depressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.

When City Safety is activated and brakes the vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active.

WARNING

City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver relies solely on City Safety to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

Related information Setting the warning distance for City Safety

(p. 332)

Detection of obstacles with City Safety (p. 333)

City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented (p. 336)

City Safety in cross traffic (p. 335)

Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)

Messages for City Safety (p. 339)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Setting the warning distance for City Safety City Safety is always activated, but it is possible to select the warning distance for the function.

NOTE

The City Safety function cannot be deacti- vated. It is activated automatically when the engine/electric operation is started and remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off.

The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which the visual, acoustic and haptic warnings shall be triggered.

1. Tap on Settings in top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe.

3. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance.

If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then use the Normal or Late warning distance.

If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced. This would lead to the system warning

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

333

at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings.

The Late warning distance should only be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving.

NOTE

City Safety warns the driver when there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the drivers reaction time.

With the warning distance set at Early, the warnings will come more in advance. This may mean that the warnings come more often than for warning distance Normal.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.

NOTE

The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn- ing distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".

The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active.

WARNING

No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

Detection of obstacles with City Safety The obstructions that City Safety can detect are vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.

Vehicles City Safety detects most vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your car, as well as vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section.

In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated.

Cyclists

Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist with clear body outline and bicycle outline.

Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

334

bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of move- ment.

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the sys- tem cannot detect a cyclist.

For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle designed for adults.

WARNING

City Safety is an aid, and cannot detect all cyclists in all situations and, for example, can- not see:

partially obscured cyclists.

cyclists wearing clothing that obscures the body outline.

bicycles loaded with large objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Pedestrians

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes- trians with clear body outlines.

For optimal performance, the system function that detects pedestrians must receive the clear- est possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor- mal human pattern of movement.

In order that it shall be possible to detect a pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omit- ted.

City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's head- lamps.

WARNING

City Safety is an aid and cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see:

partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.

pedestrians if the background contrast of the pedestrians is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all.

pedestrians who are carrying larger objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

335

Large animals

Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear body outline.

Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and horse) must receive the clearest possible infor- mation about the body outline, requiring the abil- ity to identify the animal directly from the side in combination with what is a normal pattern of movement for the animal.

If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal.

City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's head- lamps.

WARNING

City Safety is an aid, and cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for exam- ple, cannot see:

partially obscured large animals.

larger animals seen from the front or from behind.

large animals that run or move quickly.

large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all.

small animals such as dogs and cats, for example.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

City Safety in cross traffic City Safety can help the driver when turning and crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at an intersection.

Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming cross- ing vehicles.

For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first enter the sector (1) in which City Safety can ana- lyse the situation.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

336

The following further criteria must also be fulfil- led:

your car must be travelling at no less than 4 km/h (3 mph)

your car must turn to the left in markets with right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand traffic)

the oncoming vehicle must have its head- lamps switched on.

WARNING

City Safety is an aid and does not work in all driving situations, traffic, weather and road conditions.

Warnings and brake interventions due to a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle often come very late.

The driver is always responsible for maintain- ing the correct distance and speed - never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene.

Limitations in cross traffic In some cases City Safety may have difficulty helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic. Examples are:

stability control ESC intervenes in the event of slippery driving conditions

if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late

if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some- thing

if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps switched off

if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre- dictable manner, for example, abruptly changes lanes at a late stage.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering away.

City Safety assists the driver by continuously attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta- tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late stage.

Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.

Your car

Slow/stationary vehicle

City Safety does not intervene with the auto- brake function as long as the driver him/herself

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

337

has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a steering manoeuvre.

However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver by automatically starting to brake at an earlier stage.

WARNING

City Safety's ability to anticipate a certain sit- uation is an aid, and does not work in all driv- ing situations or traffic, weather and road con- ditions.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- lations are followed.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)

Limitations of City Safety The City Safety function may have limitations in certain situations.

Surroundings

Low objects Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon- net limit the function.

Skidding On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC will give the best possible braking force with main- tained stability.

Oncoming light The visual warning signal in the windscreen may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun- light, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.

Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windscreen may be temporarily disengaged.

The camera and radar unit's field of view The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi-

cles in some situations cannot be detected, or they are detected later than anticipated.

Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all.

If a text message in the driver display indicates that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of the car. This means that the functionality of City Safety may be reduced.

However, an error message is not shown in all situations where the windscreen sensors are obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam- era and radar unit clear.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Driver intervention

Reversing When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

338

Low speed City Safety is not activated at very low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there- fore does not intervene in situations where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, e.g. when parking.

Active driver Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene or postpone warning/intervention in situations where the driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.

Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention in order to minimise unnecessary warnings.

Miscellaneous

WARNING

Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situa- tion or external influences mean that the cam- era and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly.

For vehicles to be detected at night, their headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be switched on and shining clearly.

The camera and radar unit has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can provide effective warnings and brake interven- tions as long as the relative speed is below 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow- moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven- tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds.

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi- cles and large animals could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 70 km/h (43 mph).

Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit this can interfere with camera-dependent func- tions.

Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the camera sensor may reduce its function, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limita- tions for radar unit" section.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)

DRIVER SUPPORT

339

Messages for City Safety A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display.

The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

Automatic intervention

City Safety

When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated in connection with a text message being shown.

City Safety

Reduced functionality Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.340

Rear Collision Warning The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle approaching from behind.

RCW is activated automatically each time the engine is started.

The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle approaching from behind that a collision is immi- nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.

If, at a vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW function detects that the car is in dan- ger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt ten- sioners may tension the front seatbelts and the Whiplash Protection System safety system is activated.

Immediately before the collision, RCW may also activate the foot brake in order to reduce the for- ward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immedi- ately if the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Limitations In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. This can be for example:

if the vehicle approaching from the rear is detected too late

if the vehicle approaching from the rear changes lane at the last moment

if the vehicle approaching from the rear has a speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

NOTE

In certain markets, RCW does not give a warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this part of the function is deactivated.

NOTE

The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn- ing distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".

The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active.

Related information City Safety (p. 330)

Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 332)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)

Blind Spot Information* The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function is designed to give a warning of vehicles diago- nally behind and to the side of your car so as to give assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:

vehicles in the car's blind spot

quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

341

Location of BLIS lamp15.

Indicator lamp

The BLIS button in the centre display's func- tion view activates/deactivates the function.

Principle of Blind Spot Information

Zone in blind spot

Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.

The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph).

The system is designed to react when:

your car is overtaken by other vehicles

another vehicle is quickly approaching your car.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica- tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti- vates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over

from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

WARNING

Blind Spot Information does not work on sharp bends.

Blind Spot Information does not work when the car is reversing.

WARNING

Blind Spot Information is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

Blind Spot Information is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

Blind Spot Information can never replace responsibility and attention by the driver. It is always the drivers responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.

15 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.342

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replace- ment for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driv- er's attention and responsibility. The responsi- bility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

Related information Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information*

(p. 342)

Limitations of Blind Spot Information* (p. 343)

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)

Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information* The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function can be activated/deactivated.

Location of Blind Spot Information lamp16.

Indicator lamp

The function is activated/deactivated using the BLIS button in the centre display's func- tion view.

Tap on the BLIS button in function view.

> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/ grey indicator is shown in the button.

If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once.

If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was switched off, it will continue to be deactivated when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated.

WARNING

Blind Spot Information is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

Blind Spot Information is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

Blind Spot Information can never replace responsibility and attention by the driver. It is always the drivers responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.

Related information Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

Limitations of Blind Spot Information* (p. 343)

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)

16 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 343

Limitations of Blind Spot Information* The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function may have limitations in certain situations.

Examples of limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.

BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.

Sensors The sensors for the BLIS function are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function.

Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car17.

To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information* (p. 342)

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)

Cross Traffic Alert* Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver aid that is intended to warn of crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to Blind Spot Information (BLIS).

Principle of CTA.

CTA supplements the functionality of BLIS by providing the ability to see crossing traffic approaching from the side, such as while revers- ing out of a parking space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear has been selected.

17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.344

If CTA has sensed that something is approaching from the side, this is also indicated with:

an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the left-hand or right-hand speaker according to the direction from which the object approaches.

an illuminated icon in the PAS graphics on the screen.

an icon on the Park assist camera top view.

Illuminated CTA icon in the PAS graphic on the screen.

WARNING

CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

CTA can never replace the driver's responsi- bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.

Related information Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*

(p. 344)

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)

Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function can be activated/deactivated.

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Tap on the Cross Traffic Alert button in function view.

> GREEN button indication - CTA is acti- vated.

GREY button indication - CTA is deac- tivated.

CTA is always in activated mode after the engine is started.

WARNING

CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

CTA can never replace the driver's responsi- bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 345

Related information Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function may have limitations in certain situations.

CTA does not perform optimally in all situations but has some limitations. For example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi- cles or obstructing obstacles.

Here are some examples of situations where CTAs "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely blind on one side.

Blind CTA sector.

Sector in which CTA can detect/see.

However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.

Examples of further limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.

CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.

Sensors The sensors for the CTA function are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are also used by the Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.346

Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car18.

To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Do not affix any objects, tape, labels or similar within the area of the sensors.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)

Limitations of Blind Spot Information* (p. 343)

18 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 347

Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* A number of messages regarding Blind Spot Information (BLIS) and Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver display.

The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

Blind spot sensor

Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Blind spot system off

Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.

Related information Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information* (p. 342)

Limitations of Blind Spot Information* (p. 343)

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)

Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 108)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.348

Road Sign Information* The Road Sign Information function (Road Sign Information RSI) helps the driver to observe speed signs and certain prohibition signs as the car passes them.

Examples of readable signs19.

RSI provides information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is star- ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way.

In the case where both a sign for motorway/dual carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are passed, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit is shown directly with a line in the driver display's speed scale.

WARNING

RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and reg- ulations are followed.

Related information Sign display with Road Sign Information

(p. 348)

Speed camera information* (p. 350)

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa- tion (p. 351)

Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 352)

Sign display with Road Sign Information The Road Sign Information function (Road Sign Information - RSI) registers and shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation.

Example of detected speed information20.

When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a symbol plus an indication in red on the speedom- eter.

19 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. 20 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 349

Besides the speed limit symbol an additional sign may be shown as well, such as "no overtaking".

If the driver enters a road marked with a no-entry sign at the roadside, the symbol for this sign flashes on and off on the driver display as a warning.

If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* then information from the map is also used to determine whether the car is being driven in the wrong direction.

The driver can also get an acoustic warning when driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Audio Warning function is activated - see the heading "Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information".

End of restriction or motorway If RSI detects a sign which may imply the end of a speed limit, such as the end of a motorway, the driver display shows the corresponding road sign for 1030 seconds.

Examples of such signs are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

Following which, the sign information is hidden until the next speed-related sign is detected.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs20.

Sometimes different speed limits are signed for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particu- larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

If the car has a trailer attached and you pass a speed sign with the additional sign trailer, the indicated speed will appear on the driver display.

Some speed limits only apply after a certain distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this fact by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed symbol. The additional symbol

in the driver display will show either DIST or TIME.

A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the driver display's speed symbol means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit.

20 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.350

Sensus Navigation If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases:

On detecting signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriage- way and city limit signs.

If a previously detected sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected.

NOTE

If a downloaded third-party app is used for navigation then there is no support for speed- related information.

Sign for "School" and "Children at play" If the warning sign for "School" or "Children at play" is included in the satellite navigator's map data, the driver display shows a sign20 of this type.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa- tion (p. 351)

Speed camera information* A car equipped with Sensus Navigation can pro- vide information on an upcoming speed camera in the driver display.

Speed camera warning in the driver display.

If the car exceeds a detected speed limit, the driver can be warned when the car approaches a speed camera, provided that the navigation maps for the market in ques- tion contain information on

speed cameras.

For more information on speed warning in con- nection with speed camera, see the heading "Activating/deactivating speed warnings" in the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign Infor-

mation" as well as the section "Limitations for Road Sign Information".

NOTE

Information about speed cameras in the navi- gation maps is not available for all markets.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa- tion (p. 351)

Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 352)

20 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 351

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information The Road Sign Information (Road Sign Information - RSI) function can be activated/ deactivated.

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Tap on the Road Sign Information button in function view.

> RSI is activated and the button shows a green indicator - a grey indicator means that RSI is deactivated.

Activating/deactivating speed warnings The speed warning function warns the driver when the applicable speed limit is exceeded. A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is exceeded in connection with speed camera infor- mation. The driver can choose to have the func- tion activated or deactivated.

The speed warning is given by the driver display symbol show- ing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.

1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information.

3. Select Speed Limit Warning to activate/ deactivate speed warnings.

> A speed selector is shown if the function is activated.

4. Adjust the limit for when a speed warning is to be given, either up or down, by pressing the up/down arrows.

Note that no consideration is given to any boundary adjustment made when the driver display shows the speed camera symbol.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning. It is also possible to have an acoustic warning in connection with a speed warning:

1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information.

3. Select Audio Warning to activate/deacti- vate the acoustic warning.

With the Audio Warning function activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards a no- entry entrance.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Speed camera information* (p. 350)

Sign display with Road Sign Information (p. 348)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.352

Limitations of Road Sign Information* The Road Sign Information Road Sign Information - RSI function may have limitations in certain situations.

Examples of things that can reduce the RSI func- tion are as follows:

Faded signs

Signs positioned on bends

Rotated or damaged signs

Signs positioned high above the roadway

Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs

signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt

digital road maps21 are out-of-date, inaccu- rate or have no speed information22.

NOTE

The RSI function can interpret some types of bicycle rack (connected to the electrical socket for trailers) as a connected trailer. In such cases the driver may be shown incorrect speed information.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 348)

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa- tion (p. 351)

Sign display with Road Sign Information (p. 348)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control function is intended to attract the driver's attention when he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio- rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.

The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).

A camera detects the edge markings painted on the carriageway and compares the alignment of the road with the drivers steering wheel move- ments.

21 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation. 22 Map data with speed information is not available in all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

353

If driving behaviour becomes seriously erratic, the driver is alerted by means of an acous- tic signal combined with a sym- bol in the driver display and the message Time for a break soon?.

The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu- lar intervals, and make sure you are well rested.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.

In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

WARNING

Driver Alert Control does not work in all situa- tions but is designed merely as a supplemen- tary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control

(p. 353)

Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 354)

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be activated/deactivated.

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 1. Tap on Settings in top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Control.

3. Select Alertness Warning to activate/deac- tivate the DAC.

WARNING

Driver Alert Control does not work in all situa- tions but is designed merely as a supplemen- tary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Activating/deactivating the rest place guide in the event of a warning It is possible to select whether the rest place guide shall be activated or deactivated. With the guide activated a proposal for a suitable rest place is presented at the same time as DAC gives a warning.

1. Tap on Settings in top view in the centre display.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.354

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Control.

3. Select Rest Stop Guidance to activate/ deactivate the rest place guide.

Related information Driver Alert Control (p. 352)

Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 354)

Limitations of Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may have limitations in certain situations.

In some cases, driving behaviour may not be affected, despite the driver being tired - e.g. when using the Pilot Assist function - with the result that the driver is then not given a warning from DAC. For this reason, it is always very important to stop and take a break in the event of the slightest sign of driver fatigue, regardless of whether DAC has given a warning.

In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam- ple:

in strong side winds

on rutted road surfaces.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information Driver Alert Control (p. 352)

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control (p. 353)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Lane Keeping Aid The function of lane assistance is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways and similar major routes.

Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane and/or warns the driver with an acoustic signal or steering wheel vibration.

Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines.

On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode. The function becomes available again when the road is wide enough.

A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

355

Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.

Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations23.

Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in accordance with the following:

1. Steering assistance activated: When the car is approaching a lane line, LKA will actively

steer the car back into its lane by applying a slight torque to the steering wheel.

2. Warning activated: If the car is about to cross a lane line, the driver is warned by means of an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering wheel.

NOTE

When a direction indicator is switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from Lane assistance.

WARNING

Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- lations are followed.

Steering assistance A precondition for the functioning of the LKA steering assistance is that the drivers hands are holding the steering wheel. The system monitors this continuously.

If the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, the driver display shows this symbol and the following message, to prompt the driver to actively steer the car:

Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering

If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym- bol is shown again, combined with a warning sound and this message:

Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied

If the driver then still does not follow the prompt to start steering, LKA is set in standby mode - the function will then be unavailable until the driver starts to steer the car again.

23 The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

356

Lane assistance does not intervene

Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside curves.

In some situations, lane assistance allows lane lines to be crossed without intervening with either steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when using the direction indicators or cutting bends.

Limitations In certain demanding conditions lane assistance may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function.

Examples of such conditions are:

road works

winter road conditions

poor road surface

a very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility

sharp edges or lines other than the lane lines

roads with unclear or non-existent line mark- ings.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid

(p. 356)

Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)

Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 358)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid Lane assistance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) can be activated/deactivated and some subfunctions can be selected.

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Tap on the Lane Keeping Aid button in function view.

> LKA is activated (GREEN button indica- tion is shown) or deactivated (GREY but- ton indication is shown).

Select the type of warning for the Lane Keeping Aid It is possible to select how LKA shall warn the driver if the car leaves its lane.

1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Lane Assistance.

DRIVER SUPPORT

357

3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Warning Feedback, select type of warning:

Sound - the driver is warned by an acoustic signal.

Vibration the driver is warned with steering wheel vibrations.

Assistance options for Lane Keeping Aid It is possible to select how LKA shall react if the driver if the car leaves its lane.

1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Lane Assistance.

3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how LKA shall react

Assist - the driver is given steering assis- tance without a warning.

Both - the driver is given both a warning and steering assistance.

Warning warning to driver only.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 358)

DRIVER SUPPORT

358

Symbols and messages for lane assistance A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance can be shown on the driver dis- play.

Symbol in the driver display Lane assistance is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation.

Here are some examples of symbols and the situations in which they are shown:

Available

Available the lane lines in the symbol are white.

Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane lines.

Unavailable

Unavailable the lane lines in the symbol are grey.

The lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.

Indication of steering assistance/warning

Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym- bol are in colour.

Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv- ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car back into the lane.

Symbols and messages The following table shows some examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

359

Symbol Message Specification

Driver support system

Reduced functionality Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.

Lane Keeping Aid

Apply steering

The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not hold the wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.

Lane Keeping Aid

Standby until steering applied

LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid (p. 356)

DRIVER SUPPORT

360

Run-off Mitigation The function of Run-off Mitigation is to assist the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the road by means of actively steering the car back onto the road.

The function is active within the speed range 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible side markings/lane lines.

A camera scans the edges of the road and the painted side markings. If the car is about to cross the edge of the road, Run-off Mitigation will actively steer the car back onto the road. In addi- tion, if steering intervention is considered insuffi- cient to avoid run-off, brake intervention may also be activated.

Run-off Mitigation does not intervene with either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. If the function detects that the driver is driving the car in an active way, activation of Run-off Mitigation will be suppressed for a short time.

The function has two activation levels:

Steering assistance only

Steering assistance with brake intervention

Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance

Run-off Mitigation intervenes with steering assistance.

Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance and brake intervention

Run-off Mitigation intervenes with steering assistance and braking.

Brake intervention helps in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of run-off.

Settings for Run-off Mitigation The Run-off Mitigation function is selectable - the driver can select On or Off by dragging down the centre display's top view and there searching for the following:

Settings My Car IntelliSafe Lane Assistance

To activate Run-off Mitigation:

Select the box at Collision Avoidance Assistance, Steering aid during increased collision risk - the function is then activated.

The current setting for Run-off Mitigation when the engine is switched off remains the next time the engine is started.

Limitations of Run-off Mitigation In certain demanding conditions, Run-off Mitiga- tion may have difficulty helping the driver cor- rectly. In such cases, it is recommended that the function be switched off.

Examples of such conditions are:

road works

winter road conditions

DRIVER SUPPORT

361

narrow roads

poor road surface

a very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility

roads with unclear or non-existent side mark- ings

sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings.

WARNING

The road run-off protection function is only a driver aid and does not work in all driving sit- uations, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The function cannot detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the road.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- lations are followed.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information Symbols and messages for Run-off Mitiga-

tion (p. 362)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)

Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)

DRIVER SUPPORT

362

Symbols and messages for Run-off Mitigation A number of symbols and messages regarding the Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation can be shown in the driver display.

The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Specification

Automatic intervention

City Safety

When Run-off Mitigation is activated, a message is shown to the driver informing that the system has been activated.

Driver support system

Reduced functionality Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.

Related information Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 363

Park Assist* Parking assistance assists the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles by acoustic signals com- bined with graphics on the centre display.

Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.

The centre display shows an overview of the rela- tionship between the car and detected obstacles.

The highlighted sector indicates the location of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance between the car and detected obstacle.

The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.

The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to the sides is active when the car is moving but stops after the car has been stationary for

approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta- cles behind is also active when the car is station- ary.

At a distance within 30 cm from an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor's field closest to the car symbol is filled.

The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option.

NOTE

Acoustic warnings are only given for objects directly on the vehicle's route.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.

The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of e.g. people or animals near the car.

Backwards

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The sensors for reverse are activated if the car rolls backward without a gear engaged or when the gear lever is moved to reverse position.

The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres behind the car.

When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically.

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car- rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.364

Along the sides

Parking assistance side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).

The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.

Forwards

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The front parking assistance sensors are acti- vated automatically when the engine is started. The front sensors are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).

The measuring range starts approx. 0.8 metres in front of the car.

NOTE

Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information Activating/deactivating Parking assistance*

(p. 365)

Limitations of Parking assistance* (p. 365)

Messages for Park Assist* (p. 367)

Park Assist Camera* (p. 368)

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 365

Activating/deactivating Parking assistance* The Parking assistance function can be acti- vated/deactivated.

The front and side parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Parking assistance can also be activated/deactivated from the camera views.

Tap on the Park Assist button in function view.

> Parking assistance is activated/deacti- vated, a green/grey indicator is displayed in the button.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 363)

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)

Limitations of Parking assistance* The Parking assistance function may have limita- tions in certain situations.

NOTE

Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the dis- tance to an object behind the car.

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sen- sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- edly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.

Maintenance

Location of the parking sensors24.

For parking assistance to work optimally, the parking assistance sensors must be cleaned reg- ularly with water and car shampoo.

24 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.366

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 363)

Activating/deactivating Parking assistance* (p. 365)

Messages for Park Assist* (p. 367)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 367

Messages for Park Assist* A number of messages regarding Park Assist can be shown in the driver display.

The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

One or more of the system's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 363)

Activating/deactivating Parking assistance* (p. 365)

Limitations of Parking assistance* (p. 365)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.368

Park Assist Camera* The Park Assist Camera helps the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obsta- cles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display.

Overview The Park Assist Camera is activated either auto- matically, when reverse gear is selected or man- ually via the centre display - depending on the selected setting.

Lines - activates/deactivates park assist lines

Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar assist line*25

PAS* - activates/deactivates Parking assis- tance

CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert

Zoom26 - zoom in/out

WARNING

The parking camera serves as an aid. It does not relieve the driver of responsibil- ity when reversing.

The camera has blind spots, where obsta- cles cannot be detected.

Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car.

Camera views The function can display a composite 360 view and separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view. The upper- most in the selected view denotes which camera is active.

360 view camera*

The approximate coverage area of the Park Assist Cam- eras.

The four sides of the car are shown simultane- ously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is around the car when manoeu- vring at slow speeds.

Every camera view can be activated separately by tapping on the screen on the desired camera's "field of vision" - e.g. in front of or above the front camera.

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance* then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours.

25 Not available in all markets. 26 The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 369

Backwards

The backwards-facing camera27 is fitted above the reg- istration plate.

The backward-facing camera shows a wide area behind the car. For certain models, part of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases.

Objects shown in the centre display may appear slightly tilted this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the centre display may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

Forwards

The forwards parking camera27 is located in the grille.

The front camera can be helpful on an exit road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front camera is switched off.

If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph), and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 60 seconds after the forward-facing camera has been switched off, the camera is reactivated.

NOTE

Automatic reactivation of the front camera on speed reduction requires that Auto Camera Reverse Activation is selected in Settings

My Car Park Assist.

The sides

The side cameras27 are positioned in each door mirror.

The side cameras show what is along each side of the car.

Related information Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 372)

Park assist lines and fields for the Park Assist Camera* (p. 370)

Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* (p. 373)

Park Assist* (p. 363)

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)

27 The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.370

Park assist lines and fields for the Park Assist Camera* The Park Assist Camera indicates the position of the car in relation to its surroundings by display- ing lines on the camera image.

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.

Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steer- ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning.

These park assist lines include the car's most protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and corners.

NOTE

Park assist lines are not shown when zoom- ing in.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.

The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's elec- trical system.

IMPORTANT

Remember that when rear camera view is selected, the centre display only shows the area behind the car. Keep an eye on the sides and front of the car when turning the steering wheel while reversing.

The same applies vice versa - note what hap- pens to the rear parts of the car when the front camera view is selected.

Note that the guide lines show the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the car's sides so that they do not go against/ over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front sweeps against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when reversing.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 371

Park assist lines in 360 view*

360 view with park assist lines.

With the 360 view, park assist lines are shown behind, in front of and at the side of the car (depending on the direction of travel):

When driving forwards: Front lines

When reversing: Side lines and reversing lines.

If front camera or reversing camera has been selected, park assist lines are displayed without regard to the car's direction of travel. The selected side camera is used to show the park assist lines only while reversing.

Towbar assist line

Towbar with assist line.

Towbar - activates the towbar assist line*.

Zoom - zoom in/out.

The camera can facilitate connecting up to a trailer by showing an assist line representing the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.

1. Press Towbar (1).

> The assist line for the intended "path" of the towbar is shown. At the same time the car's park assist lines are extinguished.

2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise manoeuvring is required.

> The camera view zooms in.

Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time.

Sensor field from Parking assistance* If the car is equipped with Parking assistance* then the distance is shown in the 360 view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.

Sensor fields backwards and forwards

The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car symbol to the right.

The fields for the front and reversing sensors change colour as the distance to the obstacle decreases from yellow through orange to red.

Colours of front and

reversing fields

Distance (metres)

Yellow 0,61,5

Orange 0,40,6

Red 00,4

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.372

Sensor field to the sides The side fields are only shown in orange.

Colour of side fields Distance (metres)

Orange 00.3

Related information Park Assist Camera* (p. 368)

Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 372)

Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* (p. 373)

Starting the Park Assist Camera* The Park Assist Camera can be made to start automatically when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre display.

Starting the Park Assist Camera To start the park assist camera manually:

Press the Camera button in the centre dis- play's function view.

> The Park Assist Camera is started.

Camera start in different situations When the button is tapped, the vehicles speed and direction determine whether the camera starts in top view or front view:

Top view: When stationary and moving for- ward - 0-15 km/h (0-9 mph).

Top view: When stationary and moving back- ward - independent of speed.

Front view: When moving forward 15-22 km/h (9-14 mph).

Activating/deactivating automatic start of the Park Assist Camera It is possible to activate/deactivate the automatic starting of the Park Assist Camera when reverse gear is selected.

1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Park Assist.

3. Select Auto Camera Reverse Activation to activate/deactivate automatic start.

Automatic deactivation of camera The front view is extinguished at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver. If the Auto Camera Reverse Activation setting is selected, the camera is reactivated automatically at 22 km/h (14 mph) within 60 seconds. If speed exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph) then the front view is not reactivated.

Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated.

Select basic view for Park Assist Camera backward With the Auto Camera Reverse Activation function selected, the driver can also select which camera function should be activated for reversing - the rearward-facing camera or the 360 view*.

1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 373

2. Press My Car Park Assist.

3. Select Rear View Instead of 360 to acti- vate/deactivate the rear camera view as basic view.

Related information Park assist lines and fields for the Park

Assist Camera* (p. 370)

Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* (p. 373)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* The Park Assist Camera function may have limi- tations in certain situations.

The Park Assist Camera cannot see all objects in every situation - a driver should be aware of the following limitations:

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the cam- era's view.

Blind sectors Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until the car is very close to the obstacle.

There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision.

In 360 view obstacles/objects can vanish in the gaps between the individual cameras.

Defective camera If a camera sector is black and contains this symbol then it means that the camera is out of order. The following illustra- tion shows an example.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.374

The car's left-hand camera is out of order.

Black camera sector A black camera sector is also shown in the fol- lowing instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera:

open door

open tailgate

folded-in door mirror.

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality.

Maintenance Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful not to scratch the lenses.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic- ularly important in poor light.

Related information Park Assist Camera* (p. 368)

Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 372)

Park assist lines and fields for the Park Assist Camera* (p. 370)

Park Assist Pilot* Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot - PAP) helps the driver to park in or leave a park- ing space.

PAP checks first if a space is sufficiently big and thereafter helps the driver to turn the steering wheel and manoeuvre the car into the space.

The centre display indicates with symbols, graph- ics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so.

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the centre dis- play

change gear (reverse/forward)

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 375

WARNING

PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always has the final responsibility for driving the car in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surroundings and other road users approaching or passing while parking.

Types of parking situations PAP can be used for the following different park- ing situations.

Parallel parking

The principal of parallel parking.

The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. A parking space is identified and measured.

2. The car is reversed into the space.

3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.

Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park- ing space" in the section "Parking with Active parking assistance".

Perpendicular parking

Principle for perpendicular parking.

The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. A parking space is identified and measured.

2. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.

NOTE

A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis- ted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a parking space - the function must only be used for a parallel-parked car.

Related information Parking with Active parking assistance*

(p. 376)

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.376

Parking with Active parking assistance* The Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot - PAP) helps the driver park in three steps. The function can also help the driver to leave a park- ing space.

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the centre dis- play

change gear (reverse/forward)

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:

No trailer is attached to the car.

Speed must be lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).

NOTE

The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres while PAP is searching for a parking space.

Parking The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. A parking space is identified and measured.

2. The car is reversed into the space.

3. The car is positioned into the space - the system may then request that the driver changes gear.

Finding and measuring parking spaces The function can be activated in the centre display's function view.

It can also be accessed from the camera views.

Principle for parallel parking.

Principle for perpendicular parking.

1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for perpendicular parking.

2. Tap on the Park In button in function view.

> PAP searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough.

3. Keep an eye on the centre display - be ready to stop the car when the graphic and mes- sage indicate that a suitable parking space has been found.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

377

NOTE

PAP searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its pas- senger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:

Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead.

Reversing in to the parking space

Parallel.

Perpendicular.

1. Check that there is nothing behind.

2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

> PAP will then steer the car into the park- ing space.

3. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre- pared to stop the car when the graphics and message so request.

NOTE

Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the PAP function is acti- vated.

Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.

To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/forward.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.378

Positioning the car in the parking space

Parallel.

Perpendicular.

1. Move the gear selector into the D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive slowly forward

2. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre- pared to stop the car when the graphics and message so request.

3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back- wards.

4. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre- pared to stop the car when the graphics and message so request.

The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is com- plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the cars position. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.

IMPORTANT

The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by PAP compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.

Leaving a parking space

NOTE

When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel- parked car - it does not work for a perpendic- ular-parked car.

The Park Out function is acti- vated in the centre display's function view.

1. Tap on the Park Out button in function view.

2. Use the direction indicator to select the direction in which the car should leave the parking space.

3. Keep an eye the centre display. follow the instructions in the same way as during park- ing.

Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi- mum steering angle in order to leave the parking space.

If PAP considers that the driver can leave the parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 379

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* The Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot PAP) function may have limitations in certain situations.

Parking is discontinued A parking sequence will be discontinued:

if the driver moves the steering wheel

if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph)

if the driver presses Cancel in the centre display

when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g. when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road.

Where applicable, a message in the centre dis- play states the reason for a parking sequence being discontinued.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

IMPORTANT

Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Driver responsibility The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an aid not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to inter- rupt a parking step.

There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:

PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles already parked nearby - if they are inap- propriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by contact with the kerb.

PAP is designed for parking on straight streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP measures the space.

Parking spaces on narrow streets are not always feasible, since the space required for manoeuvring may not be sufficient.

Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.

Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not taken into account when calculating the parking manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to turn into the parking space too early, and hence such parking spaces should be avoided.

The driver is responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is suita- ble for parking.

Use approved tyres28 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to park the car.

Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly.

Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.

Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding from the car.

Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is protruding more than other parked cars.

28 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.380

IMPORTANT

Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed tyre circumference, which means that the PAP system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance

PAP sensor locations29.

For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen- sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)

Parking with Active parking assistance* (p. 376)

29 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 381

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* A number of messages regarding Park Assist Pilot PAP can be shown in the driver display.

The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

One or more of the systems' sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)

Parking with Active parking assistance* (p. 376)

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)

STARTING AND DRIVING

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.384

Alcohol lock* The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.

The car has an interface for the electrical con- nection of the different makes and models of alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter- face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's main display. For information about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to its owner's manual.

WARNING

The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.

Bypass of the alcohol lock* In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.

For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep- arate instructions for that specific lock.

Activating the bypass function (Bypass)

NOTE

All bypass activation is logged and saved in the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass.

The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass instead?, is shown in the screen:

Select Bypass by pressing once on the O button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

> The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can be started.

The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock instal- lation.

Related information Before starting the engine with the alcohol

lock (p. 384)

Starting the car (p. 386)

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

To bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:

Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco- hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor- rect measurement result.

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

Related information Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 384)

Starting the car (p. 386)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

385

Ignition positions The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the differ- ent functions available.

In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described with the denomination "ignition position" throughout the owner's manual.

The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level:

Level Functions

0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.

Power seats can be adjusted.

The power windows can be used.

The centre display is started and can be used.

It is possible to start the audio.

The functions are time-controlled in this ignition position and are switched off automatically after a period of time.

I Panorama roof, power windows, 12V socket in the passenger com- partment, navigation, phone, venti- lation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.

Power seats can be adjusted.

12 V sockets in the cargo area can be used.

The audio is started automatically if it was running when the car was left.

Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position.

Level Functions

II The headlamps come on.

Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.

Several other systems are acti- vated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has been started.

This ignition position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoided!

Selecting ignition position

Start knob in the tunnel console.

Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and store the remote control key inside the car.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.386

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear changing, when these ignition positions are to be selected.

Ignition position I - Turn the ignition dial to START and release it. The control automati- cally returns to its starting position.

Ignition position II - Turn the ignition dial to START and hold it in the START position for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position.

Back to ignition position 0 - To return to ignition position 0 from position I and II - Turn the ignition dial to STOP and release it. The control automatically returns to its star- ting position.

Related information Starting the car (p. 386)

Switching off the car (p. 387)

Driver display (p. 90)

Starting the car The car is started using the remote control key and the start knob in the tunnel console.

Start knob in the tunnel console.

The remote control key is not physically used when starting the car since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start).

To start the car:

1. The remote control key must be inside the car. For cars with Passive Start, the key needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*), the key can be anywhere in the car.

2. For cars with automatic gear changing, make sure that gear position P or N is selected. For cars with manual gear changing, make sure that the gear lever is in neutral position and that either the clutch pedal or the brake pedal is depressed.

3. Depress the brake pedal fully1.

4. Turn the start knob to START and release it. The control automatically returns to its star- ting position.

When the engine is started the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its over- heating protection triggers.

Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.

If the message Car key not found is shown in the driver display when starting, place the remote control key on the backup reader in the cup holder. Then try to start again.

1 If the car is moving, then you simply need to turn the start knob towards START to start the engine.

STARTING AND DRIVING

387

NOTE

When the remote control key is placed in the cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car keys close to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat- tery is allowed to recover.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.

WARNING

Always take the remote control key out from the car when leaving the car and make sure the car's electrical system is in ignition posi- tion 0 - especially if there are children in the car.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Related information Ignition positions (p. 385)

Switching off the car (p. 387)

Remote control key (p. 236)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 257)

Switching off the car The car is switched off using the ignition dial in the tunnel console.

Start knob in the tunnel console.

To switch off the car:

Turn the ignition dial to STOP and release it - the car is switched off. The control auto- matically returns to its starting position.

If the gear selector is not in P position or if the car is moving:

Hold the dial in the STOP position until the car switches off.

Related information Starting the car (p. 386)

STARTING AND DRIVING

388

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock locks or unlocks.

Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will lock automatically after a while.

Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, it is sufficient that the remote control key is inside the passenger compartment and the engine is started by turning the start knob towards START in order to unlock the steering lock.

Related information Starting the car (p. 386)

Switching off the car (p. 387)

Steering wheel (p. 131)

Using jump starting with another battery If the starter battery is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:

1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition position 0.

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover (2).

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive jump-starting point (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).

8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

389

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red.

Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the car's positive jump-starting point/donor battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

Related information Starter battery (p. 534)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Starting the car (p. 386)

Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 518)

Gearbox The gearbox is part of the car's driveline (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.

There are two main types of gearbox, manual and automatic.

The manual gearbox has six gears and the auto- matic gearbox has eight. The number of gear changes means that the engine's torque and power range can be used effectively. In the auto- matic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at constant engine speed.

It is also possible to select gears manually with the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec- tively shows which gear or gear position is cur- rently in use.

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system com- ponents, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over- heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown - follow the recommendation given.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.390

Symbols in the driver display If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver display shows a symbol and a message.

Symbol Specification

Information or error message for gearbox. Follow the recommenda- tion given.

Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 390)

Manual gearbox (p. 392)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)

Gear positions for automatic gearbox With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox also has a manual gearshift mode.

Gear positions in the driver display

The driver display shows the gear selector's posi- tion:

P, R, N, D or M.

In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is also shown.

Gear positions

Park position - P Select the P position when the car is parked or when starting the engine. The car must be sta- tionary when the park position is selected.

To be able to move the gear selector from the park position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Apply the parking brake first when the car is parked.

WARNING

Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not suf- ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa- tions.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

Reverse position - R Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta- tionary when reverse position is selected.

Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta- tionary with the gear selector in N position.

To be able to change from the neutral position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 391

Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when changing gear from R position to D position.

Manual gearshift mode - M The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

Select manual gearshift mode by moving the gear selector sideways from position D to the end position at "". The driver display shows which gear is engaged at the time.

Press the gear selector forwards to "+" (plus) to change up one step and release it.

Press the gear selector backwards to "" (minus) to change down one step and release it.

manual gearshift mode in the driver display2.

The gearbox automatically shifts down if the speed decreases to a level lower than appropri- ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic gear changing, press the gear selector sideways to the end position at D.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear- box control program has a protective downshift inhibitor.

The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Related information Gearbox (p. 389)

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 395)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)

Gear selector inhibitor (p. 394)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

2 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on the car's equipment.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.392

Manual gearbox With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit- able gear manually, according to speed and power requirements at the time.

Changing gear The manual gearbox has six gears, the shifting pattern is imprinted on the gear lever.

Gearing pattern.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N before moving it to R position.

Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.

During parking

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf- ficient to hold the car in all situations.

Related information Gearbox (p. 389)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator in the driver display shows the current gear during manual gearshift- ing and when it is appropriate to engage the next gear for optimum fuel economy.

For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time.

STARTING AND DRIVING

393

With automatic gearbox The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi- cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom- mended.

Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display.

Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.

With manual gearbox An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended change to a lower gear.

Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display.

Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.

Related information Gearbox (p. 389)

Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 390)

Manual gearbox (p. 392)

STARTING AND DRIVING

394

Gear selector inhibitor The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions in an automatic gearbox.

There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhib- itor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems.

From park position - P To be able to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

From neutral position - N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis- charged battery, the gear selector must be

moved to the N position so that the car can be moved.

Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in front of the gear selector. Locate the hole with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of the compartment.

Press a small screwdriver into the hole and hold.

Move the gear selector to position N and release the button.

4. Put the rubber mat back in place.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 390)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 395

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel.

Activating the steering wheel paddles To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated:

Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel.

> A figure in the driver display indicates cur- rent gear.

Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles.

Manual gearshift mode In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are automatically activated.

Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode.

Changing gear To change gear one step:

Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release.

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range.

After each gear change the figure in the driver display changes to show the current gear.

Deactivating the function

Manual deactivation in gear position D. Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by

pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and holding in place until the figure in the driver display for the current gear extinguishes.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.396

Automatic deactivation In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short time if they are not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing.

The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated for as long as engine brak- ing is in progress.

In gear position M there is no automatic deactiva- tion.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 390)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)

Start/Stop With the Start/Stop function, the engine switches off temporarily when the car has stop- ped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and then starts again automatically when the journey is resumed.

Start/Stop is one of several energy-saving func- tions intended to reduce fuel consumption, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.

The system makes it possible to adopt an envi- ronmentally-conscious driving style by allowing the car to engine auto-stop when possible.

Related information Using the Start/Stop function (p. 396)

Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 398)

Using the Start/Stop function The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off the engine when stationary and then restarts it automatically when the journey is resumed.

The Start/Stop function is available when the engine is started and can be activated if certain conditions have been met. The driver display indi- cates whether the function is available, active or unavailable, see heading "Symbols in driver dis- play" below.

All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is auto-stopped. However, some equipment may have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the cli- mate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.

Auto-stop The following is required for the engine to auto- stop:

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

397

With automatic gearbox

Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the brake pedal - the engine stops automatically.

With manual gearbox

Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi- tion and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automatically.

In drive mode Eco or Comfort3, the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.

With the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist func- tion activated, the engine will autostop after approximately three seconds.

See the section "Conditions for Start/Stop func- tion".

Autostart The following is required for the engine to auto- start:

With automatic gearbox

Release the brake pedal - the engine will autostart and you can continue driving. On an uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)

engages, which prevents the car from rolling backwards.

When the Auto hold function is activated, auto-start is delayed until the accelerator pedal is depressed.

When the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist function are activated, the engine will autos- tart when the accelerator pedal is depressed,

or by pressing the button on the left keypad of the steering wheel.

Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts.

On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on the brake pedal slightly so that the car begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after a slight speed increase.

With manual gearbox

With the gear lever in neutral position: Depress the clutch pedal or depress the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.

On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on the brake pedal slightly so that the car begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after a slight speed increase.

Symbols in the driver display

With 12-inch driver display

The text READY is shown in the tachometer when the function is available.

A pointer in the tachometer points to READY when the function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.

The text READY is greyed out when the function is not available.

No text is shown when the function is deacti- vated.

The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.

3 Normal start mode.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.398

With 8-inch driver display The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the speedometer.

Symbol Specification

White symbol: The function is avail- able.

Beige symbol: The function is active and the engine is auto-stop- ped.

The function is not available, the conditions are not fulfilled.

No symbol is shown when the function is deactivated.

Deactivating the function In certain situations it may be desirable to tempo- rarily deactivate the function.

Deactivate using the Start/ Stop function button in the centre display's function view. The indication in the button is switched off when the function is deactivated.

The function is deactivated until

it is reactivated

the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort

the next time the car is started.

Related information Start/Stop (p. 396)

Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 398)

Hill start assist (p. 412)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)

Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)

Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

Conditions for the Start/Stop function For the Start/Stop function to work requires that a number of conditions are met.

If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in the driver display. See the section "Using the Start/Stop function".

The engine does not auto-stop The engine does not auto-stop in the following cases:

The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting.

After a number of repeated auto stops, speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) before the next auto stop.

The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.

The capacity of the starter battery is below the minimum permissible level.

The engine is not at normal operating tem- perature.

The ambient temperature is under -5 C or above approx. 30 C.

the windscreen's electric heating is activated.

The environment in the passenger compart- ment deviates from the set values.

the car is reversed.

The starter battery's temperature is below or above the permitted limit values.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

399

The driver makes sweeping steering wheel movements.

The road is very steep.

The bonnet is opened.

When driving at high altitudes when the engine has not reached operating tempera- ture.

The ABS system has been activated.

In the event of heavy braking (even without the ABS system having been activated).

Many starts during a short period of time have activated the starter motor's thermal protection.

The exhaust system's particulate filter is full4.

A trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.

The following applies to automatic gearbox:

The gearbox is not at normal operating tem- perature.

The gear selector is in position.

The engine does not auto-start In the following cases the engine does not auto- start after having auto-stopped:

With automatic gearbox:

The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in P position and the driver's door is open - a normal start must take place.

With manual gearbox:

The driver is unrestrained.

A gear is engaged without declutching.

Involuntary stop with manual gearbox If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed as follows:

1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked in the seatbelt buckle.

2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.

3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. A message is shown in the driver display - follow the recommendation given.

The engine auto-starts without the brake pedal having been released In the following cases, the engine auto-starts even if the driver does not take his/her foot off the brake pedal:

High humidity in the passenger compartment forms misting on the windows.

The environment in the passenger compart- ment deviates from the set values.

There is a temporarily high current take-off or starter battery capacity drops below the lowest permissible level.

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

The bonnet is opened.

The car starts to roll or increase speed slightly if the car auto-stopped without being completely stationary.

The following applies to automatic gearbox:

The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position.

The gear selector is moved from D to posi- tion R or .

The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message indicate that the ignition is on.

WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the engine has auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally before lifting up the bonnet.

4 Applies to cars with diesel engines.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.400

Related information Start/Stop (p. 396)

Using the Start/Stop function (p. 396)

Support battery (p. 537)

Drive modes* Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the driving experience and facilitate driving in special situa- tions.

Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following systems are adapted to obtain the best possible driving characteristics in each respective drive mode:

Steering

Engine/gearbox5/all-wheel drive

Brakes

Shock absorption

Driver display

Start/Stop function

Climate settings

Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes can be selected in all situations.

Selecting drive mode

1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.

> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display.

2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the desired drive mode is highlighted.

3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly on the touch screen to confirm the selection.

> The selected drive mode is indicated in the driver display.

A message is shown when a drive mode is unse- lectable, for example:

Cannot be selected because gear is in manual

Cannot be selected due to low battery

5 Applies to automatic gearbox.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

401

Cannot be selected due to low temperature

Cannot be selected due to limitations

Cannot be selected because speed is too high.

Selectable drive modes

COMFORT

This is the car's normal mode.

When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and the Start/Stop function is activated. These set- tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and body's movement is smooth.

This drive mode is the certification mode for car- bon dioxide emissions.

ECO

Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and environmentally-conscious driving with the Eco mode.

The drive mode means, for example, that the Start/Stop function is activated and the output of certain climate settings is reduced.

The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili- tates fuel-efficient driving.

More information on this drive mode is found in the section "Drive mode ECO".

OFF ROAD

Maximise the car's traction when driving in difficult terrain and on poor roads.

The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation and low speed function with hill descent control (Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The drive mode can only be activated at low speeds and the speedometer shows the range for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off Road mode is suspended and another drive mode is activated.

In the Off Road mode the driver display has a compass between the speedometer and tachom- eter.

NOTE

The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.

IMPORTANT

The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used while driving with a trailer without trailer con- nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the air bellows.

DYNAMIC

Dynamic mode means that the car has sportier characteristics and faster response to accelerating.

The gear changes become faster and more dis- tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with greater traction.

Steering response is faster and shock absorption is harder6 which means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.

Start/Stop function is deactivated.

6 Applies to Four-C.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.402

INDIVIDUAL

Adapting a drive mode according to individ- ual preferences.

Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust the settings according to the desired driving cha- racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi- vidual driver profile.

An individual drive mode is only available if it is first activated in the centre display.

Settings view7 for individual drive mode.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode.

3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.

Possible adjustments apply to settings for:

Driver Display

Steering force

Powertrain Characteristics

Brake Characteristics

Suspension Control

ECO Climate

Start/Stop.

Related information Speed-dependent steering force (p. 272)

Level control* and shock absorption (p. 405)

Start/Stop (p. 396)

Drive mode ECO (p. 403)

All-wheel drive (p. 406)

Hill descent control (p. 415)

7 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 403

Drive mode ECO Driving mode ECO mode optimises the car's driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and environmentally-conscious driving.

Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ- ment.

The following properties are adapted for Eco driv- ing:

Gearbox gearshift points8.

Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal.

The Eco Coast9 freewheel function is acti- vated and engine braking is deactivated when the accelerator pedal is released at speeds between 65 and 140 km/h (40 and 87 mph).

Some of the climate control system's set- tings work at reduced power or are deacti- vated.

The driver display shows information in an ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally- conscious and fuel-efficient driving.

Selecting ECO mode The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and it must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. The driver

display shows ECO when the function is acti- vated.

With drive mode control*

1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.

> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display.

2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the desired drive mode is highlighted.

3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly on the touch screen to confirm the selection.

In the centre display's function view A car without drive mode con- trol has a function button for Driving mode ECO in the centre display's function view.

Press the button in order to activate the function.

> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

Freewheel function Eco Coast10

The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac- tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with reduced consump- tion.

The function is best used where it is possible to freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight downhill gradient or when there is a predictable speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a lower speed limit.

8 Only cars with automatic gearbox. 9 Only cars with automatic gearbox. 10 Only cars with automatic gearbox.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.404

Activating the freewheel function The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:

Drive mode Eco is activated.

The gear selector is in D position.

Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).

The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%.

The driver display shows COASTING when the freewheel function is being used.

Limitations The freewheel function is not available if:

Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature.

The cruise control is activated.

The gear selector is moved from the D posi- tion and the manual position.

The speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).

The road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6%.

Manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddles*.

Deactivating and switching off the freewheel function In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti- vate or switch off the function in order to use engine braking. Examples of such situations may be on steep downhill gradients or before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to do it in the safest way possible.

Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:

Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.

Move the gear selector to manual position.

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.

Switch off the freewheel function as follows:

Change drive mode*, or switch off the Driving mode ECO in the function view.

Even without the freewheel function, it is possible to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn, reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel economy it is better to have the freewheel func- tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer distances.

ECO gauge in the driver display The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the driving is:

With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a low value with the pointer in the green zone.

With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the gauge shows a high value.

The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show how a reference driver would drive the car under the same driving conditions. This is indicated with the short pointer on the gauge.

Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display.

Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 405

ECO climate control In the Eco drive mode, ECO climate control is activated automatically in the passenger com- partment in order to reduce energy consumption.

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain set- tings can be reset manually, but full function- ality is only regained by switching off the ECO function or adapting Individual* drive mode with full climate functionality.

In the event of difficulties due to misting, press the button for max. defroster which has normal functionality.

Related information Economical driving (p. 425)

Start/Stop (p. 396)

Drive modes* (p. 400)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 194)

Level control* and shock absorption Level control and shock absorption are regula- ted automatically in the car.

With rear level control, the car maintains the same height at the rear regardless of load. Level control can also occur even after the car has been parked.

Shock absorption (Four-C) The shock absorption is adapted according to the selected drive mode and according to the speed of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for the best possible comfort and is regulated con- tinuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration, braking and cornering.

Settings for level control

Deactivation of air suspension and level control In certain cases, the function must be deacti- vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*. The difference in level created by raising the car with a jack can otherwise cause problems for the air suspension.

Deactivating the function via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Suspension .

3. Select Disable Leveling Control.

Change the damping level11

Cars with active chassis (Four-C) and without the drive mode function* can adjust the shock absorption level via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Tap on My Car Drive Mode Suspension Control and select the level.

During transport During transport of the car on a ferry, train or truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres and not around other parts of the chassis. Changes in the air suspension may occur during transport, which could affect the lashing nega- tively.

Related information Drive modes* (p. 400)

Loading (p. 227)

11 Depends on the car's equipment.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.406

All-wheel drive All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time, which improves traction.

To achieve the best possible traction and prevent wheel spin the motive force is distributed auto- matically to the wheels with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for tor- que to the rear wheels, and can immediately redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the rear wheels.

All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is always engaged in preparation for maximum trac- tion during acceleration.

All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on the selected drive mode*.

Related information Drive modes* (p. 400)

Low speed control (p. 414)

Brake functions The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed or prevent the car from rolling.

Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill gradient.

Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available:

Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold)

Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)

Auto braking after a collision

City Safety

Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)

Related information Foot brake (p. 406)

Parking brake (p. 409)

Hill descent control (p. 415)

Hill start assist (p. 412)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)

Auto braking after a collision (p. 409)

Foot brake The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed while driving.

Foot brake system The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will therefore be needed to produce the normal brak- ing effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the foot brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road for increased engine braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

407

Anti-lock braking system The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), which prevent the wheels from locking while braking and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor- mal.

A short test of the ABS system is made automat- ically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto- matic test of the system may be made at low speed. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.

Braking on wet roads When driving for a prolonged period of time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake pedal more forcefully. You should therefore maintain a greater distance to the vehicles in front.

Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic situation when braking.

Braking on salted roads When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. This may extend braking distance. You should there-

fore maintain an extra large safety distance to vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following:

Brake now and again to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking.

Gently depress the brake pedal after finish- ing driving and before starting your next trip.

Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

New and replaced brake linings and brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect until they have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom- mends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: Automatic function check.

Constant glow for more than 2 seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without the ABS function.

WARNING

If both the warning lamps for brake fault and ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

408

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Brake assistance (p. 408)

Brake lights (p. 143)

Emergency brake lights (p. 408)

Emergency brake lights Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func- tion means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds. After emergency braking to a low speed, the brake lights return from flashing to the normal constant glow. The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the hazard warning flashers.

Related information Foot brake (p. 406)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)

Brake lights (p. 143)

Brake assistance The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist System), helps to increase brake force during braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.

The system detects the way in which the driver brakes and increases brake force where neces- sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The function is suspended when the pressure on the brake pedal decreases.

NOTE

When BAS is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary.

When the brake pedal is released, all braking ceases.

Related information Foot brake (p. 406)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 409

Auto braking after a collision In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten- sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat- ically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.

After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no longer possible to control and steer the car. In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli- sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated auto- matically and brakes the car in a safe manner.

Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti- vated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied.

If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelera- tor pedal.

The function assumes that the brake system is intact after the collision.

See also the sections "Rear Collision Warning" and "Blind Spot Information".

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)

Airbags (p. 63)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)

Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)

Parking brake The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.

The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel console between the seats.

A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-operated parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

410

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Using the parking brake (p. 410)

In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 412)

Using the parking brake Use the parking brake to prevent the car from rolling from stationary.

Applying the parking brake

1. Pull the control upward.

> The symbol in the driver display illumi- nates when the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the car is stationary.

Symbol in the driver display

Symbol Specification

The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the mes- sage on the driver display.

Automatic application The parking brake is applied automatically:

if the Auto Hold function (automatic braking when stationary) is activated and the car has been stationary approx. 5 minutes.

when gear position P is selected on a steep hill12.

when the car has been switched off.

Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be applied when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released.

NOTE

An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds.

12 Applies to automatic gearbox.

STARTING AND DRIVING

411

Releasing the parking brake

Releasing manually 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

2. Press the control down.

> The parking brake releases and the sym- bol in the driver display extinguishes.

Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the car.

3. With automatic gearbox:

Select gear position D or R and depress the accelerator pedal.

With manual gearbox:

Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch and depress the accelerator pedal.

> The parking brake releases and the sym- bol in the driver display extinguishes.

Parking on a hill

WARNING

Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not suf- ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa- tions.

If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.

Settings for parking brake

Automatic activation of the parking brake is selected via the centre display.

Automatic activation when the car is switched off:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension and deselect/select the func- tion Auto Activate Parking Brake.

Related information Parking brake (p. 409)

In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 412)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)

STARTING AND DRIVING

412

In the event of a fault in the parking brake Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not possible to release or apply the parking brake after several attempts.

An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake applied.

If the car has to be parked before a possible fault is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox.

Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electrically- operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. See the mes- sage in the driver display.

Fault in brake system. See the message in the driver display.

Information message in driver dis- play.

Message examples:

Parking brake Service required

Parking brake System overheated

Parking brake Temporarily unavailable

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Using the parking brake (p. 410)

Parking brake (p. 409)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 388)

Hill start assist Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre- vents the car from rolling forwards.

The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after sev- eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.

Hill start assist is available even if the function for automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is deactivated.

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)

STARTING AND DRIVING

413

Automatic braking when stationary Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold) means that the driver can release the brake pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.

Function When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti- vated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta- tionary and it works on all gradients. When the accelerator pedal is depressed again, the brakes are released.

When braking to a stop on a downhill or uphill gradient - depress the brake pedal a bit harder before releasing to ensure that the car does not roll at all.

If the driver switches off the engine when the car is stationary, the parking brake is applied.

Automatic deactivation The function is deactivated automatically:

when the driver's door is open and the driv- er's seatbelt is unfastened.

in gear position N13.

Switch for automatic brake

An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

Activate or deactivate Auto Hold with the switch in the tunnel console. The function remains deac- tivated until it is reactivated.

If the function is active and holds the car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu- minated) then the brake pedal must be depressed at the same time as the

button is depressed in order to deactivate.

When the function is deactivated, hill start assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from roll- ing backwards when starting on an uphill gradi- ent.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary.

The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary.

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Hill start assist (p. 412)

13 Applies to automatic gearbox.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.414

Low speed control The low speed control function Low Speed Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp.

In a car with drive mode control*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode.

The function is adapted for off-road driving and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).

With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel- spin and provides better traction on all wheels. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed control at low speed.

The function is activated together with Hill Descent Control (HDC) which means that the speed down steep downhill gradients can be controlled with the accelerator pedal and it reduces the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a low and even speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.

Activating low speed control, LSC The function is activated in different ways depending on the car's equipment.

With drive mode control*

Select the Off Road drive mode in order to activate the function.

Select a different drive mode in order to deactivate.

In the centre display's function view A car without drive mode con- trol has a function button for low speed control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view.

Press the button in order to activate the function.

> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

NOTE

When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed.

NOTE

The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Hill descent control (p. 415)

Drive modes* (p. 400)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 415

Hill descent control Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control (HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced engine braking. The function makes it possible to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake.

In a car with drive mode control*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode.

Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv- ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but can instead focus on steering.

WARNING

HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward, assis- ted by the brake system. The speed can be increased by using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of the gradient of the hill and without the need for

the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are switched on when the function is operating.

The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake.

The function is activated together with Low Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and improves traction for driving off-road and on slip- pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).

Activating hill descent control, HDC Hill descent control only works at low speeds.

The function is activated in different ways depending on the car's equipment.

With drive mode control*

Select the Off Road drive mode in order to activate the function.

Select a different drive mode in order to deactivate. If the drive mode is changed while driving on a steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease.

In the centre display's function view A car without drive mode con- trol has a function button for low speed control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view.

Press the button in order to activate the function.

> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

Points to remember when driving with HDC With automatic gearbox

HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear changing.

It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or higher with manual gear changing.

With manual gearbox

HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse gear (R). There is no active braking in higher gears despite the function not being deacti- vated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.416

NOTE

When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed.

NOTE

The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.

Related information Brake functions (p. 406)

Low speed control (p. 414)

Drive modes* (p. 400)

Driving in water Driving in water means that the car is driven through deep water on a water-covered road- way. Driving in water must be carried out with great caution.

The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 30 cm at a maximum speed of walking pace. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec- tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 30 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubri- cating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.

Damage to any component, engine, transmis- sion, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty.

In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.

Related information Towing (p. 434)

Recovering the car (p. 435)

STARTING AND DRIVING

417

Overheating in the engine and drive system Under special conditions, for example hard driv- ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

In the event of overheating, the engine's power may be limited temporarily.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the temperature in the engine's cooling system becomes too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine temperature High temperature Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down.

If the message Engine temperature High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the engine.

In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an alternative gear shift program will be selected. In addition, a built-in protection function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to lower temperature or Transmission hot

Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the recommendation given, reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

High engine temperature. Follow the recommendation given.

Low level, coolant. Follow the rec- ommendation given.

Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given.

Related information Driving with a trailer under special conditions

(p. 431)

Preparations for a long trip (p. 418)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.418

Overloading the starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni- tion position II when the car is switched off. Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less power.

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

headlamps

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume).

If the starter battery voltage is low, the message 12 V Battery Low charge, will soon enter power save mode is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down cer- tain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

Related information Ignition positions (p. 385)

Starter battery (p. 534)

Preparations for a long trip Before a driving holiday or some other type of long journey, it is important to check the car's functions and equipment particularly carefully.

Check that:

the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal

there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)

all bulbs are working

the tyres have sufficient tread depth and pressure

a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are located in the car - legally required in certain countries

the wiper blades are in good condition.

Related information Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

(p. 573)

Checking the tyre pressures (p. 488)

Filling washer fluid (p. 533)

Winter driving (p. 419)

Economical driving (p. 425)

Settings for car modem* (p. 472)

Loading (p. 227)

Pilot Assist* (p. 304)

Speed limiter* (p. 277)

Speed camera information* (p. 350)

Driving with a trailer (p. 429)

Driving in water (p. 416)

Alarm* (p. 262)

Level control* and shock absorption (p. 405)

Warning triangle (p. 504)

Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)

Spare wheel* (p. 502)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 419

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform cer- tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely.

Check the following in particular before the cold season:

The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel con- sumption while the engine is cold. Read more about suitable oils in the section "Adverse driving conditions for engine oil".

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter

battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

Slippery driving conditions To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con- trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

Related information Topping up coolant (p. 522)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 569)

Starter battery (p. 534)

Winter wheels (p. 503)

Filling washer fluid (p. 533)

Replacing a wiper blade (p. 532)

Parking climate* (p. 206)

Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 194)

Drive modes* (p. 400)

Foot brake (p. 406)

All-wheel drive (p. 406)

Electronic stability control (p. 273)

STARTING AND DRIVING

420

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refuelling The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system.

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to be opened.

In the driver display, the arrow next to the tank symbol indi- cates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located.

1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap.

2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap with a gentle press.

Refuelling at a petrol station

Refuelling is carried out as follows.

1. Open the fuel filler flap.

2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier14 on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and the identifier in the sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respec- tively.

3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open- ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started.

4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.

> The tank is full.

NOTE

Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Filling with a fuel can15

When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

1. Open the fuel filler flap.

2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started.

Label Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is in a filling station area.

14 The identifier, in accordance with the CEN standard prEN16942, is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe.

15 Only applies to a car with diesel engine.

STARTING AND DRIVING

421

Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Related information Handling of fuel (p. 421)

Petrol (p. 422)

Diesel (p. 423)

Handling of fuel Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec- ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi- cal attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe- thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten- tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- ted.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Petrol (p. 422)

Diesel (p. 423)

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- elling (p. 420)

Economical driving (p. 425)

STARTING AND DRIVING

422

Petrol Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a petrol engine.

Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard.

Identifier for petrol The identifier16 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe.

These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:

E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7% oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol.

E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7% oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol.

IMPORTANT

Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted.

EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use.

Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not per- mitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.

Octane rating 95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recom- mended for optimum performance and fuel econ- omy.

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag- ing the catalytic converter.

Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used.

Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.

Related information Handling of fuel (p. 421)

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- elling (p. 420)

16 In accordance with CEN standard prEN16942.

STARTING AND DRIVING

423

Diesel Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a diesel engine.

Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul- phur and metals.

Identifier The identifier17 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe.

This is the identifier that applies for current standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following identifiers may be used in cars with diesel engine:

B7 is diesel with maximum 7 volume % fatty acid methyl ester (FAME).

At low temperatures (lower than 0 C) a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may

lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, paraffin precip- itate may occur.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled.

When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.

IMPORTANT

Diesel fuel must:

fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 standards

have a sulphur content not exceeding 10 mg/kg

have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME18

(B7).

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

Special additives

Marine diesel fuel

Heating oil

FAME19 and vegetable oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Related information Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 424)

Diesel particulate filter (p. 424)

17 CEN standard prEN16942. 18 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester 19 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.

STARTING AND DRIVING

424

Empty tank and diesel engine Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva- tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check.

Before starting the engine after the fuel tank has been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:

1. The remote control key must be inside the car.

2. Set the car in ignition position II - turn the ignition dial to START without depressing the brake pedal and hold the knob in the START position for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position.

3. Wait approx. one minute.

4. To start the engine: Depress the brake pedal and turn the ignition dial to START again.

NOTE

Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:

Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.

Points to remember when filling with a fuel can When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the cover before filling can begin.

Related information Diesel (p. 423)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 573)

Diesel particulate filter Diesel-driven cars are equipped with a particu- late filter, which results in more efficient emis- sion control.

The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. So-called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.

Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con- sumption may increase slightly during regenera- tion.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particulate filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approx. 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle illuminates, and the message Particulate filter full See Owner's manual is shown in the driver display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motorway.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 425

The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

The following may arise during regeneration:

a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily

fuel consumption may increase temporar- ily

a smell of burning may arise.

When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the fil- ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.

Related information Diesel (p. 423)

Economical driving Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv- ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing condi- tions.

For lower fuel consumption, activate ECO drive mode.

Use the Eco Coast20 freewheel function - engine braking will cease and the car's kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for longer distances.

Drive in the highest gear21 possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption. Use the gear shift indicator.

Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis- tance to other vehicles and objects to mini- mise braking.

High speed results in increased fuel con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.

Do not run the engine to operating tempera- ture at idling speed, but rather drive with a normal load right after starting - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results.

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the consump- tion.

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

A roof load and space box increase wind resistance, leading to higher consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.

Avoid driving with open windows.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

Related information Drive mode ECO (p. 403)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 573)

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)

20 See the section "Drive mode ECO". 21 Applies to driving with manual gear changing.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.426

Towing bracket* The car can be equipped with a towing bracket that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer after the car.

There may be different towing bracket variants available for the car; contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

For information on towing capacity and towball load, see the section "Towing capacity and tow- ball load".

IMPORTANT

When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery.

IMPORTANT

The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri- cation with grease in order to prevent wear.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 429)

Towing capacity and towball load (p. 565)

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 432)

Towing bracket specifications* (p. 428)

Extendable/retractable towing brackets* (p. 426)

Extendable/retractable towing brackets* The extendable/retractable towing hitch is always easily accessible and simple to extend or retract as needed. In the retracted position, the towing hitch is completely concealed.

WARNING

Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towing bracket carefully.

Extending the towing hitch

WARNING

Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

427

1. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the right- hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An indicator lamp in the button must illuminate with a constant orange glow for the exten- sion function to be active.

2. Press and release the button - extension might not start if the button is pressed for too long.

> The towbar extends out and down in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp flashes orange.

WARNING

Do not press the extend/retract button if a trailer is attached to the towing bracket.

NOTE

The towbar must finish the extension proce- dure before it can then be moved to locked position. This procedure may take several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked position, wait a few seconds and try again.

3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it is secured and locked in place - the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.

> The towbar is ready for use.

WARNING

Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.

NOTE

Power save mode activates after a while and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening the tail- gate. This applies when retracting or extend- ing the towing bracket.

If the car detects a connected trailer electri- cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.428

Retracting the towing hitch

IMPORTANT

Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the tow- ing bracket.

1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the but- ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area - retraction might not start if the button is pressed for too long.

> The towing bracket automatically lowers in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp in the button flashes orange.

2. Lock the towing bracket by moving it back to its retracted position, where it is locked.

> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with a constant glow if the towing bracket is correctly retracted.

Related information Towing bracket* (p. 426)

Towing bracket specifications* (p. 428)

Towing bracket specifications* Dimensions and mounting points for the towing bracket.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 429

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 1204,1

B 80.5

C 875

D 437,5

E See the image above

F 286.2

G Ball centre

Related information Towing bracket* (p. 426)

Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about regar- ding the towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- load by a corresponding weight.

The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For more information on tyre pressure, see the section "Approved tyre pressures".

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

Follow the regulations in force for the permit- ted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

The maximum trailer weights given only apply to altitudes up to 1000 metres above sea level. At higher altitudes, engine power and thus the car's climbing ability is decreased due to the reduced air density, and the maxi- mum trailer weight must therefore be reduced. The weight of the car and trailer must be decreased by 10 % for each addi- tional 1000 m (or part thereof).

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- ably increase the car's fuel consumption.

Trailer connector An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.430

IMPORTANT

When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery.

Trailer weights Information about Volvo's permitted trailer weights is available in the article "Towing capacity and towball load".

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display

shows a symbol and a message. Other lamps on the trailer must be checked manually by the driver before departure, see the heading "Check- ing trailer lamps".

Symbol Message

Trailer turn indicator Right turn indicator malfunction

Trailer turn indicator Left turn indicator malfunction

Trailer brake light Malfunc- tion

If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than nor- mal.

Checking trailer lamps* Automatic checking After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi- ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via an automatic lamp activation. The function helps the driver check that the trailer lamps are working before starting off.

The engine must be switched off to perform the check.

1. When a trailer is connected to the towing bracket, the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver dis- play.

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

> The lamp check starts.

3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.

> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time.

4. Visually check that all lamps available on the trailer are operational.

5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash again.

> The check is complete.

Switching off automatic checking The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.

3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 431

Manual checking If the automatic checking is switched off then it is possible to start the check manually.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.

3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.

> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.

Level control* The car's system for level control endeavours to maintain a constant height regardless of load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.

Related information Driving with a trailer under special conditions

(p. 431)

Towing capacity and towball load (p. 565)

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 432)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

Towing bracket* (p. 426)

Driving with a trailer under special conditions When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

In the event of overheating, a warning symbol illu- minates in the driver display together with a mes- sage, see section "Overheating in the engine and drive system".

The following only applies to cars with automatic gearbox.

The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.

Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed.

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Select gear position P.

4. Release the brake pedal.

Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.

2. Select gear position D.

3. Releasing the parking brake.

4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 429)

Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 417)

Low speed control (p. 414)

Using the parking brake (p. 410)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.432

Trailer Stability Assist* The function of the trailer stability assist Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) is to stabilise cars with attached trailers in situations where they begin snaking. The function is included in the stability

system ESC22.

Reasons for snaking The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur- face or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.

Trailer Stability Assist function The trailer stability assist function continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral

movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta- bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time that trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/ trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combi- nation is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full con- trol of the car.

NOTE

The stability function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode by deactivating ESC via the menu system in the centre dis- play.

The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa- tion the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snak- ing.

When trailer stability assist is operating, the ESC symbol flashes in the driver display.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 429)

Driving with a trailer under special conditions (p. 431)

Electronic stability control (p. 273)

22 Electronic Stability Control (Electronic stability control)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 433

Towing eye Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.

Fitting the towing eye

Take out the towing eye from the foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

Front: Remove the cover.

> The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed.

Rear: Remove the cover - press on the mark- ing with a finger and, at the same time, fold out the opposite side/corner using a coin or similar.

> The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed.

4. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops. Tighten the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench*.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

IMPORTANT

It is important that the towing eye is firmly screwed into place - right in until it stops.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

434

The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance deter- mine whether it is possible.

If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye.

If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye.

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

Related information Towing (p. 434)

Recovering the car (p. 435)

Towing During towing, one vehicle pulls another vehicle along behind it by means of a towline.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins.

Preparations and towing 1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.

2. Secure the towline in the towing eye.

3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the car.

NOTE

In ignition position II the steering lock is deactivated if the car has been unlocked. See section Ignition position for more informa- tion.

4. Set the car in ignition position II by turning the ignition dial to START and holding the ignition dial in the START position for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position.

5. Move the gear selector to neutral position N and release the parking brake.

> The towing vehicle can now start towing.

6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi- cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen- tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

7. Be prepared to brake to stop.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Do not tow cars with automatic transmis- sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km.

WARNING

Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.

Ignition position II must be active - in ignition position I all airbags are deacti- vated.

Always keep the remote control key in the car when it is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 435

Jump starting Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start.

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damaged dur- ing attempts to tow-start the engine.

Related information Warning triangle (p. 504)

Towing eye (p. 433)

Recovering the car (p. 435)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 388)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Recovering the car For recovery, the car is taken away with the help of another vehicle.

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.

Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension , this must be disa- bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the function via the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Suspension .

3. Select Disable Leveling Control.

The car's position and ground clearance deter- mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi- cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device.

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.

Related information Towing (p. 434)

Towing eye (p. 433)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.438

Audio and media The audio and media system consists of media player, radio and Bluetooth phone connection. With an online car it is also possible to listen to services via apps.

Functions can be controlled by voice command or via the steering wheel keypad and the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on which audio system the car is equipped with.

Overview of audio and media.

System updating The audio and media system is continuously improved. When the car is online there is the option to download updates for optimal function- ality, see the section "System updates" and support.volvocars.com.

Related information Media player (p. 446)

Radio (p. 440)

Phone (p. 460)

Online car* (p. 467)

Apps (p. 438)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

Voice recognition (p. 115)

System updates (p. 513)

License agreement for audio and media (p. 474)

Apps Applications (apps) facilitate access to some of the car's services.

Application view.

Some basic apps are always available. When the car is online it is possible to download more. The apps that are available to download vary, but can include Internet radio and music services.

Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory. 439

Tap on an app in the app view to launch it.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 472)

Changing settings for apps (p. 178)

Audio settings The audio system is preset for optimal sound reproduction, but can be adapted according to needs.

The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the right- hand steering wheel keypad.

Setting for optimal sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi- nation of car model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the setting of the volume control and vehicle speed.

Audio settings are described in the correspond- ing section in the owner information. To access the settings, open the top view and tap on

Settings Sound.

Active noise reduction* Certain cars are equipped with an active noise reduction function that suppresses engine noise in the passenger compartment via the audio sys- tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup- tive noise and the audio system outputs anti- noise in order to dampen the noise.

Microphones in the car's roof.

NOTE

Do not cover the car's microphones; other- wise a rumbling sound from the audio system may be produced.

Related information Audio settings for media (p. 452)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

Audio and media (p. 438)

Online car* (p. 467)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.440

Radio It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online it is also possible to listen to Internet radio.

The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.

Related information Changing and searching radio stations

(p. 440)

Digital radio (p. 444)

RDS radio (p. 443)

Online car* (p. 467)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Media player (p. 446)

Changing and searching radio stations The radio automatically compiles a station list of the radio stations within the area that are trans- mitting the strongest signals.

Starting the radio

1. Open the app (e.g. FM) from the app view.

2. Select station.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

441

Changing lists within the frequency band

1. Press Library.

2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Genres or Ensembles1.

3. Tap on the desired station from the list.

Favourites only plays back selected favourite channels, see heading Favourites below.

Genres only plays back channels broadcast- ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop or classical.

Changing stations within the selected list Press on < > under the centre display or the

steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

> The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist.

You can also change stations from the centre display.

Favourites When a favourite is saved from a list, the radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency.

To choose among favourites within the frequency band, see the heading Changing lists within the frequency band above. To choose from among all favourites, see the heading Radio Favourites below.

Tap on to add or remove a channel to or from frequency band favourites and Radio Favourites.

Radio Favourites Radio Favourites shows saved favourites from all frequency bands.

1. Open the app Radio favourites from the app view.

2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start listening.

When you remove a favourite, it will also be removed from frequency band favourites.

1 Only applies to digital radio (DAB).

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

442

Changing radio band

Tap on the app (such as FM) from app view, or open the app menu with the right-hand steering wheel keypad and select from there.

Searching for radio stations

The parameters you can search on depend on the frequency band selected:

AM station and frequency.

FM station, genre and frequency.

DAB - ensembles and stations.

1. Press Library.

2. Press .

> Search view with keyboard is opened.

3. Enter the search terms.

> Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category.

Manual tuning

On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when reception is poor.

Tap on Manual tuning, pull the control or tap on < > to the desired frequency.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

443

Related information Radio (p. 440)

Digital radio (p. 444)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

RDS radio With RDS (Radio Data System) the radio can automatically change to the strongest transmit- ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic information and to search for certain programme types.

RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:

Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.

Search for programme category, e.g. pro- gramme types or traffic information.

Receive text information on current radio programme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality.

When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To

go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the cen- tre display.

Related information Radio (p. 440)

Settings for radio (p. 445)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

444

Digital radio Digital radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting, DAB) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB (Digital Multimedia Broadcasting).

The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.

The digital radio app is launched from app view in the centre display.

Digital radio plays back in the same way as FM and AM, see section "Changing and searching for radio stations". Besides the options to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select play- back from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency.

In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies).

DAB subchannel Secondary components are usually named sub- channels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels are indicated with an arrow symbol in the channel list.

Related information Changing and searching radio stations

(p. 440)

Linking between different radio bands FM and DAB (p. 444)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Radio (p. 440)

Settings for radio (p. 445)

Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 173)

Linking between different radio bands FM and DAB The function enables the digital radio to switch from a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group (ensem- ble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and FM.

DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Media DAB.

3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/ deactivate the respective functions.

Related information Digital radio (p. 444)

Radio (p. 440)

Settings for radio (p. 445)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

445

Settings for radio Settings for the different radio bands.

The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be

temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping on Cancel in the centre display.

Drag down the top view and select Settings Media and the desired radio band. Activating/ deactivating functions.

AM/FM Show Broadcast Information shows

information on programme content, artists, etc.

Freeze Program Name select to stop the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 sec- onds.

News - interrupts the current media play- back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre- vious media source is resumed when the news broadcast is finished.

Traffic Announcements - interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts infor- mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.

Local Interruptions interrupts the cur- rent media playback and broadcasts informa- tion about traffic disruptions in the neigh-

bourhood. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions function is a geo- graphically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic Announcements function must be acti- vated at the same time.

Alarm - interrupts the current media play- back and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is fin- ished.

DAB Sort Services - selection for how channels

will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service number.

DAB To DAB Handover - starts the func- tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio channel is lost, another channel is found automatically in another channel group (ensemble).

DAB To FM Handover - starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If reception of a radio channel is lost, an alternative fre- quency is searched for automatically.

Select Announcements select the types of messages to be received while DAB is playing. Selected messages will interrupt the current media playback to play back the message. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.

Alarm - interrupts the current media play- back and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is fin- ished.

Traffic Flash receives information about traffic disruptions.

News Flash receives news.

Transport Flash receives information about public transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables.

Warning/Services receives information about incidents of lower significance than the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.

Show Broadcast Information select to show radio text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist.

Show Program Related Images select whether or not to show images for pro- grammes on the screen.

Related information Radio (p. 440)

Digital radio (p. 444)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.446

Media player The media player can play back audio from CDs* and externally connected audio sources via the AUX/USB input or wirelessly stream audio files from external devices via Bluetooth. Video can be watched from USB connected devices. In an Online connected car, it is possi- ble to listen to Internet radio, audiobooks and music services via apps.

The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section.

The media player is controlled from the centre display, but several functions can be con- trolled from the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or by voice recognition control.

Related information Media playback (p. 447)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Apps (p. 438)

Radio (p. 440)

CD player* (p. 450)

Media via Bluetooth (p. 451)

Media via AUX/USB input (p. 451)

video (p. 452)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 447

Media playback The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be controlled from the right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice recognition.

The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section.

Starting the media source

CD* 1. Insert a CD.

2. Open the app CD from the app view.

3. Select what to play back.

> Playback begins.

USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory.

2. Open the app USB from the app view.

3. Select what to play back.

> Playback begins.

Mp3 player and iPod

NOTE

To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app (not USB).

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

1. Connect media source.

2. Start playback from the connected media source.

3. Open the app (iPod, USB, AUX) from the app view.

> Playback begins.

Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.

2. Connect media source.

3. Start playback from the connected media source.

4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view.

> Playback begins.

Internet media 1. Connecting the car.

2. Open the app from the app view.

> Playback begins.

video 1. Connect media source.

2. Open the app USB from the app view.

3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back.

> Playback begins.

Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay is described in a separate section.

Controlling and changing media The media player can be oper- ated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.448

Volume - turn the control knob under the centre

display or press on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase or decrease the volume.

Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the song being played, the button under the centre

display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Change track/song - tap on the desired track in

the centre display, press on under the cen-

tre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis in the centre display and drag sideways, or press

and hold depressed under the centre dis- play or on the steering wheel's right-hand key- pad.

Changing media - select under Recent sources in the app, and in the app view, tap on the desired app, or select using the steering wheel's

right-hand keypad via the app menu .

Library - tap on the button to play back from the library.

Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the play- back order.

Similar - tap on the button in order to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and to create a playlist from it. The playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs.

Change device - tap on the button in order to switch between USB devices when several are connected.

Settings for video With the video player in full screen mode, or by

opening the top view and pressing Settings Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio Language, Off and Subtitle Language.

Playing back DivX

This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on- Demand (VOD) films.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Tap Video DivX VOD and retrieve the registration code.

3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and to complete the registration.

Related information Using the application menu in the driver dis-

play (p. 105)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Apps (p. 438)

Searching media (p. 450)

Connecting media via Bluetooth (p. 451)

Connecting media via AUX/USB input (p. 452)

CD player* (p. 450)

Radio (p. 440)

Gracenote (p. 449)

video (p. 452)

Audio settings for media (p. 452)

TV* (p. 453)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory. 449

Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)

Technical specifications for media (p. 459) Gracenote

Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles and associated images, which are shown during playback.

Gracenote MusicID is a standard for music rec- ognition.

Activate/deactivate Gracenote On activation, Gracenote data replace the original data.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Media Gracenote.

3. Activate/deactivate Gracenote by ticking/ unticking the box for Gracenote.

4. Select settings for activated Gracenote data:

Gracenote Online Search - searches in Gracenote's online database for playing media.

Gracenote Multiple Results - selects how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results.

1 - the file's original data are used.

2 - Gracenote data are used.

3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected.

None - no results are shown.

Updating Gracenote The content of the Gracenote database is upda- ted continuously. Download the latest update for optimal functionality. For information and down- load, see support.volvocars.com.

Related information Media playback (p. 447)

License agreement for audio and media (p. 474)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.450

Searching media It is possible to search by artist, composer, song (titles), album, video, audiobook, playlist and, when the car is online, podcasts (digital media via Internet).

1. Press .

> Search view with keyboard is opened.

2. Enter the search terms.

3. Press Search.

> Connected devices are searched and the search results are listed by category.

Swipe sideways across the screen to show each category separately.

Related information Media player (p. 446)

Media playback (p. 447)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Online car* (p. 467)

CD player* The media player can play back CD discs with audio files. See technical specifications for sup- ported formats.

Disc insert and eject slot.

Disc eject button.

Related information Media playback (p. 447)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Media player (p. 446)

Technical specifications for media (p. 459)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory. 451

Media via Bluetooth The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with Bluetooth, such as mobile phones and PDAs.

Related information Connecting media via Bluetooth (p. 451)

Media playback (p. 447)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Media player (p. 446)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Technical specifications for media (p. 459)

Connecting media via Bluetooth Connect a Bluetooth device with the car in order to stream media and use as Internet connection if it is available.

Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

The procedure for connecting a media device is the same as for connecting a phone.

Related information Connect phone (p. 461)

Media via Bluetooth (p. 451)

Media playback (p. 447)

Media player (p. 446)

Media via AUX/USB input An external media source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system.

A media source with rechargeable batteries is recharged when connected via USB and when the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is run- ning.

To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, only store compatible formats on it. It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that contains anything other than compatible formats. In addition to audio, the media player also sup- ports video playback when the device is con- nected via USB.

Some MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system.

Related information Connecting media via AUX/USB input

(p. 452)

Media playback (p. 447)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Media player (p. 446)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

video (p. 452)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)

Technical specifications for media (p. 459)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.452

Connecting media via AUX/USB input An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via any of the connectors in the tunnel console. The cable must be routed out in the front to avoid being trapped when the hatch is closed.

In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used for connecting a phone when it will be used for Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Related information Media playback (p. 447)

Media via AUX/USB input (p. 451)

Media player (p. 446)

Technical specifications for media (p. 459)

video Video from a USB-connected device can be played back with the media player.

There will be no picture when the car is moving, but the audio continues to be played back. The picture returns when the car is stationary.

See section "Technical specifications for media" for supported video formats.

Related information Media playback (p. 447)

Media player (p. 446)

Technical specifications for media (p. 459)

Audio settings for media Personalisation of audio settings for media play- back.

Audio mode that recreates the acoustics from Gothen- burg Concert Hall.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Tap on Sound and select settings:

Sound Experience* more audio play- back options, e.g. playback with concert hall feel. Settings replace any selections made in accordance with the points below for audio settings.

Tone personal settings for bass, treble, equaliser, etc.

Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/ rear loudspeakers.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 453

System volumes for media 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Sound System Volumes:

AUX - If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player or iPod) is connected to the AUX input then the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjusting the volume of the input. If the volume is too high or too low then the quality of the sound can be impaired.

Speed and Volume Compensation - the audio system compensates for dis- rupting noises in the passenger compart- ment by increasing the volume in relation to the speed of the car. Compensation level can be set.

Related information Audio settings (p. 439)

Media player (p. 446)

TV*2

The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary. There will be no picture when the car is moving, but the audio continues to be played back. The picture returns once more when the car is almost or completely stationary.

The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev- eral functions can also be controlled from the right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice recognition.

Related information Using the TV* (p. 453)

Using the TV*3

Start the TV 1. Open the app TV from the app view.

2. Select a channel.

Change or search for TV channels The TV automatically searches for the channels with best reception.

Change the list of visible channels 1. Press Library

2. Select playback from TV-channels, Favourites or Genres.

3. Select the desired channel.

Change channel from selected list Press on <> under the centre display or on

the steering wheel keypad.

> The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist

You can also change stations from the centre display.

Favourites A TV channel can be saved as a Favourite:

Tap on in order to add/remove a chan- nel to/from the favourites list.

2 Applies to certain markets. 3 Applies to certain markets.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.454

TV guide A programme guide is available with information about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.

Tap on Guide to show information about TV programmes.

NOTE

If the car is moved within the country, e.g. from city to city, it is not certain that Favourites are available since the frequency may have changed.

Change the format of the TV picture Tapping on Picture format enables you to choose which format the TV picture should be shown in.

1. Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image format being transmitted.

2. Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with- out cropping.

Settings for TV The option to make certain settings is available, both in the top view or when TV-viewing takes place in full screen mode.

With the video player in full screen mode, or by

opening the top view and pressing Settings

Media TV, the following can be adjusted:

Subtitle Language

Audio Language

NOTE

The system only supports TV broadcasts in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2 standard. The system does not support ana- logue broadcasts.

Related information TV* (p. 453)

Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 118)

Media playback (p. 447)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40)

License agreement for audio and media (p. 474)

Apple CarPlay* Apple CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions, send/ receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay focused on your driving. Apple CarPlay works with selected Apple devices.

If the car is not already equipped with Apple CarPlay then it is possible to install it after- wards. Contact a Volvo dealer to install Apple CarPlay.

Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible with Apple CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Apple CarPlay.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 455

When using map navigation via Apple CarPlay there is no guidance in the driver display or head- up display, but only in the centre display.

The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, mobile phone or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel

button starts voice control using Siri and a short press activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel

button depressed.

By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay, certain information from your car (including its position) is transferred to your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are fully responsible for your and any others persons use of Apple CarPlay.

Related information Media player (p. 446)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 455)

Using Apple CarPlay* To use Apple CarPlay, Siri voice control must be activated in your phone.

Connecting iPhone to Apple CarPlay

NOTE

Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is deactivated. A phone or media player con- nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is active. An alternative Internet source must be used to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.

2. Read the information in the pop-up message and then tap on OK.

3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.

4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect.

> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.

5. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

Starting Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay is started according to the follow- ing, only after an iPhone has been connected.

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.

> If the setting for automatic start is selected - the subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.

2. If the subview with Apple CarPlay is not opened, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.

> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.

3. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

Apple CarPlay runs in the background if another app is started in the same subview. To show Apple CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the Apple CarPlay icon in the app view.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.456

Switch the connection between Apple CarPlay and iPod

Apple CarPlay to iPod 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Apple CarPlay.

3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall no longer start Apple CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is connected.

4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the USB input.

5. Open the app iPod from the app view.

iPod to Apple CarPlay 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.

2. Read the information in the pop-up message and then tap on OK.

3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the USB input.

> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.

Related information Media player (p. 446)

Media playback (p. 447)

Connecting media via AUX/USB input (p. 452)

Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 456)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Settings for Apple CarPlay* Settings for phone connected as Apple CarPlay.

Automatic start 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Apple CarPlay and select setting:

Tick the box - Apple CarPlay starts auto- matically when the USB cable is con- nected.

Untick the box - Apple CarPlay does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected.

A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted.

A factory reset is required in order to delete the list, see the section "Resetting settings in the settings view".

System volumes 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following:

Voice Control

Navi Voice Guidance

Phone Ringtone

Related information Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)

Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 173)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 457

Android Auto* Android Auto gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions and use programs from an Android device. Android Auto works with selected Android devices.

Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on the website: www.android.com/auto/. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Android Auto.

Android Auto is started from the app view. After Android Auto has been started once, the applica- tion will be started automatically the next time the device is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated under settings.

NOTE

When a phone is connected to Android Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to another media player. Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is being used.

When using map navigation via Android Auto there is no guidance in the driver display or head- up display, but only in the centre display.

The Android Auto apps can be controlled via the centre display, a mobile phone, or with the steer- ing wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). It is also possible to control Android Auto using voice control so that you can focus on the road. A long press on the steering

wheel button starts voice recognition control and a short press deactivates.

By using Android Auto, you acknowledge the following: Android Auto is a service provided by Google Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for Android Auto or its features or applications. When you use Android Auto, your car transfers certain information (including its location) to your connected Android phone. You are fully responsible for your and any other persons use of Android Auto.

Starting Android Auto

The first time an Android is connected 1. Connect the Android to the USB port. In the

cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.

2. Read the information in the pop-up message and then tap on OK.

3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view.

4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect.

> The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.

5. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.458

Previously connected Android 1. Connect the phone to the USB input.

> If the setting for automatic start is selected - the subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.

2. If the setting for automatic start is not selected - open the Android Auto app from the app view.

> The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.

3. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

Android Auto runs in the background if another app is started in the same subview. To show Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the Android Auto icon in the app view.

Related information Media player (p. 446)

Media playback (p. 447)

Connecting media via AUX/USB input (p. 452)

Settings for Android Auto* (p. 458)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Settings for Android Auto* Settings for a phone that has been connected the first time with Android Auto.

Automatic start 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Android Auto and select setting:

Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto- matically when the USB cable is con- nected.

Untick the box - Android Auto does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected.

A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted.

A factory reset is required in order to delete the list, see the section "Resetting settings in the settings view".

System volumes 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following:

Voice Control

Navi Voice Guidance

Phone Ringtone

Related information Android Auto* (p. 457)

Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 173)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

459

Technical specifications for media Compatible file formats, audio specifications and USB.

Audio files

For-

mat

File extension Codec

MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible)

AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2)

WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro

WAV .wav LPCM

FLAC .flac FLAC

Video files

Format File extension

MP4 .mp4, m4v

MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

Format File extension

AVI .avi

AVI (DivX) .avi, divx

ASF .asf, .wmv

MKV .mkv

Subtitles

Format File extension

SubViewer .sub

SubRip .srt

SSA .ssa

DivX

DivX certified devices have been tested for high- quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play DivX films.

Profile DivX Home Theater

Video codec DivX, MPEG-4

Resolution 720x576

Bit rate 4.8Mbps

Frame rate 30 fps

File extension .divx, .avi

Max file size 4 GB

Audio codec MP3, AC3

Subtitles XSUB

Special func- tions

Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play

Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX Home Theater pro- file. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX Home Theater video.

Storage on USB device In order for the system to read the USB device correctly, the following specifications must be fol- lowed. No folder structure will be shown in the centre display during playback.

Max number

Files 15000

Folders 1000

Folder levels 8

Playlists 100

Items in a playlist 1000

Subfolders No limit

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

460

Technical specification for USB connector Type A socket

Version 2.0

Voltage supply 5 V

Current supply max. 2.1 A

Related information Media player (p. 446)

Media playback (p. 447)

Phone A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands- free system.

The audio and media system acts as a handsfree, with the facility to remotely control a selection of the mobile phone's functions. The mobile phone can still be operated with its own keys if it is con- nected to the car.

When a mobile phone has been connected with the car and connected, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, stream media and pro- vide an Internet connection.

The phone is operated from the centre display, but some opera- tions are also available via voice recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the right-hand steering wheel key- pad.

Overview

Microphone.

Mobile phone.

Phone operation from centre display.

Keypad for operating phone functions that are shown in the driver display and voice rec- ognition.

Driver display.

Related information Connect phone (p. 461)

Connecting/disconnecting the phone (p. 462)

Managing phone calls (p. 463)

Managing text messages (p. 465)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

461

Settings for text messages (p. 467)

Bluetooth settings (p. 467)

Voice recognition (p. 115)

Using the application menu in the driver dis- play (p. 105)

Media player (p. 446)

Connect phone Connect a Bluetooth-activated phone to the car to make calls, send/receive messages, stream media and connect the car to the Internet.

It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con- nected at once, in which case one of them can only be streaming media. The most recently con- nected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, stream media and provide an Internet connection. To change the use of the phone, see section "Bluetooth settings".

Connection is performed once per device. After connection, the Bluetooth device no longer needs to be visible/searchable but only needs to have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to the Internet via a phone, tethering must be acti- vated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car.

There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car from the phone.

Option 1 - search phone from car 1. Make the phone searchable/visible via

Bluetooth.

2. To connect the car to the Internet via the phones Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta- ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone.

3. Open the subview for phone.

If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone.

If there is a phone connected to the car,

tap on Change . In the pop-up win- dow, tap on Add phone.

> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The list is updated as new devices are detected.

4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- nected.

5. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the phone. In which case, choose to accept in both places.

6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages.

NOTE

The message function must be activated in some phones.

Not all mobile phones are compatible and can show contacts and messages in the car.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.462

Option 2 - search car from phone 1. Open the subview for phone.

If there is no phone connected to the car,

tap on Add phone Make car discoverable.

If there is a phone connected to the car,

tap on Change . In the pop-up win-

dow, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable.

2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.

3. To connect the car to the Internet via the phones Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta- ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone.

4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.

> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.

5. Select the name of the car on the phone.

6. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the external device. In which case, choose to accept in both places.

7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages.

NOTE

The message function must be activated in some phones.

Not all mobile phones are compatible and can show contacts and messages in the car.

NOTE

If the phone's operating system is updated then the connection may be broken. In which case, delete the phone from the car and then connect again.

Compatible phones Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

Related information Phone (p. 460)

Connecting/disconnecting the phone (p. 462)

Bluetooth settings (p. 467)

Managing phone calls (p. 463)

Managing text messages (p. 465)

Online car* (p. 467)

Connecting/disconnecting the phone Connect, change or disconnect a connected phone.

Connecting the phone automatically It is only the two last connected phones that can be connected automatically.

1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set- ting the car in ignition position I.

To connect the car to the Internet at the same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- spot) in the phone must be activated.

2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher.

> The phone will connect.

Connect the phone manually 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.

To connect the car to the Internet at the same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- spot) in the phone must be activated.

2. Open the subview for phone.

> Connected phones are listed.

3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- nected.

> The phone will connect.

Disconnecting the phone Deactivate Bluetooth on the phone.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 463

When the phone is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call then the call can be continued on the phone.

Changing phones 1. Open the subview for phone.

2. Press Change .

> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.

3. Tap on the phone to be connected.

Removing a phone 1. Open the subview for phone.

2. Press Settings Communication Bluetooth Devices.

> A list of connected Bluetooth devices is displayed.

3. Tap on the phone to be removed.

4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your selection.

> The phone is no longer connected with the car.

Related information Phone (p. 460)

Connect phone (p. 461)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

Bluetooth settings (p. 467)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Online car* (p. 467) Managing phone calls Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- nected phone.

Making phone calls 1. Open the subview for phone.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

464

2. Select call from: call history, enter number using the keypad or via the contact list. It is possible to search or browse in the contact

list. Tap on in the contact list in order to add a contact under Favourites.

3. Tap on Call or .

4. Tap on End call to end the call.

You can also make calls from the call log via the app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand

steering wheel keypad .

Making multi-party calls During a call:

1. Press Add call.

2. Choose to make a call from the call log, favourites or the contact list.

3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on

alongside the contact in the contact list.

4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the parties.

5. Tap on End call to end the active call.

Conference calls During an active multi-party call:

1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi- party call.

2. Tap on End call to end the call.

Incoming phone calls Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis- play and the centre display. Manage the call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display.

1. Tap on Answer/Reject.

2. Tap on End call to end the call.

Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject.

2. Tap on End call to end the call.

Private call During the current call, press Privacy and

select setting:

Switch to mobile phone - the hands- free function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone.

Driver focused - the microphone in the roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function.

Related information Phone (p. 460)

Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 118)

Using the application menu in the driver dis- play (p. 105)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

465

Managing text messages Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth- connected phone.

On certain phones the message function must be activated. Not all mobiles are fully compatible and capable of displaying contacts and messages in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

Reading a text message in the centre display

1. In app view, tap on Messages to open it.

2. Press Read out to have the message read out, or press on the message you would like read.

Reading a new text message in the driver display A text message is only shown in the driver display if the option is selected, see section "Settings for text messages".

To have the message read out - select Read out using the steering wheel keypad.

Send text message

1. In app view, tap on Messages to open it.

2. Reply to message tap on the contact whose message you wish to reply to, then tap on Answer.

Create a new message tap on Create

new +. Select a contact or enter a number.

3. Compose the message.

4. Press Send.

Message notification For notification settings, see section "Settings for text messages".

Related information Phone (p. 460)

Settings for text messages (p. 467)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 118)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.466

Managing the phone book Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- nected phone.

Browse between the letters and to find a matching contact. Depending on existing

contacts in the phone book, only matching letters are shown.

Search contacts - tap on to search for a phone number of name in the contact list.

Favourites - tap on to add/remove a contact to/from the favourites list.

NOTE

Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con- nected phone are shown in the centre display. Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.

Sorting The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order where special characters and numbers are sorted

under . The sort order can be made by first or last name, see the section "Settings for phone" for more information.

Related information Phone (p. 460)

Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 118)

Using the application menu in the driver dis- play (p. 105)

Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

Settings for phone Settings for connected phone.

Phone 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Phone and select settings:

Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible to use a ringtone from the phone or the car. Some phones are not fully compatible and their ringtones may therefore not be available for use in the car. For compatibil- ity, see support.volvocars.com.

Sort order for contacts - select sort order of contact list.

For call notifications in the head-up display*, see section "Head-up display".

Related information Settings for text messages (p. 467)

Bluetooth settings (p. 467)

Phone (p. 460)

Connect phone (p. 461)

Head-up display* (p. 112)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 467

Settings for text messages Settings for text messages on connected phone.

Message 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Text Messages and select settings:

Notification in centre display - shows message notifications in the centre dis- play's status bar.

Notification in driver display - shows notifications in the driver display. When notifications in the driver display are active, it is possible to manage incoming messages with the steering wheel's right- hand keypad.

Text message tone - select tone for incoming text message.

Related information Phone (p. 460)

Connect phone (p. 461)

Managing text messages (p. 465)

Settings for phone (p. 466)

Bluetooth settings Settings for Bluetooth-connected phone.

Bluetooth 1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings:

Previously paired devices - lists con- nected devices.

Remove device - removes the connected device.

Allowed services for this device - phone usage options: calling, sending/receiving messages, streaming media and as Internet connection.

Internet connection - option for connecting the car to the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection.

Add device - starts the pairing of a new device.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Phone (p. 460)

Connect phone (p. 461)

Media player (p. 446)

Online car* An online car provides the ability to use e.g. Internet radio and music services via apps as well as contact dealers in the car and download software.

The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*.

When the car is connected to the Internet, its Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be shared to allow other devices to use the Internet connection4.

Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar.

4 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.468

Related information Connecting the car (p. 468)

Apps (p. 438)

Book service and repair (p. 510)

System updates (p. 513)

Volvo ID (p. 23)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 469)

Connecting the car Connect the car to the phone via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*.

The mobile phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing the Internet connec- tion) and the plan must include data.

NOTE

Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost.

Activation of data roaming can result in fur- ther charges.

Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic.

NOTE

When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or car modem*.

NOTE

When using Android Auto, it is possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or car modem*.

Read Terms and Conditions for Services and Customer Privacy Policy at support.volvocars.com before connecting.

Connecting with Bluetooth See Connecting a phone.

Connecting with Wi-Fi

1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot- spot) on the mobile phone.

2. Press Settings in top view.

3. Press Communication Wi-Fi.

4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Wi-Fi.

5. Tap on the network name of the network to be connected.

6. Enter the network password.

7. If another connection source has been used in the past - confirm the option to change connection.

> The car connects to the network.

Note that certain phones switch off tethering after the contact with the car has been discon- nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the next time it is used. The tethering in the phone therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it is used.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

* Option/accessory. 469

When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. When the maximum number of saved phones (50) is reached, the first con- nected phones are deleted. To show the list of saved networks or manually delete saved net-

works, press Settings Wi-Fi Saved networks.

For network connection requirements, see the section Technology and security for Wi-Fi.

Connecting with car modem*5

When the car is connected to the Internet via the car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this connection.

1.

Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under the cargo area floor.

2. Press Settings in top view.

3. Press Communication Car Modem Internet.

4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car modem Internet.

5. If another connection source has been used in the past - confirm the option to change connection.

6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.

> The car connects to the network.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Connect phone (p. 461)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 471)

Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 471)

No or poor connection (p. 470)

Settings for car modem* (p. 472)

Bluetooth settings (p. 467)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)

Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot When the car is connected to the Internet, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other

devices to use the Internet connection.6

The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).

1. Press Settings in top view.

5 Only cars with Volvo On Call.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.470

2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.

3. Tap on Network name and name the shared connection.

4. Tap on Password and select a password to be entered on connecting devices.

5. Tap on Frequency band and select the fre- quency on which the hotspot is to transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets.

6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.

7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con- nection source, confirm the option to change connection.

> It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot- spot).

NOTE

Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur- ther charges from your network operator.

Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic.

Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar.

Press Connected devices to see a list of the currently connected devices.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 471)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 45)

No or poor connection (p. 470)

No or poor connection Factors affecting the network.

The amount of data transferred is dependent on the services or apps in use in the car. For exam- ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength.

Mobile phone to car The speed of the connection may vary depending on the location of the mobile phone in the car. Move the mobile phone handset closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure that there is no source of inter- ference in between.

Mobile phone to network The speed of the mobile network varies depend- ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor network coverage may occur, for example in tun- nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also depends on the agree- ment you have with your network.

NOTE

In the event of problems with data traffic, con- tact your network operator.

6 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory. 471

Restarting the phone If there are problems with the connection then it may help to restart the phone.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Remove Wi-Fi network Removing a network that is not to be used.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Wi-Fi Saved networks.

3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be removed.

4. Confirm the selection.

> The car will no longer connect to the net- work in future.

Remove all networks All networks can be removed simultaneously by restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to origi- nal factory settings.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 173)

Wi-Fi technologies and security Possible network types to connect to.

It is only possible to connect to the following types of network:

Frequency 2.4 or 5 GHz7.

Standards 802.11 a/b/g/n.

Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.

The cars Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Wi-Fi devices inside the car.

If several devices operate on the frequency at the same time then it may result in reduced perform- ance.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Connecting the car (p. 468)

Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 469)

No or poor connection (p. 470)

7 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory.472

Settings for car modem*8

The car is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi.

1. Press Settings in top view.

2. Press Communication Car Modem Internet and select settings:

Car modem Internet - select whether to use the car modem as Internet connection.

Data usage - tap on Reset resets the counters for received and sent data volume.

Network

Select network operator - automatic or manual selection of network operator.

Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Inter- net when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network pro- vider in your home country.

SIM card PIN

Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered.

Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be required for access to the SIM card.

Send request code used e.g. to top up or check the balance on a prepaid card. Functionality depends on the provider.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 469)

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps When the car is online there is the option to download new apps, keep existing apps upda- ted or uninstall apps.

NOTE

Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alter- natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.

The apps are managed via Download Centre in applica- tion view.

To be able to download, update or uninstall apps, the car must be online.

Downloading an app

1. Open the app Download Centre.

2. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in the car.

8 Only cars with Volvo On Call.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory. 473

3. Tap anywhere on the row for an app in order to expand in the list and get more informa- tion about the app.

4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app.

> The status of the download and installa- tion is shown while it is in progress.

A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app will remain in the list and it is possible to try to start a download again.

Cancelling a download Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-

gress.

Note that only the download can be cancelled installation cannot be cancelled once it has begun.

Updating apps If an app is being used during an ongoing update, it will be restarted in order for the installation to be completed.

Update all 1. Open the app Download Centre.

2. Select Install all.

> Updating is started.

Update some 1. Open the app Download Centre.

2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all available updates.

3. Locate the desired app and select Install.

> Updating is started.

Uninstalling an app An app that is being used must be closed in order for the uninstallation to be completed.

1. Open the app Download Centre.

2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all installed apps.

3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app.

> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis- appears from the list.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Radio (p. 440)

Media player (p. 446)

System updates (p. 513)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

474

License agreement for audio and media A license is an agreement granting a right to conduct some activity or to make use of another person's right under the terms and conditions of the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/developers.

Bowers & Wilkins

Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark of DuPont.

Dirac Unison

Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak- ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison.

DivX

DivX, DivX Certified and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are used under licence.

This DivX Certified device can play back DivX Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ- ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on www.divx.com to create, play back and stream digital video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating the DivX VOD section in the device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete the registration.

Patent numbers Protected by one or more of the following US patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.

Gracenote

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

475

Parts of the content are copyright of Gracenote or its suppliers.

Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun- tries.

Gracenote End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accordance with the intended end-user func- tions for this program or this device.

You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace-

note servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com- pany's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur- pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui- ries without knowing anything about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace- note service.

The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran- ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv- ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace- note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Grace-

note has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN- TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP- ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR- ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON- SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES.

Gracenote, Inc. 2009

Sensus software

This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

476

source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF

THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team.

This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved

Linux software

This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ LGPL software.

You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

477

The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind.

By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code.

Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code.

camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007

NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Unicode: 5.1.0 COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE

Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)

the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified.

THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

478

dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

Declaration of Conformity for Bluetooth module

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

479

Country/

Area

EU:

Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Type of equipment: Audio Navigation Unit

Hereby, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation declares that this Audio Navigation Unit is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EG.

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

480

Country/

Area

China: 1.

2.4 - 2.4835 GHz

(EIRP) 10dBi 100 mW 20 dBm

10dBi 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP)

20 ppm

( 2.4-2.4835GHz ) -80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)

() (2.5 )

-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)

-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)

-30 dBm / 1 MHz ( 1 - 12.75 GHz)

2. ( )

3.

4.

5.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

}}

481

Country/

Area

Korea: B ( )

(B )

,

.

.

Taiwan:

||

AUDIO AND MEDIA

482

Country/

Area

Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio isto e, no tem direito a proteco contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br

Kazakh- stan:

Model name: NR 0V

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Exporting country: Japan

AUDIO AND MEDIA

* Option/accessory. 483

Country/

Area

Mexico:

The Uni- ted Arab Emirates:

Related information Audio and media (p. 438)

Media player (p. 446)

Online car* (p. 467)

Gracenote (p. 449)

Sensus - connection and maintenance (p. 29)

AUDIO AND MEDIA

484

Terms and conditions for services and Customer Privacy Policy Read the terms and conditions for services and the Customer Privacy Policy at support.volvocars.com.

Terms & Conditions for Services Volvo is committed to offering you the absolute best services to ensure that it is as safe, comfort- able and pleasant as possible for you to drive your Volvo. Volvo offers a wide range of services, from assistance in emergency situations to navi- gation in various infotainment services.

Read these terms and conditions ("Service Terms and Conditions") carefully before using the serv- ices - support.volvocars.com.

Customer Privacy Policy This policy applies for the processing of customer data and personal data. The purpose of the policy is to provide our existing, previous and prospec- tive customers with a general understanding of:

The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data.

The types of personal data we gather.

The reasons we gather your personal data.

How we handle your personal data.

This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com.

Related information License agreement for audio and media

(p. 474)

License agreement for the driver display (p. 99)

Type approval for radar units (p. 323)

WHEELS AND TYRES

WHEELS AND TYRES

486

Tyres Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.

The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

Recommended tyres On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi- nal tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there- fore important that the new tyres also have this marking in order for the car's driving characteris- tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main- tained.

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially impor- tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- its in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 0715. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 07 of 2015.

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undam- aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that

are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

Wear and maintenance Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road con- dition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear.

To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre- vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.

Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work- shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer- tain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under- steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skid- ding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

WARNING

A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

1 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 487

Storage Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying down or hanging up - never standing up.

Related information Checking the tyre pressures (p. 488)

Tyres' rotation direction (p. 487)

Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 488)

Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)

Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)

Tyres' rotation direction Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Related information Tyres (p. 486)

WHEELS AND TYRES

488

Tread wear indicators on the tyres Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth.

A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Related information Tyres (p. 486)

Checking the tyre pressures Tyres with the correct air pressure increase driv- ing safety, save fuel and extend the service life of the tyres.

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu- ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, short- ens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheat- ing and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving charac- teristics.

Recommended tyre pressure

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which

pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions.

Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How- ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom- mended instead if optimum noise and travelling comfort are desired.

Checking the air pressure 1. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Carry out

the check on cold tyres, which means that the tyres should have the same temperature as the outside temperature. After several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

2. If necessary, inflate so that the air pressure corresponds with the approved tyre pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 489

Related information Tyres (p. 486)

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- ing system* (p. 491)

Inflate tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 498)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

Tyre monitoring* The tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver display when the pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low.

If the symbol first flashes for approximately one minute and then changes to a constant glow, it may indicate that the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.

Symbol Specification

The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre pressure.

The symbol flashes for approxi- mately one minute and then changes over to illuminating with a constant glow in the event of a fault in the ITPMS system.

System description ITPMS measures differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pres- sure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By com- paring the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pres- sure that is too low.

When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the display and a message is shown, see also the heading "Message in the driver display" below.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.490

General information on the tyre monitoring system In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys- tem is referred to generically as TPMS.

Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be checked once a month. When checking, the tyre should be cold and have the air pressure recom- mended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that rec- ommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure level is for these.

As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air pressure.

Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, and can affect car handling and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure has not been reached so that the indicator symbol illuminates.

The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system

is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym- bol for low tyre pressure. When the system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display will flash for about one minute and then remain illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when the car is started until the fault has been rectified. When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil- ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be affected.

A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea- sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from functioning correctly.

Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS after changing one or more tyres in order to ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS.

Messages in the driver display The following messages may be shown when the indicator symbol is illuminated:

Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate after fill

Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable

Tyre pressure system Service required.

If the system cannot determine which tyre has low pressure, all four tyres will be indicated in the centre display.

To bear in mind Always calibrate the system after a wheel

change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres- sures.

The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.

There is no option to deactivate ITPMS.

Related information Tyres (p. 486)

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- ing system* (p. 491)

Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 493)

Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni- toring* (p. 492)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 491

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitoring system* With the system for tyre monitoring, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pres- sure status can be viewed in the centre display.

Checking status 1. Open the Car status app in the app view.

2. Tap on Status to show the status of the tyres.

Status indication The graphics show the status for each tyre.

Status view2.

Green tyre:

The tyre pressure is above the limit value for a warning.

Yellow tyre:

The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressure as soon as possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the tyre pres- sure has been adjusted.

All tyres yellow:

The pressure is too low in two or more tyres. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the tyre pressures have been adjusted.

All tyres grey:

Calibration in progress.

Unknown status.

Several minutes driving above 30 km/h (20 mph) may be required for the system to become active.

All tyres grey and a message:

Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, activated shortly.

Tyre pressure system Service required. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is not working correctly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop (recommended).

Related information Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)

Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 493)

Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni- toring* (p. 492)

Car status (p. 510)

2 The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.492

Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre monitoring* When the tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low.

Check and rectify the tyre pressure when the indicator symbol for ITPMS is illuminated and the message Tyre pressure low is shown. Calibrate

ITPMS after the tyre pressure has been adjusted.

1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.

2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as indicated on the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.

3. Recalibrate the ITPMS system, see the sec- tion "Calibrating tyre monitoring".

4. In some cases, it may be necessary to drive the car for a few minutes at a speed above 30 km/h (20 mph) in order to extinguish the ITPMS symbol and clear the message.

Note that the ITPMS symbol does not extin- guish until the low tyre pressure has been rectified and new calibration has been per- formed.

NOTE

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kil- ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

WARNING

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.

The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance.

Related information Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- ing system* (p. 491)

Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 493)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

Inflate tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 498)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 493

Calibrating tyre monitoring* In order for the Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be determined. This must be performed each time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed.

For example, when driving with a heavy load or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol- lowing which, the system must be recalibrated.

1. Stop the engine.

2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.

3. Start the engine.

4. Open the Car status app in the app view.

5. Tap on Status to view tyre monitoring.

NOTE

The car must be stationary when calibration is started.

6. Press Calibrate.

7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and adjusted.

8. Drive the car.

Calibration is performed while the car is driv- ing. Calibration is interrupted temporarily if the engine is switched off, but is resumed automatically when the car is driven again.

> When sufficient data has been collected to enable the system to detect low tyre pressure, the tyres in the centre display change colour from grey to green. The system provides no additional confirma- tion that the calibration is complete.

If calibration fails, a message is shown: Calibration unsuccessful. Please try again..

NOTE

Remember that the TPMS system must be recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre pressure is adjusted. New reference values must be stored for the system to work cor- rectly.

Related information Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- ing system* (p. 491)

Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni- toring* (p. 492)

WHEELS AND TYRES

494

Emergency puncture repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the air pressure.

The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.

The puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the floor in the cargo area.

Sealing fluid bottle Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the expiration date has passed and after use. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested.

Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

WARNING

In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi- ately with soap and plenty of water.

Sealing fluid that makes contact with an eye must be rinsed away immediately with eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

Related information Using the emergency puncture repair kit

(p. 495)

Inflate tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 498)

Tyres (p. 486)

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

495

Using the emergency puncture repair kit Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

Overview

Electrical cable

Air hose

Pressure reducing valve

Protective cap

Label, maximum permitted speed

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Pressure gauge

Sealing fluid bottle

Switch

Connecting

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.

If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi- lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed that is affixed on one side of the com- pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed limit. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0, and locate the electrical cable and the air hose.

4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the bottle.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

496

5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- tle holder.

> The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo work- shop.

WARNING

In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water.

Sealing fluid that makes contact with an eye must be rinsed away immediately with eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.

Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread.

7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

NOTE

Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock- ets is in use when the compressor is operat- ing.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre cen- tre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

497

10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

11. Switch off the compressor and detach the electrical cable.

12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre.

13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid.

14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

NOTE

Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre.

WARNING

Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The dis- tance should be at least two metres.

15. Follow-up inspection

Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off.

16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf- ficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pil- lar (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

17. If the tyre needs to be inflated:

1. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label.

3. Switch off the compressor.

18. Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the protective cap on the air hose and fold the hose in the box.

Place TMK in the cargo area.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

498

19. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)

Inflate tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit.

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the engine.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 499

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. (Release air using the pressure reduc- ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

When changing wheels The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel.

Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting wheels.

When changing to another tyre dimension Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat- ing the software at each change of tyre dimen- sion. A software download may be necessary both when changing to larger and smaller dimen- sions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels.

Related information Removing a wheel (p. 499)

Fitting the wheels (p. 501)

Tool kit (p. 504)

Winter wheels (p. 503)

Spare wheel* (p. 502)

Wheel bolts (p. 502)

Removing a wheel Instructions for removing a wheel when chang- ing wheels.

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being changed in a trafficked location.

2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox.

Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised with a jack*.

Deactivate the function via the top view of

the centre display by pressing Settings

My Car Suspension and selecting Disable Leveling Control.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.500

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted in the foam block.

Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the specific car model may be used to raise the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec- ommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equip- ment.

4. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground to prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.

5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* to the stop position.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed all the way into the wheel bolt wrench.

6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool.

7. Loosen the wheel bolts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench*.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

8. When raising the car, it is important that the jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. The triangle markings in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting points. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess for the jack at each point.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 501

Crank up the jack* so that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump in the centre of the head fits into the jacking point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point. Also make sure you turn the jack so that the crank is as far away from the side of the car as possible, at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- gers must stand in a safe place.

9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 499)

Raise the car (p. 516)

Fitting the wheels (p. 501)

Tool kit (p. 504)

Fitting the wheels Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing wheels.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- gers must stand in a safe place.

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.

Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor- tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop- erly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the tighten- ing torque with a torque wrench.

5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

Related information Removing a wheel (p. 499)

When changing wheels (p. 499)

Spare wheel* (p. 502)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.502

Wheel bolts Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the hubs.

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.

Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench.

Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.

Locking wheel bolts* In the foam block under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 499)

Spare wheel* The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor- mal wheel.

The illustration is schematic - the shape of the foam block may vary depending on car model.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam block. The foam block contains all tools for changing a wheel, see the section "Tool kit".

The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced by a normal wheel as soon as possible.

The spare wheel is smaller than the regular wheel, which will affect the car's ground clear- ance. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car.

Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare wheel.

On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected.

If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, it is not possible to use snow chains at the same time.

The spare wheel must not be repaired.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

Taking out the spare wheel 1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear

and forwards.

2. Undo the retaining screw.

3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

Storing the punctured tyre 1. Put the tools back in the foam block and lift

the foam block back into the car.

2. Screw in the foam block using the mounting screws and then fold down the cargo area floor.

3. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 503

Related information Removing a wheel (p. 499)

Fitting the wheels (p. 501)

Tool kit (p. 504)

Jack* (p. 505)

Winter wheels Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con- ditions.

Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.

Tips for changing to winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed, mark which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- tures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom- mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Snow chains Volvo recommends that snow chains are not used on wheel dimensions greater than 18 inches.

Mounting instructions are supplied with Volvo original snow chains.

Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow chains are permitted.

In the event of uncertainty about the show chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious dam- age to the car and lead to an accident.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 499)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.504

Tool kit Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel changes or similar are found in the car's cargo area.

The foam block under the cargo area floor con- tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.

If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a jack* and wheel wrench* are included, as well as a package* with disposable gloves and a bag for the damaged tyre.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 499)

Jack* (p. 505)

Warning triangle (p. 504)

First aid kit (p. 505)

Warning triangle Use the warning triangle to warn other road users if the car is stationary in traffic.

Also activate the hazard warning flashers.

Storage spaces The warning triangle is located under the panel on the inside of the tailgate.

Folding up the warning triangle Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn and then unhooking the panel. Place the panel to one side.

Open the latch and take out the case.

Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to traffic.

Make sure that the warning triangle and case are properly secured in their storage space and that the hatch is fully closed after use.

Related information Tool kit (p. 504)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 505

Jack* Use the jack to raise the car when changing a wheel.

Only use the original jack when fitting a spare wheel or when changing between summer and winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be well greased.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the specific car model may be used to raise the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec- ommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equip- ment.

Applies to cars with level control* If the car is equipped with air suspension then this must be deactivated before the car is raised with the jack.

Switch off the function via the centre display:

1. Press on Settings in the top view:

2. Press My Car Suspension .

3. Select Disable Leveling Control.

Related information Tool kit (p. 504)

Raise the car (p. 516)

First aid kit The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.

Store the first aid kit in the space on the right- hand side in the cargo area.

Related information Tool kit (p. 504)

WHEELS AND TYRES

506

Dimension designation for wheel rim Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below.

All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.

7,5 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

18 Rim diameter in inches

50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

Related information Tyres (p. 486)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)

Dimension designation for tyre Designations for tyre dimension, load index and speed rating.

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

Designation of dimensions All tyres have a dimension designation, such as: 235/55 R18 104 V.

235 Tyre width (mm)

55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

18 Rim diameter in inches

104 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)

V Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 240 km/h (149 mph).)

Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. The lowest

permitted load index is specified in a load index table.

Speed rating Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below shows the maximum per- mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres3, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which the car can be driven depends on road condi- tions, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.

Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win- ter tyres)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

3 Both those with metal studs and those without.

WHEELS AND TYRES

507

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

WARNING

The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each respective engine variant are shown in the table, "Load index and speed rating". If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat and be damaged.

Related information Tyres (p. 486)

Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 506)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

Load index and speed rating (p. 576)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.510

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and mainte- nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Related information Servicing the climate control system

(p. 524)

Book service and repair (p. 510)

Car status The car's general status can be shown in the centre display along with the opportunity to book service.

The Car status app is started from app view in the centre dis- play and has three tabs:

Messages - saved status messages

Status - check of tyre pressure and engine oil level

Appointments - booking of service and repair work.

Related information Managing messages saved from the driver

display and centre display (p. 110)

Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- ing system* (p. 491)

Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 521)

Book service and repair (p. 510)

Book service and repair1

Manage service, repair and booking information directly from your online car.

The information is handled in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display.

This service provides, for certain markets, a con- venient way to book service and workshop visits directly from your car. Vehicle data is sent to your dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The dealer will get back to you with a booking sug- gestion. For certain markets, the system will remind you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system2 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes. You also have information on your dealer availa- ble in the car and can contact your workshop at any time.

Before the service can be used

Volvo ID

Create a Volvo ID, see section "Volvo ID".

Register the Volvo ID for your car, see sec- tion "Volvo ID". If a Volvo ID already exists, use the same e-mail address that was used when the Volvo ID was created.

1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

511

Changing contact address If you would like to change to another e-mail address, you can contact a Volvo dealer.

Selecting a Volvo dealer Select the Volvo dealer you would like to contact for service and repairs by going to www.volvocars.com and navigating to My Volvo.

Prerequisite for booking from car For the car to send and receive booking informa- tion, it must be connected to the Internet, see section "Online car".

Using the service When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, a message will appear in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours that the engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service.

You can also book a workshop visit later via the My Volvo owner's portal. To ensure that your dealer has the latest information on your car you can send vehicle data, see section "Sending Vehicle Data" below.

Book service or repair Fill in the appointment request when desired or when a message stating that service or repairs are needed is shown in the driver display and at the top of the centre display.

Filling in and sending an appointment request.

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press the Appointments button.

3. Press the Request appointment button.

4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled in.

5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is filled in.

6. Fill in information for the workshop in the field Tap to write information to the workshop, e.g. if there is anything you would like done during the workshop visit or any other important information to your work- shop.

Or press the button and speak the informa- tion. The information is then entered in the information field in your appointment request.

7. Press the Send appointment request but- ton.

> You will receive an appointment sugges- tion to your car within a couple of days.3. You will also receive the same communi- cation via e-mail and when you visit My Volvo.

In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display.

8. Press the Cancel request button to cancel your request.

3 This time frame may vary depending on market.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.512

The appointment request contains vehicle data when it is sent from your car to the workshop via your Internet connection. This information facili- tates planning for the workshop.

Accept the appointment suggestion The car will retrieve appointment suggestions via your Internet connection when it is available. When the car has received an appointment sug- gestion, a message will be shown at the top of the centre display.

1. Tap the message.

2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap on the Accept button. Otherwise press either of the Send new proposal or Decline buttons.

When an appointment suggestion is accepted, the reply will be sent to the workshop via your Internet connection.

Sending vehicle data You can send vehicle data at any time from your car, e.g. if you book a workshop visit directly via the My Volvo owner's portal, and will help your workshop with better basic information.

The vehicle data sent is the last saved (last time the car was running).

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press the Appointments button.

3. Press the Send car data button.

> A message that vehicle data are being sent is shown at the top of the centre dis- play. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity indicator.

The vehicle data are sent via your Internet connection.

See workshop information

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press the Appointments button.

3. Press the Workshop information button.

> A pop-up window with information on your dealer will open.

4. Call your dealer if you like, or tap on the address or GPS coordinates to start naviga- tion to your workshop2.

Booking information and vehicle data When you decide to book a service or send data from your car, the booking information and vehi- cle data will be sent via you Internet connection. The vehicle data make it easier for your workshop to plan your next visit.

The vehicle data consists of information in the following areas:

service requirement

time since last service

function status

fluid levels

meter reading

the car's vehicle identification number (VIN4)

the car's software version

the car's diagnostics data.

2 Applies to Sensus Navigation*. 4 Vehicle Identification Number.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 513

Related information Volvo ID (p. 23)

Online car* (p. 467)

Car status (p. 510)

Remote updates Several of the car's systems can be updated from the centre display with an online car.

The Download Centre app is started from app view in the centre display and enables:

searching for and updating system software

updating map data for Sensus Navigation*

downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.

Related information System updates (p. 513)

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 472)

System updates System updates are intended for the Internet- connected and infotainment components of the car. If system software updates are available, the updates can be made all at once or one at a time.

System updates are handled via the Download Centre app in the centre display's applica- tion view. A tap on the button starts a download application in the home view's bottom sub- view. If no search for available

updates has been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search is performed. No search is performed if a software installation is in progress. An icon in the down- load application's button System updates shows how many updates are available. A tap on the button shows a list of updates that can be installed in the car. For more information and answers to common questions regarding function and to download certain system updates, go in to support.volvocars.com.

For system updates to be possible, the car must be connected to the Internet, see section "Online car".

Searching for software updates is activated when the car is supplied from the factory.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.514

NOTE

Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alter- natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.

NOTE

An update can be interrupted when the igni- tion is switched off and the car is left.

However, the update does not have to be completed before the car is left, this is because the update is resumed the next time the car is used.

Update all system software Select Install all at the bottom of the list.

If no list is desired, then Install all can be selected at the System updates button instead.

Update individual system software programs Select Install for the software required.

Cancelling the download Tap on X in the activity indicator that has

replaced the button Install at the start of the download.

Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this can- not be cancelled.

Background search for software updates The function can be deactivated via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Download Centre.

3. Deselect Auto Software Update.

If an update is available, the message New software updates available is shown in the centre display's status bar. A tap on the message starts a download application in the home view's bottom subview. As soon as the download appli- cation has started, an icon in the download appli- cation's button System updates shows how many updates are available.

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 472)

Remote updates (p. 513)

Data transmission between car and workshop5

The time required for a booked visit to a Volvo workshop can be shortened by transmitting trou- bleshooting data as soon as the car stops at the workshop.

The data can be transmitted most conveniently by selecting the option Automatically connect when I arrive in settings view in the centre dis- play.

Each time the car slows to a slow enough speed it starts searching for a Wi-Fi network. If an authorised Volvo network (at a workshop) is found, a message is displayed or a pop-up win- dow opens in the centre display. (This does not apply when you connect manually, see the sec- tion "Connecting to a workshop manually" below).

Connecting to a workshop automatically

NOTE

To avoid the driver being disturbed by unwan- ted connection inquiries (for example, if the car is often parked in the neighbourhood of a workshop with an authorised Volvo network), the connection mode will change to manual if the driver declines connection twice within a period of 5 days.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 515

Without driver confirmation This option provides the most convenient way of transmitting troubleshooting data. The car con- nects without the need for the driver to confirm.

If the car stops at the workshop and is switched off with the start knob, a message is shown at the top in the centre display. The car will connect automatically when the drivers door is opened unless the driver presses the Cancel message button.

With driver confirmation This option requires confirmation by the driver for the car to connect.

If the car stops at the workshop and is switched off with the start knob, a pop-up window is opened in the centre display. If the driver taps the Connect button in the pop-up window then the car will automatically be connected when the driver's door is opened. If the driver does nothing, or presses the Abort button in the pop-up win- dow, no connection will be made.

Connecting to a workshop manually Manual connection is made by the service techni- cian.

Changing the connection mode The way the car connects can be changed in the settings view in the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Volvo Service Networks.

3. Select Automatically connect when I arrive, Ask before connecting or Never connect and never ask (manual connec- tion).

Related information Online car* (p. 467)

Settings view (p. 169)

5 This functionality will be gradually introduced in connection with the service workshops extending their services.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.516

Raise the car When raising the car it is important that the car jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the intended points on the cars underbody.

For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit- ted, must be switched off before the car is raised. Switch off the function via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Suspension .

3. Select Disable Leveling Control.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 517

The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).

If the car is raised with a workshop jack, it must be positioned under one of the four lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Make sure the jack plate is equipped with a rubber pad so that the car will be stable and not be damaged. Always use axle stands or similar.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 499)

Jack* (p. 505)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

518

Opening and closing the bonnet The bonnet can be opened using the handle in the passenger compartment and a handle under the bonnet.

Open the bonnet

Pull the handle near the foot pedals to release the bonnet from its fully closed posi- tion.

Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlock- wise to release the bonnet from the lock catches and lift the bonnet.

Warning - bonnet not closed When the bonnet is released, the warn- ing symbol and the graphics in the driver display will light up and an acoustic reminder will sound. If the car

starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat.

For more information on graphics, see section "Door and seatbelt reminder".

NOTE

If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig- nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Close the bonnet 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall

from its own weight.

2. When the bonnet stops against the lock catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. The bonnet must engage at both sides audibly.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

519

Bonnet completely closed.

WARNING

Never drive with an open bonnet!

If there are any signs that the bonnet is not properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi- ately and close it.

Related information Engine compartment overview (p. 519)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)

Engine compartment overview The overview shows some service-related com- ponents.

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Washer fluid filler pipe6

Central electrical unit

Air filter

Engine oil filler pipe

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

WARNING

The ignition system works at a very high and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system must always be in ignition position 0 when work is being performed in the engine com- partment.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot.

Related information Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 518)

Filling washer fluid (p. 533)

Topping up coolant (p. 522)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)

Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 521)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

6 Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

520

Engine oil An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characte- ristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected.

If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- cosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/ high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the driver display's warning symbol for low oil pres-

sure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the

driver display's warning symbol and display

texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per- mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified.

Related information Checking and filling with engine oil

(p. 521)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 569)

Engine oil specifications (p. 568)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

521

Checking and filling with engine oil The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor.

Filler pipe7.

In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals.

Action with regard to engine oil level does not need to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display.

WARNING

If this symbol is shown together with the message Engine oil level Service required, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is

recommended. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

If this symbol is shown together with a message about low oil level, such as Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre for example, then only

fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

Check the oil level

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press the Status button to show the oil level.

Graphics for oil level in the centre display.

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge in the centre display when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.

7 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

522

NOTE

If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, then the message No value available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.

Related information Engine oil (p. 520)

Engine oil specifications (p. 568)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 569)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Car status (p. 510)

Topping up coolant The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger com- partment.

When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc- tions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.

Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.

Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and top up with coolant. The coolant level must not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion tank.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

523

Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.

Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the hatch from the plastic cover.

Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and top up with coolant. The coolant level must not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion tank.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool- ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a defective cooling sys- tem when attempting to start the car.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- tures that are too high may occur result- ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

Related information Coolant specifications (p. 570)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

524

Servicing the climate control system The air conditioning system must only be serv- iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- ing leak detection.

Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Cars with R134a refrigerant

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 510)

Bulb replacement The bulb in the halogen headlamp, reversing lamp and rear fog lamp can be replaced by the driver.

The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be replaced without the help of a workshop, but the plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed before a bulb can be replaced.

Press down the pins into the plastic cover's four clips using a screwdriver or similar and lift away the cover.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 525

NOTE

Points to remember when the cover is refit- ted:

The pin in the clip needs to be pressed back fully before the clip is refitted in the cover.

When the cover is refitted, the pin must be pressed in until the end surface is level with the surface of the clip.

The reversing lamp bulb and the rear fog lamp bulb can be replaced without assistance from a workshop.

Contact a workshop8 if there is a fault in bulbs other than the bulbs in the halogen headlamps, the reversing lamp bulb or the rear fog lamp bulb. If a fault occurs in LED9 lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.

WARNING

The car's electrical system must be in ignition position 0 when replacing bulbs.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Lamps, front (car with halogen headlamps)

Dipped beam

Main beam

Daytime running lights/position lamps

Indicator

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED9)

8 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 9 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

526

Lamps, rear

Position lamps (LED)

Position lamps (LED)

Fog lamp

Reversing lamp

Indicator10

Brake light (LED)

Brake light - central, high-level (LED)

Related information Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 526)

Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 527)

Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi- tion lamp bulb, front (p. 528)

Replacing the front direction indicator bulb (p. 528)

Replacing the reversing lamp bulb (p. 529)

Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 530)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

Ignition positions (p. 385)

Replacing the dipped beam bulb The dipped beam bulb in halogen headlamps can be replaced by the driver.

Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Bulb replacement".

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Left-hand headlamp.

1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the dipped beam bulb.

10 Contact a workshop for replacement - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

527

2. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards and pulling it straight out.

4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide pin must be aimed straight upwards.

5. Press in the connector.

6. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

Replacing the main beam lamp The main beam lamp in halogen headlamps can be replaced by the driver.

Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Bulb replacement".

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Left-hand headlamp.

1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the main beam bulb.

2. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder upward and then pulling straight out.

3. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con- nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea- ses.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Fit the bulb in the socket and screw in.

7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

528

Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front The bulb for the daytime running light/position lamp in halogen headlamps can be replaced by the driver.

Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Bulb replacement".

Left-hand headlamp.

1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb.

NOTE

The bulb for the daytime running light/posi- tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted diagonally above the daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards and then pulling straight out.

2. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.

3. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press it into place.

6. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been removed, fit it into the socket and screw in.

7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

Replacing the front direction indicator bulb The direction indicator bulb in halogen head- lamps can be replaced by the driver.

Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Bulb replacement".

Left-hand headlamp.

1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the indicator bulb.

2. Press the catches together and pull the bulb holder straight out.

3. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.

4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press it into place.

5. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

529

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

Replacing the reversing lamp bulb The bulbs for the reversing lamp are located behind the panel in the tailgate.

1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn anticlockwise and then unhooking the panel. Place the panel to one side.

Lamp housing on left-hand side.

2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlock- wise and pulling it out.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise.

5. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clock- wise.

6. Hook on the panel and turn the knobs a quarter turn clockwise.

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

530

Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb The bulb for the rear fog lamp is located behind a hatch in the tailgate panel.

Left-hand drive cars have the fog lamp on the left-hand side, right-hand drive cars on the right- hand side.

The rear fog lamp bulb is replaced as follows:

The tailgate's inner panel.

1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn anticlockwise. Then unhook the panel and place it to one side.

Lamp housing on left-hand side.

2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it a quarter turn anticlockwise and pulling it out.

3. Remove the blown bulb from the bulb holder by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise.

5. Wipe the bulb's lens clean of any dirt, grease or moisture.

6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it a quarter turn clockwise.

7. Refit the panel and lock it on by turning the knobs a quarter turn clockwise.

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

Bulb specifications (p. 530)

Bulb specifications The specifications apply to bulbs in the halogen headlamps as well as the reversing lamp bulb and the rear fog lamp bulb. Contact a work-

shop11 if faults occur in other lamps.

Function WA Type

Dipped beam 55 H7

Main beam 65 H9

Front direction indicators 24 PY24W

daytime running lights/ position lamps, front

21/5 W21/5W

Reversing lamp 21 H21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL

A Watt

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 524)

11 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

531

Wiper blades in service position The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position when, for example, they are to be replaced.

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

Activating service position Service mode cannot be activated when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not

on. Service mode can be activated in two ways via the centre display:

Via function view Press the Wiper Service Position button. The light indi- cator in the button illuminates when the service position is activated. Upon activation, the wipers move to standing straight up.

Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Wiper Service Position.

> The wipers move up to standing straight up.

Deactivating service position Service mode can be deactivated in two ways via the centre display:

Via function view Press the Wiper Service Position button in the centre display. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when the service position is deacti- vated.

Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Deselect Wiper Service Position to deacti- vate service position.

The wiper blades also exit service position if:

Windscreen wiping is activated.

Windscreen washing is activated.

Rain sensor activated.

The car is driven away.

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the activation of wiping, wash- ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv- ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Related information Replacing a wiper blade (p. 532)

Filling washer fluid (p. 533)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

532

Replacing a wiper blade The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.

Replacing a windscreen wiper blade

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind- screen.

The wiper blades are different lengths.

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

533

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place. You should hear a click. Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Lower the wiper arm.

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected main- tenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Related information Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)

Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)

Filling washer fluid Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point.

Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir with a blue cap.

NOTE

When approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir the message Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in the driver display

together with the symbol .

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

534

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water).

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid freez- ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

Volume:

Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.

Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres.

Related information Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)

Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 518)

Starter battery The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The starter battery is used to start up the electri- cal system and drive the starter motor as well as other electrical equipment in the car.

The starter battery should be replaced by a

workshop12.

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.

The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery, designed for the carbon dioxide reducing func- tions, Start/Stop and regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different systems.

The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi- tions, climatic conditions etc.

Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

When connecting an external starter battery or battery charger, use the car's charging points in the engine compartment. The battery terminals on the car's starter battery in the cargo area must not be used.

During charging, both the starter battery and the support battery are charged.

12 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

535

Positive charging point

Negative charging point

IMPORTANT

When charging the starter battery and the support battery, only use a modern battery charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain- ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the driver display about the starter battery's state of charge may be tem- porarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charg- ing.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

536

The starter battery is located in the cargo area.

The following table shows specifications for the starter battery.

Battery

H7 AGM

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB

(A) 800

Size , LWH (mm) 315175190

Capacity (Ah) 80

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

IMPORTANT

Make sure the retaining strap is properly tightened.

Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace- ment to an authorised Volvo workshop.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery or support battery, a battery of AGM13 type must be fit- ted.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

The starter battery's container size must be consistent with the dimensions for the origi- nal battery.

Related information Symbols on the batteries (p. 537)

Support battery (p. 537)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 388)

13 Absorbed Glass Mat.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

537

Symbols on the batteries There are information and warning symbols on the batteries.

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owner's manual for the car.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains corro- sive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recycling.

NOTE

An expended starter battery or support bat- tery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner since it contains lead.

Related information Starter battery (p. 534)

Support battery (p. 537)

Support battery Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the starter battery, are equipped with a support bat- tery.

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful starter battery for starting and one support bat- tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.

The support battery is located in a box next to the strut tower.

The following table shows specifications for the support battery.

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB

(A) 170

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

538

Size , LWH (mm) 15090130

Capacity (Ah) 10

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery or support battery, a battery of AGM14 type must be fit- ted.

NOTE

The higher the current take-off in the car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption.

When the capacity of the starter battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is dis- engaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:

The engine starts automatically15 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).

The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A work- shop should be contacted in the event of ques- tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point.

NOTE

If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jump-started with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop function will continue to be activated. If the Start/Stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the opportunity to recharge.

If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of +15 C, the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside tempera- ture, the charging time may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger.

Related information Starter battery (p. 534)

Start/Stop (p. 396)

14 Absorbed Glass Mat. 15 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

539

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 388)

Symbols on the batteries (p. 537)

Fuses All electrical functions and components are pro- tected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Location of central electrical units

Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Cargo area

Related information Replacing a fuse (p. 540)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

540

Replacing a fuse All electrical functions and components are pro- tected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Related information Fuses (p. 539)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)

Fuses under glovebox (p. 544)

Fuses in cargo area (p. 548)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

541

Fuses in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.542

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses.

Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.

Fuses 18-30, 35-37, 46-54 and 55-70 are of the "Micro" type.

Fuses 31-34, 38-45 and 71-78 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop16.

Function AA

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

USB port in tunnel console, front*

5

12 V socket in tunnel console, front

15

Function AA

12 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat row

15

12 V socket in cargo area* 15

- -

- -

- -

- -

Heated windscreen* left-hand side

Shunt

Heated windscreen* left-hand side

40

Headlamp washers* 25

Windscreen washers 25

- -

Horn 20

Siren* 5

Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake)

40

Function AA

Windscreen wipers 30

Rear window washer 25

Heated windscreen* right-hand side

40

Parking heater* 20

Control unit for brake system (ABS pump)

40

- -

Heated windscreen* right-hand side

Shunt

Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission compo- nents; Electric steering servo; Central electronic module; Con- trol module for brake system

5

- -

Right-hand headlamp 7.5

Right-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDB

7.5

- -

16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

543

Function AA

- -

Module for controlling battery engagement

5

Airbags 5

Left-hand headlamp 7.5

Left-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDB

7.5

Accelerator pedal sensor 5

Transmission control module 15

Engine Control Module (ECM) 5

- -

- -

- -

- -

Engine control module; Actuator; Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel); Position sensor for turbo (die- sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet- rol)

20

Function AA

Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther- mostat for engine cooling sys- tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control module (diesel)

10

Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for output pulse (diesel)

7.5

Control module for spoiler roller cover; Control module for radia- tor roller cover; Relay coils for output pulse (diesel)

5

- -

Lambda-sond, front; Lambda- sond, rear (petrol)

15

Solenoid for engine oil pump; Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda sond, centre (petrol); Lambda sond, rear (diesel)

15

- -

Engine Control Module (ECM) 20

Ignition coils (petrol); Spark plugs (petrol)

15

Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30

Function AA

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

Starter motor Shunt

Starter motor 40

A Ampere B LED (Light Emitting Diode)

Related information Replacing a fuse (p. 540)

Fuses under glovebox (p. 544)

Fuses in cargo area (p. 548)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

544

Fuses under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst other things, the 230 V socket, displays and door modules.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

545

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.546

Positions Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are

of the "Micro" type.

Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop17.

Function AA

- -

230 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for rear seat*

30

- -

Movement detector* 5

Media player 5

Driver display 5

Keypad in centre console 5

Sun sensor 5

- -

- -

Steering wheel module 5

Function AA

Module for start knob and for park- ing brake control

5

Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel*

15

- -

- -

- -

- -

Control module for climate control system

10

Steering lock 7.5

Diagnostic socket OBDII 10

Centre display 5

Fan module for climate control sys- tem, front

40

- -

Function AA

Controls lighting; Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mir- ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad in tunnel console, by legroom for rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con- trol panels in rear doors

7.5

Control module for driver support functions

5

Panorama roof with sun blind* 20

Head-up display* 5

Passenger compartment lighting 5

- -

Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat)

5

- -

Humidity sensor 5

Door module in right-hand rear door

20

Fuses in cargo area 10

17 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory. 547

Function AA

Control module for Internet-con- nected car; Control module for tel- ematics

5

Door module in left-hand rear door 20

Audio control module (amplifier) (certain variants)

40

- -

Module for multi-band antenna 5

Modules for seat comfort (mas- sage) front*

5

- -

Rear window wiper 15

Control module for fuel pump 15

- -

- -

Seat heating, driver's side front 15

Seat heating, passenger side front 15

Coolant pump 10

- -

Function AA

Door module in left-hand front door 20

Control module for suspension (active chassis)*

20

- -

Sensus control module 10

- -

- -

Door module in right-hand front door

20

- -

TV* (certain markets) 5

Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15

A Ampere

Related information Replacing a fuse (p. 540)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)

Fuses in cargo area (p. 548)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.548

Fuses in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten- sioners.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

549

The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.550

Positions Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"

type.

Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop18.

Function AA

Rear window defroster 30

- -

Compressor for air suspension* 40

Lock motor for backrest on rear right-hand side

15

- -

Lock motor for backrest on rear left-hand side

15

- -

- -

Power operated tailgate* 25

Electrically operated front passen- ger seat*

20

Towbar control module* 40

Function AA

Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side

40

Internal relay coils 5

- -

Module for detecting foot move- ment* (for opening the power oper- ated tailgate)

5

- -

- -

Towbar control module* 25

Power driver seat* 20

Seatbelt pretensioner module, left- hand side

40

Parking camera* 5

- -

- -

- -

- -

Function AA

Control module for airbags and seatbelt tensioners

5

- -

Seat heating left-hand side rear* 15

- -

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 5

- -

Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5

Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, certain engine variants)

5

- -

AWD control module* 15

Seat heating right-hand side rear* 15

- -

A Ampere

Related information Replacing a fuse (p. 540)

Fuses under glovebox (p. 544)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)

18 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

551

Cleaning the exterior The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Handwashing Remove bird droppings from the paintwork

as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.

Hose down the underbody.

Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce

the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Automatic car wash An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach every- where. Washing the car by hand is recommended to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto- matic car washes with washing by hand.

NOTE

The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.

IMPORTANT

Before driving the car into an automatic car wash, deactivate the functions for Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold) and Automatic application of parking brake. If these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and the car will not be able to move.

In car washes where the car is towed through with rolling wheels, the following applies:

1. Drive into the automatic car wash.

2. Deactivate the function for automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold) using the switch in the tunnel console.

3. Deactivate the function for automatic appli- cation of parking brake via the centre display.

4. Move the gear lever to position N.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.552

5. Switch off the engine by turning the start knob in the tunnel console to STOP. Hold the knob in STOP position for at least 4 seconds.

> The car is ready for the automatic car wash.

IMPORTANT

The system will automatically switch to P mode unless the above step is followed. The wheels are locked in P mode, which they should not be when putting the car through an automatic car wash.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweep- ing movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking perform- ance.

Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service position.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu- larly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.

The frames around the side windows, the car's roof rails and the door frames at the windows* are produced in anodised aluminium. This means

that they should only be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. This is in order to avoid discolouration.

Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

553

IMPORTANT

Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano- dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows.

Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura- tion and destroy the surface treatment.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur- face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi- nium rims.

Related information Polishing and waxing (p. 553)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)

Using the parking brake (p. 410)

Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 390)

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rub- bing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- aging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as pre- serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paint- work damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)

Paint damage (p. 556)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.554

Rustproofing The car has effective protection against corro- sion.

Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of modern metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion- protected and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plastic components, abrasion protection and supplemental rust inhibitor in exposed areas. This combination guarantees that the body will remain free from corrosion problems over time. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast aluminium.

Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection normally requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur- ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu- tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com- ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)

Paint damage (p. 556)

Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.

Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials.

Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical but- tons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent.

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain removers since this risks destroying the colour of the upholstery.

Leather upholstery* Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/ Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating.

To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the cleaning and application of the protective cream once to four times per year (or more if required). The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo dealers.

Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended for cleaning the leather steering wheel.

Leather panel* Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather on the top of the instrument panel or at the door panel. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended for cleaning the leather panels.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

555

Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- faces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers.

Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo dealers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Inlay mats and floor mat Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac- uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING

Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adja- cent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by Volvo dealers.

Related information Cleaning the centre display (p. 555)

Cleaning the centre display Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre cloth.

Home button for the centre display.

1. Turn off the centre display with a long press on the home button.

2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. The screen should be wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth with small circular movements. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean water.

3. Activate the display with a short press on the home button.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

556

IMPORTANT

The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt.

IMPORTANT

When cleaning the centre display, only use gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres- sure can damage the screen.

IMPORTANT

Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not use win- dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or cleaning agent containing abrasive.

Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis- sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis- play.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 554)

Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Paint damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof- ing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

Colour code The colour code label is located on the car's door pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Exterior colour code

Any secondary exterior colour code

It is important that the correct colour is used.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.

Materials that may be needed

Primer19 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated bumpers.

Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks20.

Masking tape.

fine sand paper19.

Related information Repairing paint damage (p. 557)

Type designations (p. 560)

Rustproofing (p. 554)

19 If required. 20 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

557

Repairing paint damage When repairing paint damage, the car must be clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam- aged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.

2. Before painting, if necessary, e.g if sharp edges are found around the damage, a light sanding with a very fine sand paper can be done locally. The surface is cleaned thor- oughly and left to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.

For scratches, proceed as described above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

Touch-up pens and spray paints are available from Volvo dealers.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.

Related information Paint damage (p. 556)

Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

560

Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on labels in the car.

Label location

The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden- tification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

561

Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- tion number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf.

Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R134a.

Label for parking heater.

Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number.

Label for engine oil.

||

SPECIFICATIONS

562

Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number.

Decal for the car's identification number - VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Related information Air conditioning specifications (p. 571)

SPECIFICATIONS

563

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2941

B Length 4939

C Load length, floor, folded seat

1988

D Load length, floor 1153

E Height 1543

F Load height 704

Dimensions mm

G Front track 1652A

1655B

H Rear track 1643A

1645B

I Load width, floor 1130

J Width 1903 (1879C)

Dimensions mm

K Width including door mir- rors

2052

L Width including folded-in door mirrors

1929

A Applies to 18/19-inch wheels. B Applies to 20/21-inch wheels. C Body width.

SPECIFICATIONS

564

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own particular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

Related information Type designations (p. 560)

Towing capacity and towball load (p. 565)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

565

Towing capacity and towball load

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

NOTE

The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing bracket is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg.

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T5 AWD B4204T20 Automatic 1800B

2400C 130

T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic 1800B

2400C 130

T6 AWD B4204T27 Automatic 1800B

2500C 130

D4 AWD D4204T14 Manual select 1800B

2200C 130

||

SPECIFICATIONS

* Option/accessory.566

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic 1800B

2400C 130

D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic 1800B

2500C 130

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. B Applies to cars that are not equipped for a higher towing weight. C Applies to cars that are equipped for a higher towing weight.

IMPORTANT

When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg, provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed.

Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

Related information Type designations (p. 560)

Weights (p. 564)

Driving with a trailer (p. 429)

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 432)

SPECIFICATIONS

567

Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine codeA Output

(kW/rpm)

Output

(hp/rpm)

Torque

(Nm/rpm)

No. of cylinders

T5 AWD B4204T20 183/5500 249/5500 350/1500-4500 4

T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 350/15004800 4

T6 AWD B4204T27 235/5700 320/5700 400/2200-5400 4

D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4

D5 AWD D4204T23 173/4000 235/4000 480/1750-2250 4

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

Related information Type designations (p. 560)

Engine oil specifications (p. 568)

Coolant specifications (p. 570)

SPECIFICATIONS

568

Engine oil specifications Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Volvo recommends:

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T5 AWD B4204T20 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.9

T5 AWD B4204T23 approx. 5.9

T6 AWD B4204T27 approx. 5.9

D4 AWD D4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.2

D5 AWD D4204T23 approx. 5.2

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

Related information Type designations (p. 560)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 569)

Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 521)

Engine oil (p. 520)

SPECIFICATIONS

569

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level more frequently for long jour- neys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hotter than +40 C.

The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characte- ristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected.

If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- cosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Engine oil specifications (p. 568)

Engine oil (p. 520)

SPECIFICATIONS

570

Coolant specifications Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by

Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packag- ing.

Transmission fluid specifications The prescribed transmission fluid for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.

Manual gearbox

Prescribed transmission fluid:

BOT 350M3

Automatic gearbox

Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1

NOTE

The transmission fluid does not need to be changed under normal driving conditions.

Brake fluid specifications The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres- sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.

Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6 or equivalent.

NOTE

It is recommended that brake fluid is changed or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

571

Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Engine Volume (litres)

Petrol engine approx. 60

Diesel engine approx. 60

Related information Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-

elling (p. 420)

Air conditioning specifications The car's climate control system uses a refriger- ant, either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet.

Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below.

A/C decal

Decal for R134a

Decal for R1234yf

Symbol explanation R1234yf

Symbol Meaning

Caution

Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Lubricant type

A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Flammable refrigerants

||

SPECIFICATIONS

572

Refrigerant

Cars with refrigerant R134a

Weight Prescribed grade

700 g R134a

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with refrigerant R1234yf

Weight Prescribed grade

650 g R1234yf

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Compressor oil

Volume Prescribed grade

60 ml PAG SP-A2

Evaporator

IMPORTANT

The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi- fied and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842.

Related information Servicing the climate control system (p. 524)

Type designations (p. 560)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

573

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams CO2 per km.

Explanation

gram CO2/km

litre/100 km

urban driving

extra-urban driving

combined driving

manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data is miss- ing then it is included in the enclosed supple- ment.

T5 AWD (B4204T23) 214 9.4 143 6.3 169 7.4

T6 AWD (B4204T27) 227 9.9 147 6.5 176 7.7

D4 AWD (D4204T14) 159 6.1 120 4.6 134 5.1

D4 AWD (D4204T14) 162 6.2 124 4.7 138 5.2

D5 AWD (D4204T23) 159 6.1 128 4.9 139 5.3

Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU driving

cycles (see below), that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra

equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how

||

SPECIFICATIONS

574

heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consump- tion and carbon dioxide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel con- sumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:

If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car's weight.

The driver's driving style.

If the customer chooses wheels other than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version then rolling resistance may increase.

High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

A combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly increased consumption.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see below) which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- ably increase the car's fuel consumption.

EU driving cycles Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accord- ance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. Since the driving cycles are also used for quality control, there are significant requirements for repeatability of the tests. For this reason the tests are carried out under close scrutiny and only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). As a consequence of this the results from the official figures are not obviously representative of what the customer sees during actual usage.

The regulations cover the driving cycles for "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving":

Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simu- lated.

Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.

The official value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of the results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal requirements.

The exhaust gases are collected in order to extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2

emissions) during the two driving cycles. These

are then analysed and give the value for CO2

emissions.

Related information Type designations (p. 560)

Weights (p. 564)

Economical driving (p. 425)

SPECIFICATIONS

575

Approved wheel and tyre sizes In certain countries not all approved sizes are indicated by the registration document or other

documents. The following table shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

= Approved

Engine man/

aut

235/55R18

7,5x18x50,5

235/50R19

7,5x19x50,5

245/45R20

8x20x49.5

245/40R21

8x21x49.5

T5 AWD (B4204T20) aut

T5 AWD (B4204T23) aut

T6 AWD (B4204T27) aut

D4 AWD (D4204T14) man

D4 AWD (D4204T14) aut

D5 AWD (D4204T23) aut

Related information Load index and speed rating (p. 576)

Type designations (p. 560)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)

Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 506)

SPECIFICATIONS

576

Load index and speed rating The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).

Engine man/

aut

Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B

T5 AWD B4204T20 aut 96 V

T5 AWD B4204T23 aut 96 V

T6 AWD B4204T27 aut 96 V

D4 AWD D4204T14 man 96 V

D4 AWD D4204T14 aut 96 V

D5 AWD D4204T23 aut 96 V

A The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. B The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.

Related information Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)

Type designations (p. 560)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)

Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 506)

SPECIFICATIONS

577

Approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna- tive can be found in the table.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

Engine Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front

(kPa)B

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All engines

235/55 R18

235/50 R19

245/45 R20

245/40 R21

0 - 160C 240 240 260 260 260

160+D 250 250 280 280 -

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80E 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving. B In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C 0 - 100 mph D 100+ mph E max 50 mph

Related information Type designations (p. 560)

Checking the tyre pressures (p. 488)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

579

1, 2, 3 ...

4WD 406

A

A/C (Air conditioning) 190

ABS anti-lock brakes 406

ACC Adaptive cruise control 290, 299

Accessories and extra equipment 23

Active bending lights 141

Active main beam 138

Active Park Assist 374 function 374 Limitations 379 operation 376 Symbols and messages 381

Active Yaw Control 273

Adaptation of headlamp beam 141

Adapting driving characteristics 272, 400

Adaptive Cruise Control 290, 299 change cruise control functionality 301 fault tracing 300 function 290 managing speed 294, 295 overtaking 298

radar sensor 318 setting the time interval 296 standby mode 297 temporary deactivation 297

Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 215

Adjusting the steering wheel 132

Aerial location 240

Airbag 63 Activating/deactivating 66 driver's side 64 passenger side 64, 66

Airbag, see Airbag 63

Air conditioning 190

Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade 571

Air conditioning system 182, 186 repair 524

Air distribution 197 Air vents 197, 199 change 198 defrosting 194 Recirculation 196 table of options 201

Air quality 184, 185 allergies and asthma 185 passenger compartment filter 185

Air recirculation 196

Alarm 262 automatic re-arming 264 deactivation 264 reduced alarm level 262

Alcohol lock 384

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 185

All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 406

All Wheel Drive (AWD) 406

Android Auto 457

Apple CarPlay 454, 455

Applications settings 178

Approach lighting 148

Apps 438 download, update and uninstall 472

Ashtray 224

Audio and media 438

Audio settings 439, 467 media 452 phone 466 play media 447 Text message 465

Auto climate control 189

Automatic brake 413 after collision 409

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

580

Automatic car washes 551

Automatic engine stop auto-stop 396

Automatic gearbox 390 trailer 431

Automatic relocking 242

Automatic speed limiter 281

AUX jack for connecting media 452

Auxiliary heater 215

AWD, All Wheel Drive 406

B

Backrest front seat, adjusting 121, 122, 124 rear seat, lowering 130

Bag holder 228

Battery 388, 534 jump starting 388 maintenance 534 overload 418 start 534 support 537 symbols on the battery 537 warning symbols 537

BLIS 340, 342, 343

Bluetooth connect 451 connect car to Internet 468 phone 460 settings 467

Bonnet, opening 518

Book service and repair 510

Brake assist after collision 409

Brake fluid grade 570

Brake functions 406

Brake light 143

Brakes 406 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 406 automatic when stationary 413 brake assist system, BAS 408 brake light 143 brake system 406 emergency brake lights 408 handbrake 409, 410, 412

bulbs, specifications 530

C

Camera sensor 337

Car care 551 Leather upholstery 554

Car functions in centre display 47

Cargo area 226 electrical socket 220 lighting 146 mounting points 228 protective net 232

Cargo cover 230

Cargo grille 233

Car holiday 418

Car key battery low 257

Car modem connect car to Internet 468 settings 472

Car status 510 Tyre pressure 491

Car upholstery 554

Car washing 551

Catalytic converter Recovery 435

CD player 450

central locking 245

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

581

Centre display change settings 45 cleaning 555 climate control 187 messages 106 operation 36, 40 overview 33 symbols in status bar 45

Checking the engine oil level 521

Child safety 71

Child safety locks 261

Child seat 71 integrated booster cushion 82 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 77 lower mounting points 74 positioning/fitting 71 table for location 75 table of i-Size 81 table of ISOFIX 78 Upper mounting points 73

Cigarette lighter 224

City Safety 330, 332, 333, 335, 336, 337, 339

Cleaning automatic car wash 551 car washing 551 centre display 555 Fabric upholstery 554 rims 553

seatbelts 555 upholstery 554

Clean Zone Interior Package 185

Climate control 182, 186 auto-regulation 189 centre display 187 experienced temperature 183 fan control 193 Parking 206 rear seat 188 sensors 183 temperature control 190 voice control 119 zones 182

Clock, adjustment 99

CO2 emissions 573

Collision 56, 59, 63, 69

Collision warning 330

Collision warning system Pedestrian detection 333 Radar sensor 318

Colour code, paint 556

Combined instrument panel 90 settings 94

Compass 156 calibration 157

Condensation in headlamps 551

Controls lighting 135

Coolant 570

Coolant, filling 522

Cooling system overheating 417

Cornering lights 142

Corner Traction Control 273

Cover cargo area 230

Crash, see Collision 56

Cruise control 284 deactivate 287 managing speed 284, 285 temporary deactivation 286

CTA 343, 344, 345

Cyclist detection 333

CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 185

D

DAB Radio 444

Data recording 22 transfer between car and workshop 514

Data link connector 23

Daytime running lights 137

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

582

Deadlock 246 deactivation 246

Defrosting 194

Diesel 423 run out of fuel 424

Diesel particle filter 424

Digital radio (DAB) 444

Dimensions 563 Towing bracket 428

dipped beam 137

Dipstick, electronic 521

Direction indicator 144

Direction indicators 144

direction of rotation 487

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 394

Display lighting 135

Distance Warning 288, 289 Limitations 290

Door mirrors 153 automatic dimming 154 resetting 154

Drive-E Environmental philosophy 25

Driver Alert Control 352 operation 353

Driver display application menu 105 messages 106

Driver performance 168

Driver profile 174, 175, 176, 177 edit 175 import/export from/to USB 177 select 174

Drivetrain Gearbox 389

Driving cooling system 417 with a tailer 429

Driving economy 425

Driving in water 416

Driving mode 400

Driving with a trailer towball load 565 towing capacity 565

E

ECO mode 403

Economical driving 403, 425

ECO pressure 488, 577

Electrical socket 220

Electrical system 534

Electric parking brake 409 low battery voltage 412

Emergency equipment first aid kit 505 warning triangle 504

Emergency puncture repair 494, 498 action 495 inflating the tyres 498 rechecking 495

Emergency puncture repair kit 495 location 494 overview 495 sealing fluid 494

Emissions of carbon dioxide 573

Engine deactivate 387 overheating 417 start 386 Start/Stop 396

Engine braking, automatic 415

Engine compartment coolant 522 Engine oil 520 overview 519

Engine drag control 273

Engine oil 520, 569 adverse driving conditions 569

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

583

filter 520 grade and volume 568

Engine oil, filling 521

Engine specifications 567

Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control 302 see Messages and symbols 302, 316

Error messages in BLIS 347

Ethanol content maximum 10 percent by volume 422

External dimensions 563

F

Fan Air distribution 198 Air vents 199 Control 193

Fault tracing for the camera sensor 327

Ferry transport 405

First aid 505

First aid kit 505

Flooded road 416

Fluids, capacities 533, 570, 571

Fluids and oils 570, 571

Fog lamp front 142 rear 142

Foot brake 406, 408

Four-C 405

Front seat Climate control 187 Fan 193 heating 203 Temperature 190 Ventilation 204

Front seat, manual 121

Front seat, power 121, 123 adjusting seat 122, 127 massage 124 memory function 122 multi-function control 123, 124

FSC, ecolabelling 32

Fuel 421, 422, 423 fuel consumption 573 identifier 422, 423

Fuelling filling 420

Fuel tank volume 571

Fuel vapour 421

Fuse box 539

Fuses changing 540 General 539 in cargo area 548 in engine compartment 541 under glovebox 544

G

Gearbox 389 automatic 390 manual 392

Gear positions automatic gearbox 390

Gear selector inhibitor 394

Gear shift indicator 392

Glass laminated/reinforced 32

Glovebox 225

Gracenote 449

Gross vehicle weight 564

GSI - Gear selector assistance 392

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

584

H

Handbrake 409, 410

Hazard warning flashers 143

HDC 415

Headlamp beam adaptation 141 height adjustment 135

Headlamp control 134

Headlamp levelling of headlamps 135

Headlamp pattern, adjusting 141

Headlamp pattern adjustment 141

head restraint 128

Heated washer nozzles 150

Heater 213 auxiliary heater 215 parking heater 214

Heating seats 203 steering wheel 205 Windows 194

High engine temperature 417

Hill descent control 415

Hill Descent Control 415

Hill start assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) 412

Hill Start Assist 412

HomeLink 162

Home safe light duration 148

Horn 131

I

IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 185

IC (Inflatable Curtain) 69

Ignition position 385

Immobiliser 260

Indicator symbols 95

Individual drive mode 400

Inflatable curtain 69

Inflatable Curtain 69

Information display 90, 94

Infotainment system (Audio and media) 438

Instrument lighting 135

Instrument overview left-hand drive car 86 right-hand drive car 87

Instruments and controls 86, 87

Integrated booster cushion 82 lowering 84 raising 82

IntelliSafe Driver support 28

Interior Air Quality System 185

Interior lighting 145

Interior rearview mirror 155 automatic dimming 155

Intermittent wiping 148

Internet, see Internet-connected car 467

Internet-connected car book service and repair 510 system updates 513

iPod, connection 451

ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 489, 491, 492, 493

J

Jack 505

Journey statistics 168

Jump starting 388

K

Kerb weight 564

Key 176, 236, 239, 243

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

585

Keyboard 49, 53

Keypad in the steering wheel 131

Key tag 236

L

Labels 560

Laminated glass 32

Lamps 524

Lane Keeping Aid - LKA 354, 356, 358

Lane keeping assistant operation 356

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 554

Level control 405

License agreement 474

Lifting tool 505

Lighting active bending lights 141 approach lighting 148 automatic lighting, passenger compart- ment 145 Automatic main beam 138 bulbs, specifications 530 controls 134, 145 controls lighting 135 cornering lights 142

daytime running lights 137 dipped beam 137 display lighting 135 fog lamp 142 headlamp levelling 135 home safe lighting 148 instrument lighting 135 in the passenger compartment 145 main beam 138 position lamps 136 rear fog lamp 142

Lighting, bulb replacement 524 daytime running lights/position lamps front 528 dipped beam 526 direction indicators front 528 main beam 527 rear fog lamp 530 Reversing lamp 529

LKA - Lane Keeping Aid 354, 356, 358

Loading cargo area 227 General 227 load retaining eyelets 228 long load 227

Loading hooks 228

Load retaining eyelets cargo area 228

Lock locking 241, 245 unlocking 241, 245

Lockable wheel bolts 502

Lock confirmation 243

Locking/unlocking tailgate 247, 249

Low battery voltage Battery 418

Low speed control 414

M

Main beam 138

Maintained climate comfort 206 start/shut-off 210

maintenance Rustproofing 554

Manual gearbox 392

Max. roof load 564

Media player 446 compatible file formats 459 voice control 118

Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control 302 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 339

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

586

Messages in BLIS 347

Messages in displays 106 manage 108 saved 110

Metric, Imperial, US 98

Mileage 165

Misting condensation in headlamps 551

Mobile phone, see Phone 461

Mood lighting 146

N

Net cargo area 232

O

octane rating 422

Oil, see also Engine oil 568, 569

Oil level low 521

Online car 467 book service and repair 510 connect car 468 no or poor connection 470 system updates 513

Options/accessories 19

Output 567

outside temperature gauge 98

Overheating 417, 431

Owner's manual 19 ecolabelling 32 in centre display 15, 16

Owner information 14

Owners Manual in mobile 18

P

PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 66

Paddle on the steering wheel 131

Paintwork colour code 556 damage and touch-up 556, 557

Panorama roof opening and closing 159 pinch protection 161 sun blind 158 ventilation position 160

PAP - Active Park Assist 374

Park Assist 363, 365, 367 function 363, 365

Park assist camera 368, 370, 373 settings 372

Parking brake 409, 410, 412

Parking climate 206 Symbols and messages 212

Parking heater 214

Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 66

Passenger compartment filter 185

Passenger compartment heater (Parking heater) 214

Passenger compartment interior 218 ashtray 224 cigarette lighter 224 electrical socket 220 Sun visor 226 tunnel console 219

Passenger compartment lighting automatic 145

Pedestrian Protection System 58

Petrol grade 422

Phone 460 Calls 463, 466 connect 461 text message 465 voice control 118

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

587

Pilot Assist 304, 307, 309, 310, 311, 313, 314, 316

overtaking 298

Pinch protection, panorama roof 161

PIN code 472

Pocket park assist - PAP 374

Polishing 553

Position lamp 136

Power operated tailgate 253, 256

Power panorama roof 158

Power save mode 418

Power seat 121, 123

Power windows 151 resetting 153

PPS (Pedestrian Protection System) 58

Preconditioning 206 start/shut-off 207 Timer 208

Protective grille 233

Pump up tyre 498

Puncture 494

Q

Queue Assist 304, 309, 316

Queue assistance 304, 309, 316

R

Radar sensor 290 Limitations 319

Radio 440 change and search for radio station 440 DAB 444 settings 445 voice control 118

Rain sensor 149

Raising the car 516

Rear door sun blind 153

Rear seat 128 Climate control 187, 188 Fan 193 head restraint 128 heating 203 lowering the backrest 130 Temperature 190

Rearview and door mirrors compass 156, 157 door 153 electrically retractable 155 heating 194 interior 155

rear window heating 194 Washers 151 Wiper 151

Recommendations during driving 418

Recovery 435

Red Key 239

Refrigerant 524

Refuelling 420

Regeneration 424

Remote control, HomeLink programmable 162

Remote control immobiliser 260

Remote control key 176, 236, 239, 243 battery replacement 257 connect to driver profile 176 detachable key blade 250 loss 236 range 238

Remote control key system, type approval 265

Remote updates 513

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

588

Resetting, trip meter 166

Resetting the door mirrors 154

Resetting the power windows 153

Restore settings 179

Retractable power door mirrors 155

Retractable towing bracket 426

Road run-off protection 360, 362

Road sign information 348 Limitations 352 operation 348, 350, 351

Roll Stability Control 272

Roof load, max. weight 564

RSC (Roll Stability Control) 272

Run out of fuel diesel 424

Rustproofing 554

S

Safety 56 pregnancy 56

Safety mode 69 start/movement 70

Sealing fluid 494

Seat, see Seats 121

Seatbelt 59 buckle/unbuckle 60 pregnancy 56 seatbelt reminder 62 seatbelt tensioner 59

Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 59

Seatbelt reminder 62

Seatbelt tensioner 59

Seats heating 203 manual front seat 121 memory function front seat 122 power front seat 121, 123 rear seat 128 Ventilation 204 whiplash protection 57

sensors Air quality 185 Climate control 183

Sensus connection and entertainment 29

Service position 531

Service programme 510

Set time interval 289

Settings 169 Categories 170 Resetting 173

settings view 169 system settings 172

Side airbag 68

Side Impact Protection System 68, 69

SIM card 472

SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 68, 69

Skidding 419

Ski hatch 229

slippery driving conditions 419

Soot filter 424

spare wheel 502

Speed camera 350

Speed limiter 277, 281 deactivation 280 getting started 278 temporary deactivation 279

Speed ratings, tyres 506

Spin control 273

Stabiliser trailer 432

Stability and traction control system 273, 275 operation 274

Stability system 273

Stains 554

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

589

Start/Stop 396, 398 function and operation 396 the engine does not stop 398

Starting the engine 386

Start the car 386

Steering force, speed related 272

Steering force level, see Steering force 272

Steering lock 388

Steering wheel 131, 132 heating 205 keypad 131 paddle 131 steering wheel adjustment 132

Steering wheel paddles 395

Stone chips and scratches 556, 557

Stop/start function 396

Storage spaces 218 glovebox 225 tunnel console 219

Sun blind panorama roof 158 Rear door 153

Sun visor 226

Support 19

Support battery 537

Switching off the engine 387

Switch off engine 387

Symbols indicator symbols 95

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control 302 centre display status field 45 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 339 parking climate 212

System updates 513

T

Tailgate Locking/unlocking 247, 249 power 253, 256

Temperature Control 190 experienced 183

Temporary spare spare wheel 502

Through-load hatch 229

Tools 433, 504

Towbar foldable 426

Towing 434, 435

Towing bracket 426 specifications 428

Towing capacity and towball load 565

Towing eye 433

Traction control 273

Traffic information 445

Trailer 432 cable 429 driving with a trailer 429, 431 snaking 432

Trailer stability assist 273, 432

Transmission 389

Transmission oil grade 570

Tread 488

Tread depth 488, 503

Tread wear indicators 488

Trip computer 165, 166, 168

Trip meter 165

Trip meter, resetting 166

Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control 300

TSA - trailer stability assist 273, 432

Tunnel console 219

Tunnel detection 137

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

590

TV 453

Type approval radar system 323 remote control key system 265

Type designations 560

Tyre dimension 499, 506

Tyre load index 506

Tyre monitoring 489

Tyre pressure label 488

Tyre pressure monitoring Calibrate 493 low tyre pressure 492

Tyres 486 dimensions 575 direction of rotation 487 installation 501 pressure 488, 577 puncture repair 494 removal 499 specifications 575, 576, 577 storage 486 tread depth 503 tread wear indicators 488 tyre pressure monitoring 489 winter tyres 503

U

Unit standard Trip computer 166

Unlocking from the outside 241 with key blade 251

USB connect car to Internet 468 jack for connecting media 452

V

Vanity mirror lighting 146

Ventilation 197, 198, 199 seats 204

Vibration damper 426

Video 451, 452 settings 447

Voice control Climate control 119 map navigation 120 phone 118 radio and media 118 settings 117

Voice recognition 115

VOL marking 486

Volvo ID 23

W

Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control 290 stability and traction control system 273

Warning lamps Airbags SRS 97 alternator not charging 97 Fault in brake system 97 Low oil pressure 97 Parking brake applied 97 seatbelt reminder 97 starter battery not charging 97 Warning 97

Warning sound Parking brake 412

Warning symbols 97 Safety 56

Warning triangle 504

Washer fluid 533

Washer nozzles, heated 150

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

591

Washers rear window 151 washer fluid, filling 533 windscreen 150

Waxing 553

Weights kerb weight 564

Wheel bolts 502 lockable 502

Wheel change 499

Wheel rim, dimensions 506

Wheel rims cleaning 553

Wheels installation 501 removal 499 snow chains 503

Wheels and tyres approved dimensions 575 tyre load index and speed rating 506, 576

whiplash protection 57

Whiplash Protection System 57

WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 57

Wi-Fi connect car to Internet 468 delete network 471

share internet connection, hotspot 469 technology and security 471

Window sun blind 153

Windows and glass 32

Windscreen heating 194 projected image 112

Windscreen washing 150

Windscreen wiper 148 rain sensor 149

Winter driving 419

Winter tyres 503

Winter wheels 503

Wiper blades changing 532 Service position 531

Wipers and washing 148

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the V90 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V90 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V90. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.